From ad9b8fd36dfd3dfb35ff31001d7e8256518f6ff0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: unfoldingWord Date: Sat, 11 Feb 2023 15:48:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] Update tn_2CO.tsv from master to prepare for book package release Signed-off-by: unfoldingWord --- tn_2CO.tsv | 2132 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++--------------- 1 file changed, 1516 insertions(+), 616 deletions(-) diff --git a/tn_2CO.tsv b/tn_2CO.tsv index d862deeeb3..f3d1f23000 100644 --- a/tn_2CO.tsv +++ b/tn_2CO.tsv @@ -1,619 +1,1519 @@ Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note -front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians\n\n1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)\n1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)\n1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)\n1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)\n1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)\n\n### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?\n\nPaul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nPaul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.\n\n### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?\n\nIn 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.\n\nPaul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Corinth like?\n\nCorinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.\n\n### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?\n\nThese were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?\n\nThe scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:\n* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”\n* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)\n* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”\n\nThe UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.\n\n### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?\n\nThis kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.\n\nPlease see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?\n\nPaul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?\n* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1:intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThe first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special Concepts\n\n### Paul’s integrity\n\nPeople were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.\n\n### Comfort\n\nComfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical question\n\nPaul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### We\n\nPaul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.\n\n### Guarantee\n\nPaul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) -1:1 epd2 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nAfter Paul’s greeting to the church in Corinth, he writes about suffering and comfort through Jesus Christ. Timothy is with him as well. The word “you” throughout this letter refers to the people of the church in Corinth and to the rest of the Christians in that area. Possibly Timothy writes on parchment paper the words that Paul says. -1:1 mel3 Παῦλος & τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth” -1:1 f59u Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 The word **our** indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew **Timothy** and considered him to be their spiritual **brother**. -1:1 mhg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 **Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -1:2 f6k1 χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 This is a common greeting that Paul uses in his letters. -1:3 px2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1:3 k7dl ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ 1 Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” -1:3 pg4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 These two phrases express the same idea in two different ways. Both phrases refer to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1:3 blv4 ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 This could mean: (1) the words **mercies** and **all comfort** describe the character of **Father** and **God**. (2) the words **Father** and **God** refer to one who is the source of **mercies** and **all comfort**. -1:4 n2lc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 Here, **us** and **our** include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1:5 nn5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of the **sufferings of Christ** as if they were objects that could increase in number. Alternate translation: “For just as Christ suffered greatly for our sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:5 i254 τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) the **sufferings** that Paul and Timothy experience because they preach the message about Christ. (2) the **sufferings** that Christ experienced on their behalf. -1:5 tg9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν 2 Paul speaks of **comfort** as if it were an object that could increase in size. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:6 y9bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1:6 ylw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1:6 wyj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1:6 cfq7 τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως, τῆς ἐνεργουμένης 1 Alternate translation: “you experience effective comfort” -1:8 jqn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ & θέλομεν ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … uninformed**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1:8 pr8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐβαρήθημεν 1 Paul and Timothy refer to their emotions of despair being like a heavy weight they have to carry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:8 gu5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπερβολὴν & ἐβαρήθημεν 1 The word **burdened** refers to the feeling of despair. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We were in complete despair” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1:9 lks3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου ἐσχήκαμεν 1 Paul and Timothy are comparing their feeling of despair to that of someone condemned to die. Alternate translation: “we were in despair like someone who is condemned to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:9 i7up rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τῷ Θεῷ 1 The words “be putting our trust” are left out of this phrase. Alternate translation: “but instead, be putting our trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1:9 bu2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῷ ἐγείροντι τοὺς νεκρούς 1 Here to raise is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who causes the dead to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1:10 x4kh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θανάτου 1 Paul compares his feeling of despair as a result of the troubles that they experienced to a **deadly peril** or terrible danger. Alternate translation: “despair” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:10 mwn9 καὶ ἔτι ῥύσεται 1 Alternate translation: “he also will continue to rescue us” -1:11 q17d συνυπουργούντων καὶ ὑμῶν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τῇ δεήσει 1 Alternate translation: “God will rescue us from danger as you, the people of the church of Corinth, also help us by praying with us” -1:11 k1fl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the gracious favor which God has given to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1:12 kqv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἀνεστράφημεν 1 # General Information:\n\nIn these verses Paul uses the words **our**, **we**, and **ourselves** to refer to himself and Timothy and possibly others who served with them. These words do not include the people he was writing to. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1:12 r9p8 ἡ γὰρ καύχησις ἡμῶν αὕτη ἐστίν 1 The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of feeling great satisfaction and joy in something. -1:12 c7mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν 1 Paul speaks of not being guilty as if his **conscience** were a person that could testify. Alternate translation: “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1:12 c1bd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ, ἀλλ’ ἐν χάριτι Θεοῦ 1 Here, **fleshly** represents human. Alternate translation: “We have not relied on human wisdom but on the grace of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1:13 h21j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ’ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε ἢ καὶ ἐπιγινώσκετε 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **no … but**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “you could read and understand everything we write to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1:14 ma5m καύχημα ὑμῶν 1 The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of feeling great satisfaction and joy in something. -1:15 k1u9 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul explains his sincere expectation with pure motives to come see the believers in Corinth after his first letter. -1:15 n5ex ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει 1 The word **this** refers to Paul’s previous comments about the Corinthians. -1:15 y432 δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε 1 Alternate translation: “you might benefit from me visiting you twice” -1:16 mp6u ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν 1 Alternate translation: “to assist me to continue on to Judea” -1:17 zms7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἄρα τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ ἐχρησάμην? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize he was sure about his decision to visit the Corinthians. The expected answer to the question is “no”. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I was not hesitating.” or “I was confident in my decision.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1:17 chy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize that his plans to visit the Corinthians were sincere. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to human standards, so that I would say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1:17 fq3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? 1 This means that Paul did not say both that he would visit and that he would not visit at the same time. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to fleshly planning, so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ and ‘No, I will definitely not visit’ at the same time!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1:17 y41z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? 1 The words **yes** and **no** are repeated for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1:19 z4he rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ γὰρ Υἱὸς, Ἰησοῦς Χριστός & οὐκ ἐγένετο ναὶ καὶ οὒ, ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν. 1 **Jesus** says “**Yes**” concerning the promises of God, which means that he guarantees that they are true. Alternate translation: “For the Son of God, Jesus Christ … does not say ‘Yes’ and ‘No’ concerning God’s promises. Instead, he always says ‘Yes.’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +front:intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians\n\n1. Opening and blessing (1:1–2)\n2. Paul praises God for his comfort in affliction (1:3–11)\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:12–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n5. Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16)\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)\n * Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)\n * Blessing and thanksgiving (9:6–15)\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * The true standard for boasting (10:1–18)\n * Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15)\n * Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33)\n * Paul’s ascent to heaven and the thorn in the flesh (12:1–10)\n * Paul concludes his boasting (12:11–13)\n * Paul defends his financial conduct (12:14–18)\n * Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:19–13:10)\n8. Closing (13:11–13)\n\n### Who wrote the book of 2 Corinthians?\n\nThe author identifies himself as Paul the apostle. Paul was originally from the city of Tarsus but lived in Jerusalem. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee, and he persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul first visited the Corinthians during his third time traveling around the Roman Empire (see [Acts 18:1–18](../act/18/01.md)). After he visited them, he stayed in the city of Ephesus for more than two years (see [Acts 19:1–10](../act/19/01.md)).\n\nFrom Ephesus, he wrote them a letter that we call First Corinthians. After he wrote that letter, and during the two years that he lived in Ephesus, he visited the Corinthians very briefly, but it was a painful visit (see [2:1](../02/01.md)). After this visit, he wrote two letters to the Corinthians. We do not have the first letter that Paul wrote, but it was a severe letter that may have grieved the Corinthians (see [2:4](../02/04.md)). The second letter that Paul wrote is this letter, Second Corinthians. He wrote it from the region of Macedonia after his friend Titus returned from visiting the Corinthians and told him how the Corinthians were doing.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Corinthians about?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Corinthians to continue to help the Corinthians believe the true gospel and trust him as an apostle of Christ. He wrote this letter after Titus returned to Paul from visiting the Corinthians and delivering to them a letter of strong rebuke from Paul. In 2 Corinthians, Paul tells the Corinthians that he is happy that they have responded well to his letter. However, he still has instructions and corrections to write to them, and he continues to defend himself as an apostle who taught them the true gospel. Most generally, Paul wrote 2 Corinthians to strengthen his relationship with the Corinthians, to strengthen relationships between all Christians, and to help the Christians trust in and obey Christ more and more.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians” or “2 Corinthians.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth” or “A Second Letter to the Christians in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What was the city of Corinth like?\n\nCorinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea and in an important location, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. Therefore, many different kinds of people lived in the city, and there were many wealthy people. Also, people in Corinth worshiped many different gods, and their worship could include food and sexual activity. In this culture, Christians who did not participate in worshiping at least some of the many gods were often considered to be strange, and people did not want to associate with them.\n\n### What were the issues that Paul was addressing in this letter?\n\nThere are four major issues about which Paul wrote in 2 Corinthians. First, he decided not to visit the Corinthians again right away, even though that was his original plan. He wanted to tell the Corinthians that he had changed his plans and to show them that he was not making promises and then breaking them. Second, Paul and the Corinthians had a conflict or fight when Paul visited them. Paul wished to rebuild their relationship so that they could trust and care for each other. Third, Paul wanted to encourage the Corinthians to give money to help the believers in Jerusalem. Paul was collecting this money from many churches he knew, and he wanted the Corinthians to contribute generously. Fourth, some people were saying that Paul was not really a true apostle, and the message he preached was not the true gospel. These people were either visitors or lived in Corinth. Paul defended himself and the gospel that he preached against these people who opposed him. All four of these issues relate to one specific problem: the Corinthians were doubting Paul’s authority over and care for them. He wrote 2 Corinthians to address this primary issue, and he focused on these four specific themes.\n\n### Who were the false teachers that Paul speaks about?\n\nEverything we know about the false teachers who opposed Paul in Corinth comes from this letter. So, we do not know for sure who they were. Paul refers to them with two especially important names: “super-apostles” and “false apostles.” Some scholars think that the super-apostles were some of the twelve apostles that Jesus appointed, while the false apostles were people who were not actually apostles but claimed to be. On the other hand, many scholars think that these two names refer to the same group of people: false teachers who claimed to be apostles but were not actually apostles. Paul does not carefully distinguish the names; this second view is probably correct. Paul implies that these false teachers were Jewish people who claimed to serve Christ (see [11:22–23](../11/22.md)). They claimed to have authority and power. However, we do not know what exactly they were teaching about Jesus. We do know that they claimed that their gospel was better than what Paul preached, but Paul tells us that what they were teaching was wrong.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### What letters did Paul write to the Corinthians?\n\nPaul wrote at least four letters to the believers in Corinth. First, he wrote a letter related to avoiding sexual immorality (see [1 Corinthians 5:9](../1co/10509.md)). We do not have this letter. Second, he wrote a letter to the Corinthians that answered some of their questions and that addressed disputes within the Corinthian church. This letter is now known as First Corinthians. Third, Paul wrote a stern or “severe” letter to the Corinthians (see [2:3–4](../02/03.md) and [7:8–12](../07/08.md)). We again do not have this letter. Fourth, Paul wrote a letter after his friend Titus came from Corinth and told him that the Corinthians had responded well to the “severe letter.” This letter is now known as Second Corinthians.\n\n### About what visits to the Corinthians does Paul speak?\n\nWhile Paul does not directly mention it in 2 Corinthians, he first visited the Corinthians to proclaim the gospel to them. You can read about that in [Acts 18:1–18](../act/18/01.md). In 2 Corinthians, Paul briefly refers to his second visit to the Corinthians, which was “sorrowful” or “painful” (see [2:1](../02/01.md)). Sometime after this “painful” visit, Titus visited the Corinthians and then returned to Paul in Macedonia (see [2:12–13](../02/12.md) and [7:6–7](../07/06.md)). He probably took Paul’s “severe letter” with him. This may be the same visit of Titus that Paul refers to in [8:6](../08/06.md) and [12:18](../12/18.md), although either or both of these verses could refer instead to Titus taking this letter, 2 Corinthians, to the Corinthians.\n\nPaul also refers to two visits that had not yet happened when he wrote 2 Corinthians. First, Paul has asked Titus and two unnamed fellow believers to visit the Corinthians, taking the 2 Corinthians letter with them ([8:16–24](../08/16.md) and [9:3](../09/03.md)). Second, Paul plans to visit the Corinthians for a third time ([12:14](../12/14.md) and [13:1](../13/01.md)). You will need to make sure that your translation uses appropriate verb tenses and forms for referring to these visits. See the notes on specific verses for details and translation options.\n\n### How does Paul use irony and sarcasm?\n\nIn many places in this letter, Paul uses irony and sarcasm. In these places, he says things that he does not actually believe to be true. Usually, he is speaking from the perspective of other people and saying what they believe to be true. He does this to respond to what other people are saying or to show that what other people are saying is foolish or silly. The ULT often indicates that Paul is using irony or sarcasm by including quotation marks around the words that Paul does not actually believe to be true. The UST often indicates that Paul is using irony or sarcasm by indicating that someone is speaking the words. Consider how you might present sarcasm and irony in your language, and see the notes for places where Paul is using irony. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### What does Paul mean when he speaks about boasting?\n\nIn Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In this letter, Paul explains what counts as good boasting, and he explains that he boasts in a good way. He also implies that his opponents boast in a bad way. Paul thinks the best way to boast is to say great things about God and what God has done. However, in this letter Paul also boasts about himself, because his opponents, the false teachers, boast about themselves. He does not think that this boasting is the best way for him to be speaking to the Corinthians, but he does it to respond to his opponents and to show the Corinthians that he is a true apostle of Christ. He calls this boasting foolish. Consider how you might express both good, bad, and foolish kinds of boasting. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul frequently uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” (often with another name for Christ, such as Lord or Jesus) in this letter. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to identify that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### How should “brothers” be translated?\n\nMany times in this letter, Paul directly addresses or refers to people he calls “brothers.” The plural form, “brothers,” refers in general to fellow believers, both men and women. The singular form, “brother,” refers to a specific fellow believer, almost certainly one who is a man. Paul uses this word because he considers believers to be as closely united together as siblings in a family. Consider what word or phrase would best express both the reference to fellow believers and the idea that these fellow believers are as close as family members. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])\n\n### How should “you” and “we” be translated?\n\nThroughout the letter, you should assume that “you,” “your,” and “yours” are plural and refer to the Corinthian believers unless a note specifies that the form of “you” is singular. Also, throughout the letter, you should assume that “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include Paul and those who work with Paul but do not include the Corinthian believers unless a notes specifies that the form of “we” includes the Corinthian believers. Some scholars think that Paul sometimes uses the first person plural to refer to only himself. Other scholars think that Paul uses the first person plural to refer to both himself and those who serve with him. There is often not enough evidence be certain of which meaning Paul intended. It is recommended that you preserve how Paul sometimes uses the first person singular and sometimes uses the first person plural. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 2 Corinthians?\n\nIn the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations with which your readers may be familiar to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n\n* “in holiness” ([1:12](../01/12.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “in sincerity.”\n* “a second grace” ([1:15](../01/15.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “a second joy.”\n* “new things have come” ([5:17](../05/17.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “all {things} have become new.”\n* “I see” ([7:8](../07/08.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “for I see.” Other ancient manuscripts have this: “seeing.”\n* “and in the love from us in you” ([8:7](../08/07.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “and in your love for us.”\n* “by this situation” ([9:4](../09/04.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “by this situation of boasting.”\n* “so that he might buffet me, so that I would not become super arrogant” ([12:7](../12/07.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “so that he might buffet me.”\n* “If loving you” ([12:15](../12/15.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “If I love you.”\n* “[12] Greet each other with a holy kiss. All the saints greet you. [13] The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ and the love of God and the fellowship of the Holy Spirit {be} with all of you.” ([13:12–13](../13/12.md)). Some translations divide these sentences up into 3 verses instead of 2: “[12] Greet each other with a holy kiss. [13] All the saints greet you. [14] The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ and the love of God and the fellowship of the Holy Spirit {be} with all of you.” +1:intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n1. Opening and blessing (1:1–2)\n2. Paul praises God for his comfort in affliction (1:3–11)\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:12–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n\nThe first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Comfort\n\nComfort is a major theme of this chapter. Paul explains that believers experience affliction because they belong to Jesus. When this happens, the Holy Spirit comforts them. Then they are able to comfort others. Paul wants the Corinthian believers to know that he is not exempt from terrible persecution but that God always rescues and comforts him as well. He also wants them to know that God will do the same for them.\n\n### Paul’s integrity\n\nApparently, people in Corinth had been criticizing Paul, saying that he was not sincere and did not truly care about the Corinthian believers. Therefore, Paul refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical question\n\nPaul uses two rhetorical questions in 1:17 to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Metaphorical “Yes and No”\n\nIn 1:17-20 Paul uses the words “yes” and “no” together to represent the attitudes and speech of a person who is unstable and easily changes his mind about what he wants to do. It seems that some people had been accusing Paul of being such a person, but he makes it clear that he is not. Instead, he imitates God, who is always faithful, and Jesus, who faithfully fulfills all of the promises of God.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Holy Spirit as guarantee\n\nIn 1:22 Paul says that the Holy Spirit is the guarantee of all of God’s promises, including eternal life with him. The term “guarantee” comes from business deals in which a person gives some valuable item to another person as a guarantee that the first person will pay the full amount of money that he owes. Other words for this idea include “pledge” or “down-payment.” Paul uses this idea to explain that, because believers experience the blessings of the Holy Spirit now, they can be sure that they will experience all of God’s given promises after they die. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])\n\n### God as witness\n\nIn 1:23 Paul calls God to be a witness to his character, that he is being honest and faithful to the Corinthian believers. It is probable that Paul means this as an oath, in which it is expected that God would bear witness to what Paul is saying by dramatically punishing him or striking him dead if he is lying. Alternatively, he may intend that God will bear witness by affirming Paul's honesty to the Corinthian believers through the Holy Spirit. +1:1 mel3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Παῦλος & τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. For example, you may want to indicate that this is a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth” +1:1 f59u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 The word **our** here includes the Corinthian believers. The original has only “the brother,” but the word “our” was considered necessary for English. Use the wording that is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:1 mhg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀχαΐᾳ 1 The word **Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1:2 heps rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 After stating his name and the people to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace and peace from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +1:2 f6k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **Grace** and **peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I pray that God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ will be favorable to you and give you a peaceful spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:3 px2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:3 xshp rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing εὐλογητὸς ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 After blessing the recipients of his letter, Paul adds a blessing to God. If your people would consider it strange for people to bless God, then translate it as praise, since that is what we do when we bless God. Alternate translation: “May we always praise the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +1:3 k7dl rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Both **God** and **Father** refer to God. This phrase could mean (1) God is both God and Father to our Lord Jesus, or (2) God is Father to our Lord Jesus. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” +1:3 pg4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 Here, the possessive form describes **mercies** and **all comfort** as coming from God, who is their source. Both **Father** and **God** are the same person. Alternate translation: “the Father who is the source of mercies and the God who is the source of all comfort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1:3 tksv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ Πατὴρ τῶν οἰκτιρμῶν καὶ Θεὸς πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **mercies** and **comfort**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the Father who is merciful and the God who always comforts his people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:3 cen3 πάσης παρακλήσεως 1 Here, **all** could refer to: (1) time. Alternate translation: “who always comforts his people” (2) quantity. Alternate translation: “from whom every instance of comforting comes” +1:4 n2lc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 Here and continuing through verse 5, the pronouns **us**, **our**, and **we** probably include the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:4 ggj8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ 1 This phrase introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which God gives us afflictions and then comfort. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1:4 tl0d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ παρακαλῶν ἡμᾶς ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν, εἰς τὸ δύνασθαι ἡμᾶς παρακαλεῖν τοὺς ἐν πάσῃ θλίψει 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **affliction** and **tribulation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the one comforting us whenever people afflict us so that we are able to comfort others whenever people afflict them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:4 cxwj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo διὰ τῆς παρακλήσεως ἧς παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **comfort** or would not use both the noun **comfort** and the verb **comforted** together, you could express the same idea by using only the verb. Alternate translation: “in the same way in which we ourselves are comforted” or “just as we ourselves are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) +1:4 eh7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ 1 Paul uses the word **ourselves** to emphasize that we, even though we are weak human beings, can comfort others as God comforted us. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “even we are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1:4 hlnx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρακαλούμεθα αὐτοὶ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God comforts even us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:5 nn5a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὅτι καθὼς περισσεύει τὰ παθήματα τοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks of the **sufferings of Christ** as if they were objects that could increase and move toward him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “For just as people made Christ suffer, and they are now making us suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:5 tg9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περισσεύει & ἡ παράκλησις ἡμῶν 2 Here Paul speaks of **comfort** as if it were an object that could increase in size. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this with a different metaphor or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God comforts us abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:6 y9bi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 Here and through the first half of verse 21, the word **we** and other first-person pronouns refer to Paul and Timothy, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:6 bbff εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 There is no strong contrast here. Rather, Paul continues to talk about suffering and comfort. If it is helpful in your language, you do not need to use a word here that indicates a contrast with what came before. Alternate translation: “If we are afflicted” +1:6 ylw2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “But if people afflict us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:6 pxy2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε δὲ θλιβόμεθα 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it does happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “But when we are afflicted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1:6 gfyd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως καὶ σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **comfort** and **salvation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “it is so that you can be comforted and saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:6 wyj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if God comforts us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:6 ujj7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε παρακαλούμεθα 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it does happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when we are comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1:6 w94l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν παρακλήσεως 2 See how you translated this same phrase earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “it is so that you can be comforted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:6 mx46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ὑπομονῇ τῶν αὐτῶν παθημάτων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as you endure the same sufferings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:7 ot4d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, εἰδότες ὅτι ὡς κοινωνοί ἐστε τῶν παθημάτων, οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because we know that you share in God’s comfort just as much as in the suffering, our hope concerning you is firm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1:7 n3nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “And we firmly believe that you will endure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:7 klvm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡ ἐλπὶς ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 If your language requires you to specify the content of Paul’s **hope**, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “And our hope that you will remain faithful to Jesus is firm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:7 a4vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **comfort**, you could express the same idea in another way. See how you translated this word in verses 5 and 6. Alternate translation: “God will also comfort you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:7 ca1o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ τῆς παρακλήσεως 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “in the same way, you are partakers also of the comfort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1:8 jqn8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ & θέλομεν ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **ignorant**. Alternate translation: “we want you to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1:8 lgs0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπὲρ τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν τῆς γενομένης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning the time when people caused us to suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:8 pr8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐβαρήθημεν 1 Here, Paul is speaking of **tribulation** as if it were a heavy weight that they had to carry. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we were suffering so much that we thought that we could not endure it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:8 gu5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπερβολὴν & ἐβαρήθημεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it was excessively difficult for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:8 t4iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, **so that** introduces the result of what came before. Use a natural way to introduce a result in your language. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1:9 lks3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς τὸ ἀπόκριμα τοῦ θανάτου ἐσχήκαμεν 1 Paul is comparing the certainty of death that they experienced to that of someone who receives a **sentence of death**, that is, an order from a judge that he must be executed. Alternate translation: “we were as sure of our own deaths as someone is who is condemned to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:9 dttx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here the connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose that God had for Paul and his companions to feel that they would die is for them to trust in God. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1:9 i7up rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπὶ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but instead, we would be trusting in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1:9 bu2y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῷ ἐγείροντι τοὺς νεκρούς 1 Here, **raising the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “who causes the dead to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:10 x4kh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τηλικούτου θανάτου 1 Here, **so great a death** represents the terrible persecution that Paul and his companions were experiencing and that they were convinced would end in death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the jaws of death” or “such a deadly danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:10 eitn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ῥύσεται 1 The implication is that God will rescue Paul and his companions from similar dangerous situations in the future. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and whenever we are in danger, God will rescue us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:10 c2xx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς ὃν ἠλπίκαμεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we trust God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:11 q17d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν τῇ δεήσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **supplication**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by praying to God for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:11 xftq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. Paul presents the purpose of the Corinthians praying for him to be that many people will be thanking God. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1:11 h0u2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων & εὐχαριστηθῇ ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that many faces may give thanks on our behalf to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:11 oskx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐκ πολλῶν προσώπων 1 Paul is using **faces** to represent people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from the lips of many” or “from many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1:11 bmze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ εἰς ἡμᾶς χάρισμα 1 This **gracious gift** is something that God will do for Paul and his companions in the future in answer to many people’s prayers. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gift**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God will have graciously given us what we needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:11 dptz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis διὰ πολλῶν 1 Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the ideas earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “through the prayers of many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1:12 kqv3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμῶν & ἀνεστράφημεν 1 In these verses Paul uses the words **our**, **we**, and **ourselves** to refer to himself and Timothy and possibly others who serve with them. These words do not include the people to whom he is writing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:12 r9p8 ἡ γὰρ καύχησις ἡμῶν αὕτη ἐστίν 1 The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feelings of great satisfaction and joy in doing something well. Alternate translation: “This is something that we feel very good about” +1:12 c7mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν 1 Here, Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it were a person who could testify. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Please note that this alternate translation does not need the comma after **conscience**. Alternate translation: “we know by our conscience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1:12 hs5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ μαρτύριον τῆς συνειδήσεως ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **testimony** and **conscience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Please note that these alternate translations do not need the comma after **conscience**. Alternate translation: “our hearts tell us it is true” or “we are sure of it within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:12 xxc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἀνεστράφημεν 1 The phrase **we conducted ourselves** means that Paul and his companions controlled their own actions. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this idea. Alternate translation: “we acted” or “we comported ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1:12 c2z9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ 1 Paul is using **the world** to represent people who live in the world, that is, people in general. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “among everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1:12 nc7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁγιότητι καὶ εἰλικρινείᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **holiness** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as people whom God empowers to obey him and to be honest” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:12 c1bd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ 1 Here, **fleshly** represents what is natural and human as opposed to what is spiritual and godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not according to natural human wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:12 qej6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ σαρκικῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wisdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not according to what people naturally think is wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:12 ieqv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν χάριτι Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “according to what God tells us to do because he loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:13 c6t4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 The word translated as **For** here connects this verse to the previous one as evidence that supports the claim that Paul made in the previous verse. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this evidence to the previous statement. Alternate translation: “You see,” or “As you know,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1:13 h2f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness γράφομεν 1 Here Paul may be referring to himself with the plural pronoun **we** to show that he is only part of a group. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could use the singular “I” here instead, as Paul did later in the verse. Alternate translation: “I write” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]]) +1:13 h21j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ἄλλα γράφομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ’ ἢ ἃ ἀναγινώσκετε ἢ καὶ ἐπιγινώσκετε 1 Paul is expressing a positive meaning here by using the two negative phrases, **no other … but**. If it would be helpful, you could use an equivalent expression in your language or you could express the plain positive meaning. Alternate translation: “For everything we write to you is straight talk” or “For what we write to you is just what you read and understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1:13 vtx8 ἕως τέλους 1 This could mean: (1) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will understand everything that he is trying to say to them. Alternate translation: “all of it” or “fully” (2) Paul hopes that the Corinthians will continue to understand what he is saying to them until Jesus returns. Alternate translation: “until the end” +1:14 ma5m καύχημα ὑμῶν 1 The word **boasting** here is used in the positive sense of wanting to tell others your feeling of great satisfaction and joy in something good. See how you translated this in verse 12. Alternate translation: “your source of joy” or “your source of pride” +1:14 p1pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καθάπερ καὶ ὑμεῖς ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “just as you also are our boasting” or “just as you also are our reason to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1:14 urdj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 2 This occurrence of **ours** includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:15 n5ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει 1 The word **this** refers to what Paul has just said in verses 13 and 14. Paul was confident that the Corinthians would understand him and that they would be proud of him (very pleased with him). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the reference clear. Alternate translation: “being confident that you were proud of me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1:15 ehdw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ταύτῃ τῇ πεποιθήσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being confident of this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:15 xdb4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρότερον 1 Here, **before** could mean: (1) Paul intended to visit the Corinthians before going to Macedonia. Alternate translation: “before going to Macedonia” or (2) Paul intended to visit the Corinthians before he changed his plans. Alternate translation: “originally” or “at first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:15 ln3b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 The connecting words **so that** introduce a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for Paul’s plan of two visits was to give the Corinthians two times of grace or blessings. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1:15 y432 δευτέραν χάριν σχῆτε 1 The word translated as **grace** here can mean more specifically “gift” or “benefit” or “blessing.” Alternate translation: “you might benefit from me visiting you twice” +1:16 glgv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δι’ ὑμῶν διελθεῖν 1 Here, **you** represents the place where the Corinthians live. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to pass through your city” or “to visit you and then go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:16 mp6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν 1 Paul is referring in a polite way to the Corinthians giving him money and food by using the phrase **be sent ahead … by you**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a polite way of referring to this in your language, or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “to allow you to assist me so that I could continue on to Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +1:16 tk5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑφ’ ὑμῶν προπεμφθῆναι εἰς τὴν Ἰουδαίαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to have you send me ahead to Judea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:17 ehze rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο 1 The pronoun **this** refers to Paul’s plan to visit the Corinthians two times. If that is not clear for your readers, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “to visit you twice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1:17 zms7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἄρα τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ ἐχρησάμην? 1 Paul is using the question form here to emphasize that he did not change his plan to visit the Corinthians lightly. The expected answer to the question is “no.” If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I did not then act capriciously!” or “I did not become unstable.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1:17 chy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἃ βουλεύομαι, κατὰ σάρκα βουλεύομαι, ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? 1 Paul is using the question form here to emphasize that he does not make or change his plans according to his own desires. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I do not plan things according to the flesh, so that I would say “Yes, yes” and “No, no” at the same time.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +1:17 p0sf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 Here, **according to the flesh** is an idiom that means “based on changeable human desires.” If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “according to what I happen to be feeling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:17 fq3t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? 1 This could mean: (1) Paul would say both that he would visit and that he would not visit at nearly the same time. Alternate translation: “so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ and ‘No, I will definitely not visit’ at the same time” (2) Paul would say that he would visit while intending that he would not visit. Alternate translation: “so that I say ‘Yes, I will certainly visit’ even though I was intending that I would not visit” In either case, he is denying the accusation against him, that he is unreliable. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:17 y41z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἵνα ᾖ παρ’ ἐμοὶ τὸ ναὶ, ναὶ, καὶ τὸ οὒ, οὔ? 1 The words **Yes, yes** and **No, no** are both repeated for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “so that I would say both ‘yes’ and ‘no’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1:18 icwz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 The connecting words here could indicate: (1) a comparison. Paul may be comparing the faithfulness of God to his own commitment to speak truthfully to the Corinthian believers. Alternate translation: “and in the same way,” (2) a result. Paul may be saying that he is faithful in his speaking because he is following God’s example to be faithful. Alternate translation: “so, because of that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1:18 qutd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **our word** to refer to any message that he gave to the Corinthians by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:18 hmuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ναὶ καὶ οὔ 1 Here, **“Yes” and “No”** represents the speech of a person who says contradictory things. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “out of both sides of our mouth” or “one thing and then its opposite” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:19 jmcj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word translated **For** connects this verse to the one before it as an explanation. If the connection between this statement and the previous one is not clear, you may want to use a similar connecting word here. Alternate translation: “You see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1:19 hd2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ & Υἱὸς 1 **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -1:20 h2xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσαι & ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί 1 This means that Jesus guarantees all of the **promises of God**. Alternate translation: “all the promises of God are guaranteed in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1:20 h4uv ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί & δι’ αὐτοῦ 1 Both occurrences of the word **him** refer to Jesus Christ. -1:21 d3s3 ὁ δὲ βεβαιῶν ἡμᾶς σὺν ὑμῖν εἰς Χριστὸν καὶ χρίσας ἡμᾶς Θεός 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying that **God** confirms the relationship of him and his team with each other because they are **in Christ**. (2) Paul is saying that **God** confirms the relationship of him and his team, and the Corinthians, with **Christ**. -1:21 tjc6 χρίσας ἡμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) he sent us to preach the gospel. (2) he chose us to be his people. -1:22 z43l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ καὶ σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a mark on us as a sign that we belong to him. Alternate translation: “he has put his mark of ownership on us” or “he has shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:22 xe98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy δοὺς τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. Alternate translation: “gave us the Spirit to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1:22 jcv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 The **Spirit** is spoken of as if he was a partial downpayment toward eternal life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1:23 j8lc ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν 1 Here, to be **a witness** refers to a person telling what they have seen or heard in order to settle an argument. Alternate translation: “I ask God to show what I say is true” -1:23 j15t ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “so that I might not cause you more suffering” -1:24 cyu4 συνεργοί ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “we are working with you so that you may have joy” -1:24 cih8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῇ & πίστει ἑστήκατε 1 Here, **stand firm** can refer to something that does not change. Alternate translation: “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2:intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Special Concepts\n\n### Harsh writing\n\nIn this chapter, Paul refers to a letter he previously wrote to the Corinthians. That letter had a harsh and corrective tone. Paul probably wrote it after the letter known as First Corinthians and before this letter. He implies that the church had to rebuke an erring member. Paul is now encouraging them to be gracious to that person. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Aroma\n\nA sweet aroma is a pleasing smell. Scripture often describes things that are pleasing to God as having a pleasing aroma. -2:1 wh9c Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBecause of his great love for them, Paul makes it clear that his rebuke in his first letter to them (the rebuke of their acceptance of the sin of immorality) caused him pain as well as pain to the church people in Corinth and the immoral man. -2:1 ij73 ἐν λύπῃ 1 Alternate translation: “in circumstances that would cause you pain” -2:2 nb6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion εἰ γὰρ ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς, καὶ τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ? 1 Paul uses this rhetorical question to emphasize that neither he nor they would benefit if his coming to them would cause them pain. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “If I caused you pain, the only ones who could cheer me up would be the very ones whom I had hurt.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -2:2 x2vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the very one whom I had hurt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2:3 kxu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγραψα τοῦτο αὐτὸ 1 Paul is referring to another letter that he had written to the Corinthian Christians, but which no longer exists. Alternate translation: “I wrote as I did in my previous letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2:3 v87i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ & λύπην σχῶ ἀφ’ ὧν ἔδει με χαίρειν 1 Paul is speaking about the behavior of certain Corinthian believers who caused him emotional pain. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who should have made me rejoice might not hurt me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2:3 i5r6 ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 Alternate translation: “what gives me joy is what gives you joy, too” -2:4 uch7 ἐκ γὰρ πολλῆς θλίψεως 1 Here the word **affliction** refers to emotional pain. -2:4 vs7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy συνοχῆς καρδίας 1 Here the word **heart** refers to the location of the emotions. Alternate translation: “with extreme sorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2:4 d5vf διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων 1 Alternate translation: “with much crying” -2:6 iy4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἱκανὸν τῷ τοιούτῳ ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ τῶν πλειόνων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The punishment that the majority gave that person is sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2:6 wr3k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἱκανὸν τῷ τοιούτῳ ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη, ἡ ὑπὸ τῶν πλειόνων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word ** punishment**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “The way that the majority has punished that person is enough” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2:6 a7c4 ἱκανὸν 1 Alternate translation: “is sufficient” -2:7 vpx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 This means to have a strong emotional response of too much sorrow. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We do not want too much sorrow to overwhelm him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2:8 r916 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the church in Corinth to show love and to forgive the person they have punished. He writes that he, also, has forgiven him. -2:8 yi2z κυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην 1 This means that they are to confirm their **love** for this man in the presence of all of the believers. -2:9 xw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς πάντα ὑπήκοοί ἐστε 1 This could mean: (1) the Corinthians **are obedient** to God **in everything**. (2) the Corinthians **are obedient** **in everything** that Paul has taught them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2:10 cbm6 δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 This could mean: (1) they are forgiven out of Paul’s love for them. (2) they are forgiven for their benefit. -2:11 m46t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not ignorant**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “For we know his plans well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2:12 l6vd Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul encourages the believers in Corinth by telling them of the opportunities he has had to preach the gospel in Troas and Macedonia. -2:12 a1ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Paul speaks of his opportunity to preach the **gospel** as if it were a **door** through which he was allowed to walk. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:12 n9cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Lord indeed opened a door to me to preach the gospel of Christ” or “The Lord gave me the opportunity to preach the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2:13 rjy9 οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου 1 Alternate translation: “My mind was troubled” or “I was worried” -2:13 xd5h Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Paul speaks of **Titus** as his spiritual **brother**. -2:13 wq6j ἀλλὰ ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς 1 Alternate translation: “So I left the people of Troas” -2:14 gpd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ & Θεῷ & τῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Paul speaks of God as if he were a victorious general leading a victory parade and of himself and his coworkers as those who take part in that parade. This could mean: (1) God, who in Christ always causes us to share in his triumph. (2) God, who in Christ always leads us in triumph as those over whom he as gained victory. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:14 l1nr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Paul speaks of the **knowledge** of Christ as if it were incense that has a pleasing smell. Alternate translation: “He causes the knowledge of Christ to spread to everyone who hears us, just as the sweet smell of burning incense spreads to everyone near it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:14 eq21 φανεροῦντι & ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Alternate translation: “he spreads … everywhere we go” -2:15 x6nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks of his ministry as if it were the pleasing smell of a burnt offering that someone offers to **God**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:15 b1k1 Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 This could refer to: (1) the sweet aroma which is the knowledge of **Christ**. (2) the sweet aroma that **Christ** offers. -2:15 itc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς σῳζομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2:16 dwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀσμὴ 1 This refers back to [2 Corinthians 2:14](../02/14.md), where Paul speaks of the knowledge of Christ as if it were incense that has a pleasing smell. Alternate translation: “the knowledge of Christ is an aroma” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2:16 ud2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον 1 This could mean: (1) the word **death** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that causes death.” (2) this refers to an **aroma** of **death** that causes people to die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2:16 v2n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἷς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2:16 cdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 This could mean: (1) the word **life** is repeated for emphasis and the phrase means “an aroma that gives life.” (2) this refers to an **aroma** of life that gives people **life**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one is worthy to do the ministry that God has called them to do. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one is worthy of these things!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -2:17 a5sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καπηλεύοντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **word** is a metonym for “message.” Alternate translation: “who sell God’s message to make money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -2:17 x86y εἰλικρινείας 1 Alternate translation: “pure motives” -2:17 u2zb κατέναντι Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ λαλοῦμεν 1 Alternate translation: “we speak as people who are joined to Christ” or “we speak with the authority of Christ” -2:17 q4dc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Paul and his coworkers preach the gospel with the awareness that **God** is watching them. Alternate translation: “we speak in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -3:intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Law of Moses\n\nPaul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphors\n\nPaul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul’s teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit.”\n\nPaul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here, **Spirit** probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being “spiritual” in nature. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) -3:1 um8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize that they are not bragging about themselves. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We are not beginning to praise ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -3:1 y8yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν? 1 Paul used this question to express that the Corinthians already know about Paul and Timothy’s good reputation. The question prompts a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people do!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -3:1 ad1u συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν 1 This refers to **letters** that people write to introduce and give their approval of someone else. -3:2 ty59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they are a **letter** of recommendation. That they have become believers serves to validate Paul’s ministry to others. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:2 v2e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **hearts** refers to their thoughts and emotions. This could mean: (1) Paul and his coworkers are sure about the Corinthians being their letter of recommendation. (2) Paul and his coworkers care very deeply for the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -3:2 bu1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form with “Christ” as the implied subject, or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which Christ has written on our hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:2 dr5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that all people can know and read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:3 s717 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul clarifies that Christ is the one who has written the **letter**. Alternate translation: “you are a letter that Christ has written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:3 wrk4 διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “brought by us” -3:3 q96q ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 Paul clarifies that the Corinthians are like a spiritual letter, not like a letter that humans write with physical objects. -3:3 vyuh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 The verb “written” is implied in the second phrase. Alternate translation: “not written with ink, but written with the Spirit of the living God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -3:3 qt5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not a letter that people wrote with ink but a letter that the Spirit of the living God wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:3 t5ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 The verb “written” is implied from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not a letter that was written on stone tablets, but a letter that was written on tablets of human hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -3:3 ih89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not a letter that people engraved on stone tablets but a letter that the Spirit of the living God wrote on tablets of human hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:3 u959 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 Paul speaks of their **hearts** as if they are flat pieces of stone or clay upon which people engraved letters. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:4 z7qx πεποίθησιν δὲ τοιαύτην ἔχομεν 1 This refers to what Paul has just said. His **confidence** comes from knowing that the Corinthians are the validation of his ministry before God. -3:5 qye9 ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί 1 Alternate translation: “qualified in ourselves” or “sufficient in ourselves” -3:5 e5e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λογίσασθαί τι ὡς ἐξ ἑαυτῶν 1 Here the word **anything** refers to anything pertaining to Paul’s apostolic ministry. Alternate translation: “to claim that anything we have done in ministry comes from our own efforts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:5 wi1t ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “God gives us our sufficiency” -3:6 dp6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche καινῆς διαθήκης, οὐ γράμματος 1 Here the word **letter** means letters of the alphabet and refers to words that people write down. Alternate translation: “a covenant not based on commands that men have written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -3:6 gbsc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γράμματος 1 The phrase **the letter** alludes to the Old Testament law. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:6 tc4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 The Holy **Spirit** is the one who establishes God’s covenant with people. Alternate translation: “but a covenant based on what the Spirit does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -3:6 q4at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ & γράμμα ἀποκτέννει 1 Paul speaks of the Old Testament law as a person who **kills**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -3:6 one5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ & γράμμα ἀποκτέννει 1 Following that law leads to spiritual death. Alternate translation: “the written law leads to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:7 lyf7 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul contrasts the fading glory of the old covenant with the superiority and freedom of the new covenant. He contrasts the veil of Moses with the clarity of present revelation. The time of Moses was a less clear picture of what is now revealed. -3:7 ut6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony εἰ δὲ ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου & ἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ, ὥστε 1 Paul emphasizes that although the law leads to **death**, it was still very glorious. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -3:7 du65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here, **the ministry of death** refers to the Old Testament law that God gave through Moses. Alternate translation: “the ministry that causes death because it is based on the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:7 j1hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that God carved into stone with letters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:7 r5p5 ἐν δόξῃ, ὥστε 1 Alternate translation: “in so much glory that” -3:8 xxn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ? 1 Paul uses this question to emphasize that the **ministry of the Spirit** does must be more glorious than “the ministry of death” because it leads to life. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So the service that the Spirit does must be even more glorious!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -3:8 wq1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, **the ministry of the Spirit** refers to the new covenant, of which Paul is a minister. Alternate translation: “the ministry that gives life because it is based on the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:9 k779 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως 1 Here, **the ministry of condemnation** refers to the Old Testament law. Alternate translation: “the ministry that condemns people because it is based on the law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:9 if33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ 1 Here the phrase **much more** marks this phrase as an exclamation, not as a question. Alternate translation: “then the service of righteousness must abound in so much more glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -3:9 e5zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ. 1 Paul speaks of **the ministry of righteousness** as if it were an object that could produce or multiply another object. He means that this ministry is far more glorious than the law, which also had **glory**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:9 ufq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here, **the ministry of righteousness** refers to the new covenant, of which Paul is a minister. Alternate translation: “the ministry that makes people righteous because it is based on the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:10 n4pe καὶ γὰρ οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον & εἵνεκεν τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης 1 The Old Testament law no longer appears **glorious** when compared with the new covenant, which is much more glorious. -3:10 t2dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ δεδοξασμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the law which God once made glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:10 d7k5 ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει 1 Alternate translation: “in this way” -3:11 zwb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καταργούμενον 1 This refers to “the ministry of condemnation,” which Paul speaks of as if it were an object capable of disappearing. Alternate translation: “that which was becoming useless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:12 tnc1 ἔχοντες οὖν τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 The word **Therefore** refers to what Paul has just said. His **hope** comes from knowing that the new covenant has an eternal glory. -3:12 u5qa τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 Alternate translation: “such confidence” -3:13 p5u2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 The refers to the glory that shined on Moses’ face. Alternate translation: “the glory on Moses’ face as it faded away completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀλλὰ ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Paul speaks of the **minds** of the Israelite people as objects that could be closed or made hard. This expression means that they were unable to understand what they saw. Alternate translation: “But the Israelites could not understand what they saw” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:14 zm7j ἄχρι γὰρ τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας 1 Here, **the present day** refers to the time at which Paul was writing to the Corinthians. -3:14 w68p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει 1 Just as the Israelites could not see the glory on Moses’ face because he covered his face with a **veil**, there is a spiritual veil that prevents people from understanding when they read the **old covenant**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:14 gg2d ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Alternate translation: “when they hear someone read the old covenant” -3:14 gl8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον, ὅτι ἐν Χριστῷ καταργεῖται 1 Here, **it** refers to “the same veil.” If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one removes the veil, because only in Christ does God remove it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:15 rjh5 ἀλλ’ ἕως σήμερον 1 Here the word **today** refers to the time at which Paul was writing to the Corinthians. -3:15 t3dl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡνίκα ἂν ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς 1 Here the word **Moses** refers to the Old Testament law that Moses wrote down. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -3:15 ip29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡνίκα ἂν ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whenever someone reads the Mosaic law” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:15 gwp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται 1 Here the word **heart** represents what people think. Alternate translation: “a veil prevents them from understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -3:15 bb5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται 1 Here the people being unable to understand the old covenant is spoken of as if they have **a veil** that covers **their heart** the way a physical veil would cover their eyes. Alternate translation: “they are unable to understand what they are hearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:16 k2dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡνίκα & ἐὰν ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον 1 Here, **turn to** is a metaphor that means to become loyal to someone. Alternate translation: “when a person starts to worship the Lord” or “when a person starts to trust in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:16 w1y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 God gives them the ability to understand. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God lifts the veil away” or “God gives them the ability to understand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:18 r6rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς δὲ πάντες 1 Here the word **we** refers to all believers, including Paul and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -3:18 l3xw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι 1 Unlike the Israelites who could not see God’s glory reflected on Moses’ face because he had covered it with a veil, there is nothing to prevent believers from seeing and understanding God’s **glory**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -3:18 rc9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μεταμορφούμεθα 1 The Spirit is changing believers to be glorious like Jesus. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “The Lord is transforming us into his same glorious likeness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -3:18 bx5b ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 This means that the Spirit is constantly increasing the **glory** of believers. Alternate translation: “from one amount of glory to another amount of glory” -3:18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ Κυρίου 1 Alternate translation: “just as this comes from the Lord” -4:intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nThis chapter begins with the word “therefore.” This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Ministry\n\nPaul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### Life and death\n\nPaul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Hope\n\nPaul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]]) -4:1 lyi4 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul writes that he is honest in his ministry by preaching Christ, not praising himself. He shows the death and the life of Jesus in how he lives so that life can work in the Corinthian believers. -4:1 ix7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἠλεήθημεν, οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 Both occurrences of the word **we** refers to Paul and his coworker, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -4:1 h1ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 This phrase explains how Paul and his coworkers have “this ministry.” It is a gift that God has given to them through his **mercy**. Alternate translation: “because God has shown us mercy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:2 yp4g ἀπειπάμεθα τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 1 This means that Paul and his coworkers refused to do secret and **shameful** things. It does not mean that they had done these things in the past. -4:2 z4c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 1 The word **hidden** describes the things that people do secretly. Things that are **shameful** should cause people who do them to feel ashamed. Alternate translation: “the things that people do secretly because they cause shame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -4:2 ey75 περιπατοῦντες ἐν πανουργίᾳ 1 Alternate translation: “living by deception” -4:2 gp3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μηδὲ δολοῦντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **word of God** is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: “we do not mishandle God’s message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -4:2 lzn0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μηδὲ δολοῦντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **nor distorting**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “we use the word of God correctly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -4:2 aj24 συνιστάνοντες ἑαυτοὺς πρὸς πᾶσαν συνείδησιν ἀνθρώπων 1 This means that they provide enough evidence for each person who hears them to decide whether they are right or wrong. -4:2 f6n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **before God** refers to God’s presence. God’s understanding and approval of Paul’s truthfulness is referred to as God being able to see them. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:3 mti5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 This refers back to what Paul said starting in [2 Corinthians 3:14](../03/14.md). There Paul explained that there is a spiritual **veil** that prevents people from understanding when they read the old covenant. In the same way, people are not able to understand the **gospel**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:3 hz2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ & ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν & ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if a veil covers our gospel, that veil covers it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:3 e5yu τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “the gospel that we preach” -4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων 1 Paul speaks of the **minds** of unbelievers as if they had eyes, and their inability to understand as their minds being unable to see. Alternate translation: “the god of this world has prevented unbelievers from understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:4 tx9h ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 This phrase refers to Satan. Alternate translation: “the god who rules this world” -4:4 z4yp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 As the Israelites could not see God’s **glory** that shined on Moses’ face because he covered it with a veil ([2 Corinthians 3:13](../03/13.md)), unbelievers are not able to see Christ’s glory that shines in **the gospel**. This means that they are unable to understand “the gospel of the glory of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:4 j1vz τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 Alternate translation: “the light that comes from the gospel” -4:4 rdj3 τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “the gospel about the Christ’s glory” -4:5 ddw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν 1 You can supply the missing verb for these phrases. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim Christ Jesus as Lord, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -4:5 t8du διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” -4:6 rw5z ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει 1 With this sentence, Paul refers to God creating **light**, as described in the book of Genesis. -4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὃς ἔλαμψεν & πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the illumination from the light represents the ability to understand. Just as God created light, he also creates understanding for believers. Alternate translation: “the one who caused light to shine … to enable us to understand the glory of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **hearts** refers to the mind and thoughts. Alternate translation: “in our minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -4:6 mpg9 πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “to show us the knowledge of the glory of God” -4:6 p736 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Just as God’s **glory** shone upon Moses’ face ([2 Corinthians 3:7](../03/07.md)), it also shines upon **the face of Jesus**. This means that when Paul preaches the gospel, people are able to see and understand the message about God’s glory. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:7 xe5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχομεν δὲ 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul and his coworkers, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -4:7 xx2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχομεν & τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν 1 Paul speaks of the gospel as if it were a** treasure** and their bodies as if they were breakable **jars** made out of **clay**. This emphasizes that they are of little value compared to the worth of the gospel that they preach. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:8 ga9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “People afflict us in every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:9 bz8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διωκόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνκαταλειπόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people persecute us but God does not forsake us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:9 uvq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people strike us down but do not destroy us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:10 zt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πάντοτε τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες 1 Paul speaks of his sufferings as if they are an experience of **the death of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we are often in danger of dying, as Jesus died” or “we always suffer in such a way that we experience the death of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:10 l6f6 καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 This could mean: (1) our bodies will live again, because **Jesus** is alive. (2) the spiritual **life** that **Jesus** gives also may be shown in our bodies. -4:10 w3jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “other people may also see the life of Jesus in our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:11 ht74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀεὶ γὰρ ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες, εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, **being handed over to death** represents being in danger of dying because of being loyal to Jesus. Alternate translation: “for those of us who are alive, God is always leading us to face death because we are joined to Jesus” or “for people are always causing us who are alive to be in danger of dying because we are joined to Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:11 d1wm ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 God wants Jesus’ **life** to **be shown** in us. This could mean: (1) our bodies will live again, because Jesus is alive. (2) the spiritual life that Jesus gives also may be shown in our bodies. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md). -4:11 ww5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated this phrase in [2 Corinthians 4:10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “so other people may see the life of Jesus in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:12 q3il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Paul speaks of **death** and **life** as if they are persons who can **work**. This means that they are always in danger of physical death so that the Corinthians can have spiritual life. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -4:13 ret6 τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here the word **spirit** refers a person’s attitude and temperament. Alternate translation: “the same attitude of faith” -4:13 gzf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the one who wrote these words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:13 il5h ἐπίστευσα, διὸ ἐλάλησα 1 This is a quote from the Psalms. -4:14 t2i8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ ἐγείρας τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ & ἐγερεῖ 1 Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “the one who caused the Lord Jesus to live again will also raise” or “God, who raised the Lord Jesus, will also raise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -4:15 v7sj τὰ γὰρ πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **all these things** refers to all of the sufferings that Paul has described in previous verses. -4:15 l1mu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ χάρις πλεονάσασα διὰ τῶν πλειόνων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as God spreads his grace to many more people, it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:15 u8pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν εὐχαριστίαν περισσεύσῃ 1 Paul speaks of **thanksgiving** as if it were an object that could become larger by itself. Alternate translation: “more and more people may give thanks” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:16 u6e5 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul writes that the Corinthian difficulties are minor and do not last long when compared to the unseen eternal things. -4:16 cb92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives διὸ οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … discouraged**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “So we remain confident” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -4:16 hhv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται 1 This refers to their physical bodies decaying and dying. Alternate translation: “our physical bodies are getting weak and dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:16 s9b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ 1 This refers to their inward, spiritual lives getting stronger. Alternate translation: “our spiritual beings are being strengthened day by day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -4:16 zct5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται ἡμέρᾳ καὶ ἡμέρᾳ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is renewing our inward being more each day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:17 pd63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ γὰρ παραυτίκα ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν & αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης, κατεργάζεται ἡμῖν 1 Paul speaks of his sufferings and the **glory** that God will give him as if they were objects that can be weighed. The glory far outweighs the suffering. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:17 na9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν 1 The glory that Paul will experience is so heavy that no one can measure it. Alternate translation: “that cannot be measured” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -4:17 d9re rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that no one can measure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:18 t2fp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ βλεπόμενα, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “things that we can see, but not the things that we cannot see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -4:18 f97x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 You can supply the verb for this phrase. Alternate translation: “but we are watching for things that are unseen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### New bodies in heaven\n\nPaul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### New creation\n\nThe old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term “old” probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The “new creation” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Home\n\nThe Christian’s home is no longer in the world. A Christian’s real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christian’s circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### “The message of reconciliation”\n\nThis refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]]) -5:1 p7b7 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul contrasts believers’ earthly bodies to the heavenly ones God will give. -5:1 z4vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐὰν ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν 1 Here a temporary **earthly dwelling** is a metaphor for a person’s physical body. Here a permanent “building from God” is a metaphor for the new body that God will give believers after they die. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:1 zy2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐὰν ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “if people destroy the earthly dwelling that we live in” or “if people kill our bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:1 bqi5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Here, **house** means the same thing as “building from God.” Here, **hands** is a synecdoche that represents the human as a whole. Alternate translation: “It is a house in heaven, not made by humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -5:1 bbvr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “It is a house in heaven that humans did not make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:2 tc2j ἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν 1 Here, **this** means the same thing as “the earthly dwelling that we live in.” The word **groan** is a sound that a person makes when they eagerly desire to have something that is good. -5:2 ss6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες 1 The words **our dwelling that is from heaven** means the same thing as “a building from God.” Paul speaks of the new body that believers receive after they die as if it were both a building and a piece of clothing that a person can put on. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:3 i4es ἐνδυσάμενοι 1 Alternate translation: “by putting on our heavenly dwelling” -5:3 ap7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we will not be naked” or “God will not find us naked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:4 bz6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει 1 Paul speaks of the physical body as if it were a **tent**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:4 e34b ἐν τῷ σκήνει, στενάζομεν 1 The word **tent** refers to “the earthly dwelling that we live in.” The word **groan** is a sound that a person makes when they eagerly desire to have something that is good. See how you translated this in [2 Corinthians 5:2](../05/02.md). -5:4 cjt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρούμενοι 1 Paul refers to the difficulties that the physical body experiences as if they were heavy objects that are difficult to carry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:4 f8rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι & ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 Paul speaks of the body as if it were clothing for our spirit. Here, **to be unclothed** refers to the death of the physical body; “to be clothed” refers to having the resurrection body that God will give. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:4 n78p ἐκδύσασθαι 1 Alternate translation: “to be without clothes” or “to be naked” -5:4 de2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς 1 Paul speaks of **life** as if it were an animal that eats **the mortal**. The physical body that will die will be replaced by a resurrection body that will live forever. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:4 e5zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that life may swallow up what is mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:5 g7yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ δοὺς ἡμῖν τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 The **Spirit** is spoken of as if he were a partial **down payment** toward eternal life. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2 Corinthians 1:22](../01/22.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:6 clh5 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBecause believers will have a new body and have the Holy Spirit as a pledge, Paul reminds them to live by faith that they may please the Lord. He continues by reminding them to persuade others because: (1) believers will appear at the judgment seat of Christ. (2) Christ who died for believers in love. -5:6 xv3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι 1 Paul speaks of the physical **body** as if it were a place where a person dwells. Alternate translation: “while we are living in this earthly body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:6 ebl4 ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Alternate translation: “we are not at home with the Lord” or “we are not in heaven with the Lord” -5:7 rfn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ πίστεως & περιπατοῦμεν, οὐ διὰ εἴδους 1 Here, **walk** is a metaphor for “live” or “behave.” Alternate translation: “we live according to faith, not according to what we see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:8 a6au εὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here the word **body** refers to the physical body. -5:8 i3m3 ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Alternate translation: “at home with the Lord in heaven” -5:9 ml5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 The phrases “with the Lord” and “from the Lord” may be supplied from the previous verses. Alternate translation: “whether we are at home with the Lord or away from the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -5:9 j1sl εὐάρεστοι αὐτῷ εἶναι 1 Alternate translation: “to please the Lord” -5:10 kdf2 ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “before Christ to be judged” -5:10 c499 κομίσηται ἕκαστος 1 Alternate translation: “each person may receive what he deserves for” -5:10 v8sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things he has done in the physical body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:10 lsh8 εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν 1 Alternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad” -5:11 dzh5 εἰδότες & τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Alternate translation: “knowing what it means to fear the Lord” -5:11 qm34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν 1 This could mean: (1) **we persuade** people of the truth of the gospel. (2) **we persuade** people that we are legitimate apostles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -5:11 v11v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God clearly sees what kind of people we are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:11 y5l1 καὶ ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 Alternate translation: “that you are also convinced of it” -5:12 mza1 ἵνα ἔχητε 1 Alternate translation: “so you may have something to say to” -5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 Here the word **face** refers to outward expressions of things like ability and status. The word **heart** refers to the inward character of a person. Alternate translation: “those who praise their own actions, but do not care about what they really are in their inner being” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -5:13 cy57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἴτε & ἐξέστημεν & εἴτε σωφρονοῦμεν 1 Paul is speaking about the way others think of him and his coworkers. Alternate translation: “if people think we are crazy … if people think we are sane” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -5:14 azi9 ἡ γὰρ ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 This could refer to: (1) our **love** for **Christ**. (2) Christ’s **love** for us. -5:14 nd9g ὑπὲρ πάντων ἀπέθανεν 1 Alternate translation: “died for all people” -5:15 h831 τῷ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἀποθανόντι καὶ ἐγερθέντι 1 Alternate translation: “for him who for their sake died and whom God caused to live again” or “for Christ, who died for their sake and whom God raised” -5:15 ri6f τῷ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἀποθανόντι καὶ ἐγερθέντι 1 Here, **for the one** could refer: (1) only to **who died**. (2) to both **who died** and **was raised**. -5:16 f2ww Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nBecause of Christ’s love and death, we are not to judge by human standards. We are appointed to teach others how to be united with and have peace with God through Christ’s death and receive God’s righteousness through Christ. -5:16 ic21 ὥστε 1 Here, **Therefore** refers to what Paul has just said about living for Christ instead of living for self. -5:17 tl3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καινὴ κτίσις 1 Paul speaks of the person who believes in Christ as if God had created **a new** person. Alternate translation: “he is a new person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -5:17 ue8f τὰ ἀρχαῖα παρῆλθεν 1 Here, **The old things** refers to the things that characterized a person before they trusted in Christ. -5:17 vpe3 ἰδοὺ 1 The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. -5:18 jyf7 τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, **all these things** refers to what Paul has just said in the previous verse about new things replacing old things. -5:18 lj2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **reconciliation**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “the ministry of reconciling people to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -5:19 w1d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἦν ἐν Χριστῷ κόσμον καταλλάσσων ἑαυτῷ 1 Here, **the world** refers to the people in the world. Alternate translation: “in Christ, God was reconciling mankind to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -5:19 b62q θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 God has given Paul the responsibility to spread the message that God is reconciling people to himself. -5:19 ix97 τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Alternate translation: “the message about reconciliation” -5:20 wg8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ οὖν πρεσβεύομεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has appointed us as Christ’s representatives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:20 q9u9 ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ & πρεσβεύομεν 1 Alternate translation: “we are those who speak for Christ” -5:20 a6fx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -5:21 jp2a τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν 1 Alternate translation: “God made Christ become the sacrifice for our sin” -5:21 hz6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν & ἡμεῖς 1 Here the words **us** and **we** are inclusive and refer to all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -5:21 ebz2 τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 1 Alternate translation: “Christ, the one who never sinned” -5:21 kmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 The phrase **the righteousness of God** refers to the righteousness that God requires and which comes from God. Alternate translation: “so that we might have God’s righteousness in us through Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Servants\n\nPaul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Contrasts\n\nPaul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nThe Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nPaul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### We\n\nPaul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people. -6:1 kf1d Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul summarizes how working together for God is supposed to be. -6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Paul is implying that he and Timothy are **working** with God. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:1 s8db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Paul pleads with the Corinthians to allow the **grace of God** to be effective in their lives. If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … in vain**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “we beg you to make use of the grace that you have received from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -6:2 u9kc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λέγει γάρ 1 This introduces a quotation from the prophet Isaiah. Alternate translation: “for God says in scripture” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -6:2 sa94 ἰδοὺ 1 The word **Behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. -6:3 v3wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηδεμίαν ἐν μηδενὶ διδόντες προσκοπήν 1 Paul speaks of anything that would prevent a person from trusting in Christ as if it were a physical object over which that person trips and falls. Alternate translation: “we do not want to do anything that will prevent people from believing our message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:3 he3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία 1 The word **discredited** refers to people speaking badly about Paul’s ministry, and working against the message he proclaims. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no oner will be able to speak badly about our ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:4 xd9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive συνιστάντες 1 # General Information:\n\nWhen Paul uses **we** here, he is referring to himself and Timothy. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -6:4 p9up ἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι 1 Alternate translation: “we prove that we are God’s servants by all that we do” -6:4 xyf9 Θεοῦ διάκονοι: ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις 1 Paul mentions these difficult situations in which they proved that they are **God’s servants**. -6:6 w84c ἐν ἁγνότητι & ἐν ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ 1 Paul lists several moral virtues that they maintained in difficult situations that proved that they are God’s servants. -6:7 b6am ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας, ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Their dedication to preach the gospel **in the power of God** proves that they are God’s servants. -6:7 dui6 ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 Alternate translation: “by speaking God’s message about truth” or “by speaking God’s true message” -6:7 p5l5 ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “by showing God’s power to people” -6:7 ven8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Paul speaks of their **righteousness** as if it is **weapons** that they use to fight spiritual battles. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:7 ef5b τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Alternate translation: “righteousness as our armor” or “righteousness as our weapons” -6:7 ijr2 τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 This could mean: (1) there is a weapon in one hand and a shield in the other. (2) they are completely equipped for battle, able to fend off attacks from any direction. -6:8 zi7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul lists several extremes of how people think about him and his ministry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς πλάνοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people accuse us of being deceitful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:9 fcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as if people did not know us and yet people still know us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:9 r1d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we work as if people are punishing us for our actions but not as if they have condemned us to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:11 v74j τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “We have spoken honestly to you” -6:11 mv85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Paul speaks of his great affection for the Corinthians as having a **heart** that is open. Alternate translation: “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:11 r815 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s emotions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -6:12 m2kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthians lack of love for him as if their **inner parts** were squeezed into a tight space. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:12 u4fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We have not restrained you” or “We have not given you any reason to stop loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:12 xv9t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 Here, **inner parts** is a metonym for a person’s emotions. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -6:12 ecn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but your own hearts are restraining you” or “but you have stopped loving us for your own reasons” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Paul urges the Corinthians to love him as he has loved them. Alternate translation: “love us back” or “love us much as we have loved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:14 v7kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … unbelievers**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “Only be tied together with believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -6:14 qd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες 1 Paul speaks of working **together** toward a common purpose as if it were two animals tied together to pull a plow or cart. Alternate translation: “Do not team up” or “Do not have a close relationship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:14 v7pw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ 1 This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “For righteousness can have no association with lawlessness.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -6:14 xr52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 Paul asks this question to emphasize that **light** and **darkness** cannot coexist since light dispels darkness. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And light can have no fellowship with darkness!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -6:14 h9ks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 The words **light** and **darkness** refer to the moral and spiritual qualities of believers and unbelievers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:15 r1vq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ 1 This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There is no agreement between Christ and Beliar!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -6:15 rm3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βελιάρ 1 **Beliar** is another name for the devil. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -6:15 z9iv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου? 1 This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And a believer shares nothing in common with an unbeliever!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -6:16 y99x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων? 1 This is a rhetorical question that anticipates a negative answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And there is no agreement between the temple of God and idols!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -6:16 s3l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς γὰρ ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος 1 Here, **we** refers not only to Paul and his associates, but includes all Christians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -6:16 aqql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς γὰρ ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος 1 Paul speaks of Christians as forming a **temple** for **God** to dwell in. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple where the living God dwells” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:16 u5g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 This is an Old Testament quotation that speaks of God being with the people in two different ways that mean the same thing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -6:16 g0nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 The words **dwell among** speak of living where others live, while the words **walk among** speak of being with them as they go about their lives. Alternate translation: “I will be with them and help them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -6:17 fe1z General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul quotes portions from the Old Testament prophets, Isaiah and Ezekiel. -6:17 z5ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀφορίσθητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “set yourselves apart” or “allow me to set you apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -6:17 c8jq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **no unclean**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “touch only things that are clean” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -7:intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Clean and unclean\n\nChristians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])\n\n### Sadness and sorrow\n\nThe words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### We\n\nPaul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.\n\n### Original situation\n\nThis chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:1 h5xv ἀγαπητοί 1 Alternate translation: “you whom I love” or “dear friends” -7:1 fv49 καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 Here Paul is saying to stay away from any form of sin that would affect one’s relationship with God. -7:1 c2xf ἐπιτελοῦντες ἁγιωσύνην 1 Alternate translation: “striving to be holy” -7:1 pt41 ἐν φόβῳ Θεοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “out of deep respect for God” -7:2 v4nu Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving already warned the people of Corinth about other leaders who were striving to get these Corinthian believers to follow them, Paul reminds the people of the way he feels about them. -7:2 x3lg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς 1 This refers back to what Paul said starting in [2 Corinthians 6:11](../06/11.md) about them opening their hearts to him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:2 c2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthians loving him as if they were opening their hearts to him. Alternate translation: “Make room for us in your hearts” or “Love us and accept us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -7:3 bhb7 πρὸς κατάκρισιν οὐ λέγω 1 Here, Paul refers back to what he has just said about not having wronged anyone. Alternate translation: “I do not say this to accuse you of having done wrong.” -7:3 fay3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε 1 Paul speaks of his and his associates’ great love for the Corinthians as if they held them in their hearts. Alternate translation: “you are very dear to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -7:3 xzg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν 1 This means that Paul and his associates will continue to love the Corinthians no matter what happens. Alternate translation: “whether we live or whether we die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -7:4 mh12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You fill me with comfort” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:4 mx9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ 1 Paul speaks of **joy** as if it is a liquid that fills him until he overflows. Alternate translation: “I am extremely joyful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -7:4 mr75 ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “despite all our hardships” -7:5 f3c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Timothy but not to the Corinthians or Titus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -7:5 c8ju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our flesh** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “we had no rest” or “we were very tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -7:5 h3cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we experienced every kind of trouble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:5 i4wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 Here, **without** could mean: (1) “outside of our bodies.” (2) “outside of the church.” The word **within** refers to their inward emotions. Alternate translation: “by conflicts with other people and by fears within ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:7 w7td rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 Paul received **comfort** from knowing that the Corinthians had **comforted** Titus. Alternate translation: “by learning about the comfort that Titus had received from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:8 b2xj ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη 1 # General Information:\n\nThis refers to Paul’s previous **letter** to these Corinthian believers where he rebuked them for their acceptance of a believer’s sexual immorality with his father’s wife. -7:8 vk7m βλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη 1 Alternate translation: “when I learned that my letter” -7:9 kn5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not because what I said in my letter distressed you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:9 l6d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 This means that although the letter caused them sorrow, they eventually benefited from the letter because it led them to repentance. Alternate translation: “so that we did not harm you in any way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -7:10 dtm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡ γὰρ κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν & ἐργάζεται 1 The word **repentance** may be repeated to clarify its relationship to what precedes it and what follows it. Alternate translation: “For godly sorrow produces repentance, and repentance leads to salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -7:10 lc4m ἀμεταμέλητον 1 This could mean: (1) Paul has no **regret** that he caused them sorrow because that sorrow led to their repentance and salvation. (2) the Corinthians will not **regret** experiencing sorrow because it led to their repentance and salvation. -7:10 lc1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη, θάνατον κατεργάζεται 1 This kind of **sorrow** leads to **death** instead of salvation because it does not produce repentance. Alternate translation: “Worldly sorrow, however, leads to spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -7:11 gpp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν 1 Here the word **what** makes this statement an exclamation. Alternate translation: “your determination to prove you were innocent was very great!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -7:11 h6jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ ἐκδίκησιν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that someone should carry out justice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:12 i6sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ φανερωθῆναι τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that you would know that your good will toward us is sincere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:12 ycy7 ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **before God** refers to God’s presence. See how you translated this in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md). -7:13 kn2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τοῦτο παρακεκλήμεθα 1 Here the phrase **this reason** refers to the way the Corinthians responded to Paul’s previous letter, as he described in the previous verse. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is what encourages us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:13 v2g6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Here the word **spirit** refers to a person’s temperament and disposition. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all of you refreshed his spirit” or “all of you made him stop worrying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -7:14 b4uq ὅτι εἴ τι αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν κεκαύχημαι 1 Alternate translation: “For although I boasted to him about you” -7:14 m22c οὐ κατῃσχύνθην 1 Alternate translation: “you did not disappoint me” -7:14 q5hg ἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη 1 Alternate translation: “you proved to Titus that our boasting about you was true” -7:15 d87j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **obedience**, you can express the same idea with the verb, “obey.” Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -7:15 g9bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν 1 Here, **fear** and **trembling** share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: “you welcomed him with great reverence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -7:15 q47h μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 This could refer to: (1) great reverence for God. (2) great reverence for Titus. -8:intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nChapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Gift to the church in Jerusalem\n\nThe church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### We\n\nPaul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.\n\n### Paradox\n\nA “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](../08/02.md)) -8:1 mm8g Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nHaving explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving. -8:1 d1mj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -8:2 fsq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν, ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 Paul speaks of **joy** and **poverty** as if they were living things that can produce generosity. Alternate translation: “because of the people’s great joy and extreme poverty, they have become very generous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -8:2 b7k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν 1 Paul speaks of **joy** as if it were a physical object that could increase in size or quantity. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -8:2 pr8c ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν & τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 Though the churches of Macedonia have suffered testings of affliction and **poverty**, by God’s grace, they have been able to collect money for the believers in Jerusalem. -8:2 z6mt τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 The word **riches** emphasizes the greatness of their generosity. Alternate translation: “a very great generosity” -8:4 nmw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Paul is referring to providing money to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “this ministry of providing for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:6 z42y καθὼς προενήρξατο 1 Paul is referring to the collection of money from the Corinthians for the believers in Jerusalem. -8:6 vn4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἐπιτελέσῃ εἰς ὑμᾶς καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην 1 Titus was to help the Corinthians to complete the collection of money. Alternate translation: “he should encourage you to finish collecting and giving your generous gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:7 fpe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι περισσεύητε 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthian believers as if they should produce physical goods. Alternate translation: “make sure you do well in giving for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -8:8 wn2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς & τὸ τῆς ὑμετέρας ἀγάπης γνήσιον δοκιμάζων 1 Paul is encouraging the Corinthians to give generously by comparing them with the generosity of the Macedonian churches. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:9 c1ch τὴν χάριν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 In this context, the word **grace** emphasizes the generosity with which Jesus had blessed the Corinthians. -8:9 iz6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δι’ ὑμᾶς ἐπτώχευσεν, πλούσιος ὤν 1 Paul speaks of Jesus before his incarnation as **being rich**, and of his becoming human as becoming **poor**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -8:9 j5ym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ πλουτήσητε 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthians becoming spiritually **rich** as a result of Jesus becoming human. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -8:10 b7ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τούτῳ 1 Here the word **this** refers to Corinthians collecting money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “with regard to the collection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:11 fc27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καθάπερ ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **readiness**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “just as you were eager and desired to do it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -8:11 d6ly καὶ τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι 1 Alternate translation: “complete it” or “finish it” -8:12 k9wh καθὸ ἐὰν ἔχῃ 1 Alternate translation: “if it is proportional to what the person giving has” -8:13 mp6k For this 0 This verse refers back to collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. -8:13 smk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that you may relieve others and burden yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -8:13 ktd1 ἐξ ἰσότητος 1 Alternate translation: “so that there would be equality” -8:14 v7aj ἵνα καὶ τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα 1 Since the Corinthians are acting in the present time, it is implied that the believers in Jerusalem will also help them at some time in the future. Alternate translation: “this is also so that in the future their abundance may supply your need” -8:15 ue8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul quotes from Exodus. If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language.If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -8:15 u28y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἠλαττόνησεν 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … too little**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “had all he needed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -8:16 cr18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche τῷ διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου 1 Here, **heart** refers to the emotions. This means that God caused Titus to love them. Alternate translation: “the one who made Titus care for you as much as I do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -8:16 vsm3 τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν 1 Alternate translation: “the same enthusiasm” or “same deep concern” -8:17 e4xn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι τὴν μὲν παράκλησιν ἐδέξατο 1 Paul is referring to his asking Titus to return to Corinth and complete the collection. Alternate translation: “For he not only agreed to our request that he help you with the collection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -8:18 rje2 μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “with Titus” -8:18 jll9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸν ἀδελφὸν, οὗ ὁ ἔπαινος & διὰ πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brother whom believers among all of the churches praise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -8:19 j9rk οὐ μόνον 1 Alternate translation: “not only do believers among all of the churches praise him” -8:19 c667 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ χειροτονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the churches also selected him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -8:19 k7dy σὺν τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 This refers to taking the offering to Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “to carry out this act of generosity” -8:19 v22x προθυμίαν ἡμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “our eagerness to help” -8:20 a3ps rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 This refers to taking the offering to Jerusalem. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **administration**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “concerning the way we are handling this generous gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -8:21 n4x1 προνοοῦμεν γὰρ καλὰ 1 Alternate translation: “We are careful to handle this gift in an honorable way” -8:21 ey5n ἐνώπιον Κυρίου & ἐνώπιον ἀνθρώπων 1 Alternate translation: “in the Lord’s opinion … in people’s opinion” -8:22 d3yj αὐτοῖς 1 The word **them** refers to Titus and the previously mentioned brother. -8:23 mmi2 κοινωνὸς ἐμὸς καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός 1 Alternate translation: “he is my partner who works with me to help you” -8:23 lat3 ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our brothers** refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus. -8:23 u8lx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the churches have sent them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -8:23 a8v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξα Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **glory**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “they will cause people to honor Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -9:intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphors\n\nPaul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) -9:1 wc5l Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul continues on the subject of giving. He wants to make sure that the collection of their offering for the needy believers in Jerusalem takes place before he comes so that it does not seem as though he takes advantage of them. He talks about how giving blesses the giver and glorifies God. -9:1 fxs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 This refers to the collection of money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -9:2 rd2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀχαΐα 1 # General Information:\n\nWhen Paul refers to **Achaia**, he is talking about a Roman province located in southern Greece where Corinth is located. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -9:2 i529 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται 1 Here the word **Achaia** refers to the people who live in this province, and specifically to the people of the church in Corinth. Alternate translation: “the people of Achaia have been preparing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -9:3 r5pp τοὺς ἀδελφούς 1 Here, **the brothers** refers to Titus and the two men who accompany him. -9:3 k1er μὴ τὸ καύχημα ἡμῶν, τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, κενωθῇ 1 Paul does not want others to think that the things that he had boasted about the Corinthians were false. -9:4 j8ey εὕρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἀπαρασκευάστους 1 Alternate translation: “find you unprepared to give” -9:5 q1up rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, ἵνα προέλθωσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 From Paul’s perspective, **the brothers** are going. Alternate translation: “the brothers to come to you beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -9:5 nm2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ ὡς πλεονεξίαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not as something that we forced you to give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -9:6 mm9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει 1 Paul uses the image of a farmer sowing seeds to describe the results of giving. As a farmer’s harvest is based on how much he **sows**, so will God’s **blessings** be little or much based on how generously the Corinthians give. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -9:7 tzt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καθὼς προῄρηται τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 Here, **heart** refers to the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “just as he has determined” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -9:7 whg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐκ λύπης ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **sorrow** and **compulsion**, you can express the same idea with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “not because he feels guilty or because someone is compelling him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -9:7 t26d ἱλαρὸν γὰρ δότην ἀγαπᾷ ὁ Θεός 1 God wants people to give gladly to help provide for fellow believers. -9:8 cz9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δυνατεῖ δὲ ὁ Θεὸς, πᾶσαν χάριν περισσεῦσαι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, **grace** is spoken of as if it were a physical object of which a person can have more than he can use. As a person gives financially to other believers, **God** also gives to the giver everything he needs. Alternate translation: “God is able to give you more than you need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -9:8 zxz9 χάριν 1 Here, **grace** refers to the physical things a Christian needs, not to the need for God to save him from his sins. -9:8 u8w6 περισσεύητε εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν 1 Alternate translation: “so that you may be able to do more and more good deeds” -9:9 mma1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “This is just as the writer wrote” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -9:10 p3fl ὁ & ἐπιχορηγῶν 1 Alternate translation: “God who supplies” -9:10 b1xe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἄρτον εἰς βρῶσιν 1 Here the word **bread** refers to **food** in general. Alternate translation: “food to eat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -9:10 uts1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χορηγήσει καὶ πληθυνεῖ τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthians’ possessions as if they are seeds and of giving to others as if they were **sowing** seeds. Alternate translation: “will also supply and multiply your possessions so that you can sow them by giving them to others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -9:10 ci67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐξήσει τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν 1 Paul compares the benefits that the Corinthians will receive from their generosity to that of a harvest. Alternate translation: “God will bless you even more for your righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -9:10 yv67 τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν 1 Here, **righteousness** refers to the righteous actions of the Corinthians in giving their resources to the believers in Jerusalem. -9:11 eey1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πλουτιζόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will enrich you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -9:11 b3e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἥτις κατεργάζεται δι’ ἡμῶν, εὐχαριστίαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 The word **which** refers to the Corinthian’s generosity. Alternate translation: “Because of your generosity, those who receive the gifts we bring them will thank God” or “and when we give your gifts to those who need them, they will give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -9:12 l7kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅτι ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης 1 Here, **service** refers to Paul and his companions bringing the contribution to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “For our carrying out this service for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -9:12 esk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀλλὰ καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Paul speaks of the Corinthian believers’ act of service as if it were a liquid of which there is more than a container can hold. Alternate translation: “It also causes many deeds for which people will thank God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -9:13 plj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Because this service has tested and proven you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -9:13 ze14 δοξάζοντες τὸν Θεὸν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 Paul says that the Corinthians will **glorify God** both by being faithful to Jesus and by giving generously to other believers who have need. -9:15 es8c ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 This **gift** could refer to: (1) “the very great grace” that God has given to the Corinthians, which has led them to be so generous. (2) Jesus Christ, whom God gave to all believers. -10:intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 17.\n\nIn this chapter, Paul returns to defending his authority. He also compares the way he speaks and the way he writes.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Boasting\n\n“Boasting” is often thought of as bragging, which is not good. But in this letter “boasting” means confidently exulting or rejoicing.\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nIn verses 3-6, Paul uses many metaphors from war. He probably uses them as part of a larger metaphor about Christians being spiritually at war. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Flesh\n\n“Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) -10:1 yc1g Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul shifts the subject from giving to affirming his authority to teach as he does. -10:1 gq7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract noun for the ideas behind the word **meekness** and **gentleness**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. Alternate translation: “I am humble and gentle as I do so, because Christ has made me that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -10:2 i6hh τοὺς λογιζομένους ἡμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “who think of us” -10:2 ik1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὡς κατὰ σάρκα περιπατοῦντας 1 Here, **flesh** is a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are acting from human motives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -10:3 cvd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν σαρκὶ & περιπατοῦντες 1 Here, **walking** is a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “we live our lives in the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:3 zbet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν σαρκὶ & περιπατοῦντες 1 Here, **flesh** is a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “we live our lives in physical bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Paul speaks of his trying to persuade the Corinthians to believe him and not the false teachers as if he were fighting a physical **war**. These words should be translated literally. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐ κατὰ σάρκα στρατευόμεθα 1 The word **flesh** is: (1) a metonym for physical life. Alternate translation: “fight against our enemies using physical weapons” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “wage war in sinful ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Paul speaks of godly wisdom showing human wisdom to be false as if it were a weapon with which he was destroying an enemy stronghold. Alternate translation: “the weapons we fight with … show people that what our enemies say is completely wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:4 d1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy οὐ σαρκικὰ 1 The word **fleshly** is: (1) a metonym for merely physical. Alternate translation: “are not physical” (2) a metonym for sinful human nature. Alternate translation: “are not sinful” or “do not enable us to do wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -10:5 xuz9 πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον 1 Paul is still speaking with the metaphor of a war, as if “the knowledge of God” were an army and **every high thing** were a wall that people had made to keep the army out. Alternate translation: “every false argument that proud people think of to protect themselves” -10:5 b74d πᾶν ὕψωμα 1 Alternate translation: “everything that proud people do” -10:5 vm1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of arguments as if they were a wall standing high against an army. The phrase **rises up** mean “stands tall,” not that the “high thing” is floating up into the air. Alternate translation: “people use so they will not have to know who God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:5 r2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of people’s thoughts as if they were enemy soldiers whom he captures in battle. Alternate translation: “we show how all the false ideas those people have are wrong and teach the people to obey Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:6 m4ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν 1 Here, **act of disobedience** is a metonym for the people who commit those acts. Alternate translation: “punish every one of you who disobey us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -10:7 y2yb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε 1 This could be: (1) a command. (2) a statement. Alternate translation: “You are looking only at what you can see with your eyes.” Some think this is a rhetorical question that may also be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “Are you looking at what is clearly in front of you?” or “You seem unable to see what is clearly in front of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -10:7 z1t5 τοῦτο λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “he needs to remember” -10:7 f3i9 καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Alternate translation: “we belong to Christ just as much as he does” -10:8 d4zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:9 nw6e ἂν ἐκφοβεῖν ὑμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “I am trying to frighten you” -10:11 m6m6 τοῦτο λογιζέσθω ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 Alternate translation: “I want such people to be aware” -10:11 g58z οἷοί ἐσμεν τῷ λόγῳ δι’ ἐπιστολῶν ἀπόντες, τοιοῦτοι καὶ παρόντες τῷ ἔργῳ 1 Alternate translation: “we will do the same things when we are there with you that we have written about in our letters while we have been away from you” -10:11 kb55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 Here, **we** refers to Paul’s ministry team but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -10:12 k94z ἐνκρῖναι ἢ συνκρῖναι ἑαυτούς, τισιν 1 Alternate translation: “to say we are as good as some” -10:12 i85y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς 1 Both of these clauses mean essentially the same thing. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -10:12 n8sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες 1 Paul is speaking of goodness as though it were something whose length people could **measure**. Alternate translation: “they look at each other and try to see who is better” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:12 zwl5 οὐ συνιᾶσιν 1 Alternate translation: “show everyone that they do not know anything” -10:13 x79x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nPaul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules, those things over which he has authority as being within the borders or “limits” of his land, and those things not under his authority as being beyond the “limits.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:13 a4ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχησόμεθα 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “will not boast about things over which we have no authority” or “will boast only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -10:13 u84l κατὰ τὸ μέτρον τοῦ κανόνος, οὗ ἐμέρισεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Alternate translation: “about things under the authority that God has given us to do” -10:13 fx2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μέτρου, ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of the authority he has as if it were a land over which he rules. Alternate translation: “and you are within the border of our authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -10:14 ay6h οὐ & ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς 1 Alternate translation: “we did not go beyond our borders” -10:15 hu9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα καυχώμενοι 1 This is an idiom. See how similar words were translated in [2 Corinthians 10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “And we have not boasted about things over which we have no authority” or “We have not boasted only about things over which we have authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -10:16 raq7 ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι 1 Alternate translation: “an area that God has assigned to someone else” -10:17 q8cc ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Alternate translation: “let … boast about what the Lord has done” -10:18 h81t ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων 1 This means that he provides enough evidence for each person who hears him to decide whether he is right or wrong. See how “recommend ourselves” is translated in [2 Corinthians 4:2](../04/02.md). -10:18 n5v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & ἐστιν δόκιμος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is not whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -10:18 sy2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν 1 You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord recommends is the one of whom the Lord approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -11:intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn this chapter, Paul continues defending his authority.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### False teaching\n\nThe Corinthians were quick to accept false teachers. They taught things about Jesus and the gospel that were different and not true. Unlike these false teachers, Paul sacrificially served the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])\n\n### Light\n\nLight is commonly used in the New Testament as a metaphor. Paul here uses light to indicate the revealing of God and his righteousness. Darkness describes sin. Sin seeks to remain hidden from God. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]], [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Metaphor\n\nPaul begins this chapter with an extended metaphor. He compares himself to the father of a bride who is giving a pure, virgin bride to her bridegroom. Wedding practices change depending on the cultural background. But the idea of helping to present someone as a grown and holy child is explicitly pictured in this passage. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n\n### Irony\n\nThis chapter is full of irony. Paul is hoping to shame the Corinthian believers with his irony.\n\n“You tolerate these things well enough!” Paul thinks that they should not tolerate the way the false apostles treated them. Paul does not think they are really apostles at all.\n\nThe statement, “For you gladly put up with fools. You are wise yourselves!” means that the Corinthian believers think they were very wise but Paul does not agree.\n\n“I will say to our shame that we were too weak to do that.” Paul is speaking about behavior he thinks is very wrong in order to avoid it. He is speaking as if he thinks he is wrong for not doing it. He uses a rhetorical question also as irony. “Did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]] and [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn refuting the false apostles claiming to be superior, Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions. Each question is coupled with an answer: “Are they Hebrews? So am I. Are they Israelites? So am I. Are they descendants of Abraham? So am I. Are they servants of Christ? (I speak as though I were out of my mind.) I am more.”\n\nHe also uses a series of rhetorical questions to empathize with his converts: “Who is weak, and I am not weak? Who has caused another to fall into sin, and I do not burn within?”\n\n### “Are they servants of Christ?”\n\nThis is sarcasm, a special type of irony used to mock or insult. Paul does not believe these false teachers actually serve Christ, only that they pretend to do so.\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 30 is a paradox: “If I must boast, I will boast about what shows my weaknesses.” Paul does not explain why he would boast in his weakness until 2 Corinthians 12:9. ([2 Corinthians 11:30](../11/30.md)) -11:1 r4q6 ἀνείχεσθέ μου μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης 1 Alternate translation: “you would allow me allow me to act like a fool” -11:2 m6vl ζηλῶ & ὑμᾶς Θεοῦ ζήλῳ 1 These words speak of a good, strong desire that the Corinthians be faithful to Christ, and that no one should persuade them to leave him. -11:2 ee9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡρμοσάμην γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ, παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Paul speaks of his care for the Corinthian believers as if he had **promised** another man that he would prepare his daughter to marry him and he is most concerned that he be able to keep his promise to the man. Alternate translation: “for I was like a father who promised to present his daughter to one husband. I promised to keep you as a pure virgin so I could give you to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:3 l2hr φοβοῦμαι δὲ, μή πως ὡς ὁ ὄφις ἐξηπάτησεν Εὕαν ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ, φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν 1 Alternate translation: “But I am afraid that somehow your thoughts might be led astray from a sincere and pure devotion to Christ just as the serpent deceived Eve by his craftiness” -11:3 m5zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν 1 Paul speaks of **thoughts** as if they were animals that people could lead along the wrong path. Alternate translation: “someone might cause you to believe lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:4 wq57 εἰ μὲν γὰρ ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Alternate translation: “When anyone comes and” -11:4 l7m8 πνεῦμα ἕτερον & ὃ οὐκ ἐλάβετε, ἢ εὐαγγέλιον ἕτερον ὃ οὐκ ἐδέξασθε 1 Alternate translation: “a different spirit than the Holy Spirit, or a different gospel than you received from us” -11:4 fs5z καλῶς ἀνέχεσθε 1 See how these words were translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you are dealing correctly with these things” -11:5 eet1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων 1 Paul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say there are. Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -11:6 f8d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ τῇ γνώσει 1 This negative phrase emphasizes the positive truth that he is trained in knowledge. Alternate translation: “I am certainly trained in knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -11:6 n7xy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐ τῇ γνώσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **knowledge**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “I am trained to know what they know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -11:7 un9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε, ὅτι δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν? 1 Paul is beginning to claim that he treated the Corinthians well. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I think we agree that I did not sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -11:7 ax51 δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν 1 Alternate translation: “I preached the gospel of God to you without expecting anything from you in return” -11:8 k6ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα 1 This is an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul received money from **churches** who were not obligated to give to him. Alternate translation: “I accepted money from other churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -11:8 a416 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ὑμῶν διακονίαν 1 The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I could serve you at no cost” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -11:9 a23k οἱ ἀδελφοὶ ἐλθόντες 1 These **brothers** were probably all male. -11:9 fc6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω 1 Paul speaks of someone for whom one has to spend money as if they were heavy items that people have to carry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:9 sqcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω 1 The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I have done all I can to make sure you do not have to spend money so that I can be with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -11:9 b35r ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν & ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω 1 Alternate translation: “I never will be a burden to you” -11:10 si2r ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Paul is emphasizing that because his readers know that he tells the **truth** about **Christ**, they can know that he is telling the truth here. “As surely as you know that I truly know and proclaim the truth about Christ, you could know that what I am about to say is true” -11:10 nae3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one will be able to make me stop boasting and stay silent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -11:10 ua2i ἡ καύχησις αὕτη & εἰς ἐμὲ 1 This refers to what Paul spoke about starting in ([2 Corinthians 11:7](../11/07.md)). -11:11 zqu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ τί? ὅτι οὐκ ἀγαπῶ ὑμᾶς? 1 Paul uses rhetorical questions to emphasize love for the Corinthians. These questions can be combined or made into a statement. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could combine them or express them as statements. Alternate translation: “Is it because I do not love you that I do not want to be a burden to you?” or “I will continue to keep you from paying for my needs because this shows others that I love you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -11:11 rj6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν 1 You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “God knows I love you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -11:12 d9sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἵνα ἐκκόψω τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται, εὑρεθῶσιν καθὼς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Paul speaks of a false claim that his enemies state as if it were something that he can carry away. Alternate translation: “so that I might make it impossible for those who are trying to get people to regard them as highly as they respect us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:12 t4js rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὑρεθῶσιν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people will think highly of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -11:13 ml66 οἱ γὰρ τοιοῦτοι 1 Alternate translation: “I do what I do because people like them” -11:13 nq3t ἐργάται δόλιοι 1 Alternate translation: “dishonest workers” -11:13 y896 μετασχηματιζόμενοι εἰς ἀποστόλους 1 Alternate translation: “are not apostles, but they try to make themselves look like apostles” -11:14 v9z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ θαῦμα 1 By stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should expect this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -11:14 ss7s αὐτὸς & ὁ Σατανᾶς μετασχηματίζεται εἰς ἄγγελον φωτός 1 Alternate translation: “Satan is not an angel of light, but he tries to make himself look like an angel of light” -11:14 mld4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄγγελον φωτός 1 Here, **light** is a metaphor for righteousness. Alternate translation: “an angel of righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:15 fvx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μέγα & εἰ 1 By stating this in a negative form Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians should expect to meet many “false apostles” ([2 Corinthians 11:13](../11/13.md)). Alternate translation: “we should certainly expect to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -11:15 sb58 καὶ οἱ διάκονοι αὐτοῦ μετασχηματίζονται ὡς διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης 1 Alternate translation: “his servants are not servants of righteousness, but they try to make themselves look like servants of righteousness” -11:16 s962 γε κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέξασθέ με, ἵνα κἀγὼ μικρόν τι καυχήσωμαι 1 Alternate translation: “receive me as you would receive a fool: let me talk, and consider my boasting the words of a fool” -11:18 t4ic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κατὰ σάρκα 1 Here the metonym **flesh** refers to man in his sinful nature and his achievements. Alternate translation: “about their own human achievements” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -11:19 u8f3 ἀνέχεσθε τῶν ἀφρόνων 1 See how a similar phrase was translated in [2 Corinthians 11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you … accept me when I act like a fool” -11:19 si6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony φρόνιμοι ὄντες 1 Paul is shaming the Corinthians by using irony. Alternate translation: “thinking that you are wise, even through you are not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -11:20 zmfo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole εἴ τις ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ, εἴ τις κατεσθίει 1 Paul is using exaggeration when he speaks of some people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves or devouring them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -11:20 lu7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ 1 Paul speaks of people forcing others to obey rules as if they were forcing them to be slaves. Alternate translation: “makes you follow rules they have thought of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:20 sr4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατεσθίει 1 Paul speaks of the super-apostles’ taking people’s material resources as if they were eating the people themselves. Alternate translation: “takes all your property” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:20 yn5t λαμβάνει 1 A person **takes advantage of** another person by knowing things that the other person does not and using that knowledge to help himself and harm the other person. -11:21 n8s9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω ὡς ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν! 1 Paul is using irony to tell the Corinthians that it was not because he was **weak** that he treated them well. Alternate translation: “I am not ashamed to say that we had the power to harm you, but we treated you well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -11:21 v8a3 ἐν ᾧ & ἄν τις τολμᾷ & τολμῶ κἀγώ 1 Alternate translation: “in whatever anyone boasts about … I will dare to boast about it also” -11:22 jdq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion Ἑβραῖοί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. Ἰσραηλεῖταί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ εἰσιν? κἀγώ. 1 Paul is asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They want you to think they are important and to believe what they say because they are Hebrews and Israelites and descendants of Abraham. Well, so am I!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -11:23 a4tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ 1 Paul continues asking and answering questions the Corinthians might be asking to emphasize that he is as much a Jew as the super-apostles are. You should keep the question-and-answer form if possible. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “They say they are servants of Christ—I speak as though I were out of my mind—but I am more” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -11:23 bq23 παραφρονῶν λαλῶ 1 Alternate translation: “I speak as though I were unable to think well” -11:23 vy54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὑπὲρ ἐγώ 1 You can make explicit the understood information. Alternate translation: “I am more a servant of Christ than they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -11:23 s8wq ἐν κόποις περισσοτέρως 1 Alternate translation: “I have worked harder” -11:23 dr6x ἐν φυλακαῖς περισσοτέρως 1 Alternate translation: “I have been in prisons more often” -11:23 cs3f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως 1 Here, **beyond measure** is an idiom that means he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten very many times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -11:23 qdcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως 1 This is exaggerated to emphasize that he had been beaten many, many times. Alternate translation: “I have been beaten too many times to bother counting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -11:23 r6jv ἐν θανάτοις πολλάκις 1 Alternate translation: “and I have almost died many times” -11:24 ttz2 τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν 1 This was a common expression for being whipped 39 times. In Jewish law the most they were allowed to whip a person at one time was forty lashes. So they commonly whipped a person thirty-nine times so that they would be guilty of whipping someone too many times if the accidentally counted wrong. -11:25 u9xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐραβδίσθην 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people beat me with wooden rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -11:25 xk9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλιθάσθην 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people threw stones at me until they thought I was dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -11:25 b4kz νυχθήμερον ἐν τῷ βυθῷ πεποίηκα 1 Paul was referring to floating in the water after the ship he was on sank. -11:26 b3j9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις 1 The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “and in danger from people who claimed to be brothers in Christ, but who betrayed us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -11:27 ds5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole γυμνότητι 1 Here Paul exaggerates to show his need of clothing. Alternate translation: “without enough clothing to keep me warm” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -11:28 n1q5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Paul knows that God will hold him responsible for how well the **churches** obey God and speaks of that knowledge as if it were a heavy object pushing him down. Alternate translation: “I know that God will hold me accountable for the spiritual growth of all the churches, and so I always feel like a heavy object is pushing me down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:29 fvz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ? 1 This rhetorical question emphasizes that Paul cares about people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone is weak, I feel that weakness also.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -11:29 hhb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ? 1 The word **weak** is probably a metaphor for a spiritual condition, but no one is sure what Paul is speaking of, so it is best to use the same word here. Alternate translation: “I am weak whenever anyone else is weak.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:29 g5am rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι? 1 Here Paul’s anger is spoken of as a burning inside him. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:29 bdd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι? 1 Paul uses this question to express his anger when a fellow believer is caused to sin. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Whenever anyone causes a brother to sin, I am angry.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -11:29 xu57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλίζεται 1 Paul speaks of sin as if it were tripping over something and then falling. Alternate translation: “has been led to sin” or “has thought that God would permit him to sin because of something that someone else did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -11:30 gxe6 τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας 1 Alternate translation: “what shows how weak I am” -11:31 yx8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 Paul is using litotes to emphasize that he is telling the truth. Alternate translation: “I am telling the absolute truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -11:32 n383 ὁ ἐθνάρχης Ἁρέτα τοῦ βασιλέως ἐφρούρει τὴν πόλιν 1 Alternate translation: “the governor whom King Aretas had appointed had told men to guard the city” -11:32 j7de πιάσαι με 1 Alternate translation: “so that they might catch and arrest me” -11:33 i8xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some people put me in a basket and lowered me to the ground” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -11:33 aw7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ 1 Paul uses the governor’s **hands** as metonymy for the governor. Alternate translation: “from the governor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -12:intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul continues defending his authority in this chapter.\n\nWhen Paul was with the Corinthians, he proved himself to be an apostle by his powerful deeds. He had not ever taken anything from them. Now that he is coming for the third time, he will still not take anything. He hopes that when he visits, he will not need to be harsh with them. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Paul’s vision\n\nPaul now defends his authority by telling about a wonderful vision of heaven. Although he speaks in the third person in verses 2-5, verse 7 indicates that he was the person who experienced the vision. It was so great, God gave him a physical handicap to keep him humble. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])\n\n### Third heaven\n\nMany scholars believe the “third” heaven is the dwelling place of God. This is because Scripture also uses “heaven” to refer to the sky (the “first” heaven) and the universe (the “second” heaven).\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nPaul uses many rhetorical questions as he defends himself against his enemies who accused him: “For how were you less important than the rest of the churches, except that I was not a burden to you?” “Did Titus take advantage of you? Did we not walk in the same way? Did we not walk in the same steps?” and “Do you think all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you?” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Sarcasm\n\nPaul uses sarcasm, a special type of irony, when he reminds them how he had helped them at no cost. He says, “Forgive me for this wrong!” He also uses regular irony when he says: “But, since I am so crafty, I am the one who caught you by deceit.” He uses it to introduce his defense against this accusation by showing how impossible it was to be true. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Paradox\n\nA “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in verse 5 is a paradox: “I will not boast, except about my weaknesses.” Most people do not boast about being weak. This sentence in verse 10 is also a paradox: “For whenever I am weak, then I am strong.” In verse 9, Paul explains why both of these statements are true. ([2 Corinthians 12:5](../12/05.md)) -12:1 iwn3 Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nIn defending his apostleship from God, Paul continues to state specific things that have happened to him since he became a believer. -12:1 iur3 ἐλεύσομαι & εἰς 1 Alternate translation: “I will continue talking, but now about” -12:1 rb42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου 1 This could mean: (1) Paul uses the words **visions** and **revelations** to mean the same thing in hendiadys for emphasis. Alternate translation: “things that the Lord has allowed only me to see” (2) Paul is speaking of two different things. Alternate translation: “secret things that the Lord has let me see with my eyes and other secrets that he has told me about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -12:2 cz7u οἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul is actually speaking of himself as if he were speaking of someone else, but this should be translated literally if possible. -12:2 fth2 εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα 1 Paul continues to describe himself as if this happened to another person. “I do not know if this man was in his physical body or in his spiritual body” -12:2 k4aw τρίτου οὐρανοῦ 1 Here, the **third heaven** refers to the dwelling place of God rather than the sky or outer space (the planets, stars, and the universe). -12:4 qv5h ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον 1 Paul continues his account of what happened to “this man” (verse 3). If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God took this man into **paradise**. (2) an angel took this man into **paradise**. If possible, it would be best not to name the one who took the man: “someone took him up to paradise” or “they took him up to paradise.” -12:4 wm7y ἡρπάγη 1 Here, **caught up** refers to being suddenly and forcefully held and taken. -12:4 ic45 τὸν Παράδεισον 1 Here, **paradise** could refer to: (1) heaven. (2) the third heaven. (3) a special place in heaven. -12:5 hpq6 τοῦ τοιούτου 1 Alternate translation: “of that person” -12:5 i12f οὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις 1 You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I will boast only of my weaknesses” -12:6 p8fm μή τις εἰς ἐμὲ λογίσηται ὑπὲρ ὃ βλέπει με, ἢ ἀκούει ἐξ ἐμοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “no one will give me more credit than what he sees in me or hears from me” -12:7 v5s7 General Information: 0 # General Information:\n\nThis verse reveals that Paul was speaking about himself beginning in [2 Corinthians 12:2](../12/02.md). -12:7 xxi2 τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων 1 Alternate translation: “because those revelations were so much greater than anything anyone else had ever seen” -12:7 hu8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave me a thorn in the flesh” or “God allowed me to have a thorn in the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -12:7 q5e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί 1 Here Paul’s physical problems are compared to a **thorn** piercing his **flesh**. Alternate translation: “an affliction” or “a physical problem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:7 q7lz ἄγγελος Σατανᾶ 1 Alternate translation: “a servant of Satan” -12:7 ehp9 μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι 2 Alternate translation: “I would not become too proud” -12:8 n76p τρὶς 1 Paul put the words **three times** at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that he had prayed many times about his “thorn” ([2 Corinthians 12:7](../12/07.md)). -12:8 wc7r ὑπὲρ τούτου 1 Alternate translation: “about this thorn in the flesh,” or “about this affliction” -12:9 nr2j ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου 1 Alternate translation: “I will be kind to you, and that is all you need” -12:9 cs63 ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται 1 Alternate translation: “for my power works best when you are weak” -12:9 g8mi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul speaks of the **power of Christ** as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ. (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:10 pxf1 εὐδοκῶ ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is **content** in **weaknesses**, **insults**, **troubles**, **persecutions**, and **distressing situations** if these things come because I belong to Christ. (2) Paul is content in weakness if these things cause more people to know Christ. -12:10 s5sx ἐν ἀσθενείαις 1 Alternate translation: “when I am weak” -12:10 xl8q ἐν ὕβρεσιν 1 Alternate translation: “when people try to make me angry by saying that I am a bad person” -12:10 hza1 ἐν ἀνάγκαις 1 Alternate translation: “when I am suffering” -12:10 c4t2 στενοχωρίαις 1 Alternate translation: “when there is trouble” -12:10 t7qg ὅταν γὰρ ἀσθενῶ, τότε δυνατός εἰμι 1 Paul is saying that when he is no longer **strong** enough to do what needs to be done, Christ, who is more powerful than Paul could ever be, will work through Paul to do what needs to be done. However, it would be best to translate these words literally, if your language allows. -12:11 a1ym γέγονα ἄφρων 1 Alternate translation: “I am acting like a fool” -12:11 pzw1 ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε 1 Alternate translation: “You forced me to talk this way” -12:11 v2lr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ὤφειλον ὑφ’ ὑμῶν συνίστασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you should have praised me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -12:11 f644 συνίστασθαι 1 See how you translated similar phrases in ([3:1](../03/01.md)) and ([4:2](../04/02.md)). Alternate translation: “been praised” or “been recommended” -12:11 h4d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐδὲν γὰρ ὑστέρησα 1 By using the negative form, Paul is saying strongly that those Corinthians who think that he is **inferior** are wrong. Alternate translation: “For I am just as good as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -12:11 s82x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων 1 Paul uses irony here to show that those teachers are less important then people say they are. See how this is translated in [2 Corinthians 11:5](../11/05.md). Alternate translation: “those teachers whom some think are better than anyone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -12:12 kp5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ μὲν σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου κατειργάσθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form with emphasis on the **signs**, or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “it is the true signs of an apostle that I performed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -12:12 d4um σημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν 1 These are the “signs of an apostle” that Paul performed “with all perseverance.” -12:13 z35e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί γάρ ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν? 1 Paul is emphasizing that the Corinthians are wrong to accuse him of wanting to do them harm. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I treated you the same way I treated all the other churches, except that I myself did not burden you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -12:13 d426 αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν 1 Alternate translation: “I did not ask you for money or other things I needed” -12:13 sy7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony χαρίσασθέ μοι τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην! 1 Paul is being ironic to shame the Corinthians. Both he and they know that he has done them no wrong, but they have been treating him as though he has wronged them. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -12:13 u1w9 τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην 1 Here, **this wrong** refers to not asking them for money and other things he needed. -12:14 ugk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς 1 The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “but what I want is that you love and accept me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -12:14 wd97 οὐ & ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν 3 Young **children** are not responsible for saving money or other goods to give to their healthy **parents**. -12:15 vj2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἥδιστα δαπανήσω καὶ ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι 1 Paul speaks of his work and his physical life as if it were money that he or God could **spend**. Alternate translation: “I will gladly do any work and gladly allow God to permit people to kill me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:15 nk8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 The word **souls** is a metonym for the people themselves. Alternate translation: “for you” or “so you will live well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -12:15 t3na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion εἰ περισσοτέρως ὑμᾶς ἀγαπῶν, ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι? 1 This rhetorical question to emphasize that the Corinthians should love Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “If I love you so much, you should not love me so little.” or “If I love you so much, you should love me more than you do.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -12:15 j887 περισσοτέρως 1 It is not clear what it is that Paul’s love is **more** than. It is probably best to use “very much” or a “so much” that can be compared to “so little” later in the sentence. -12:16 ur5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἀλλὰ ὑπάρχων πανοῦργος δόλῳ, ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον 1 Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians who think he lied to them even if he did not ask them for money. Alternate translation: “but others think I was deceptive and used trickery” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -12:17 vb7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μή τινα ὧν ἀπέσταλκα πρὸς ὑμᾶς, δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐπλεονέκτησα ὑμᾶς? 1 Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one that I sent to you has taken advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -12:18 pjl2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἐπλεονέκτησεν ὑμᾶς Τίτος? 1 Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Titus certainly did not take advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -12:18 acg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν 1 Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same spirit.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:18 rjiy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν 1 Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all have the same attitude and live alike.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -12:18 k6b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν? 1 Both Paul and the Corinthians know the answer to the question is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We all walk in the same steps.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -12:18 oket rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν? 1 Paul speaks of living as if it were walking on a road. Alternate translation: “We all do things the same way.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:19 g1iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πάλαι δοκεῖτε ὅτι ὑμῖν ἀπολογούμεθα? 1 Paul uses this question to acknowledge something that the people may have been thinking. He does this so that he can assure them that it is not true. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Perhaps you think that all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -12:19 ih3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Paul speaks of **God** knowing everything Paul does as if God were physically present and observed everything Paul said and did. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “In the presence of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:19 vg3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς 1 Paul speaks of knowing how to obey God and desiring to obey him as if it were physical growth. Alternate translation: “so that you would know God and obey him better” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -12:20 cu6s οὐχ οἵους θέλω, εὕρω ὑμᾶς 1 Alternate translation: “I may not like what I find” or “I may not like what I see you doing” -12:20 zy6g κἀγὼ εὑρεθῶ ὑμῖν οἷον οὐ θέλετε 1 Alternate translation: “you might not like what you see in me” -12:20 rh1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind the words **quarreling, jealousy, outbursts of anger, rivalries, slander, gossip, arrogance, and disorder**, you can express the same ideas with verbal forms. This could mean: (1) some of you will be arguing with us, jealous of us, suddenly becoming very angry with us, trying to take our places as leaders, speaking falsely about us, telling about our private lives, being proud, and opposing us as we try to lead you. (2) some of you will be arguing with each other, jealous of each other, suddenly becoming very angry with each other, quarreling with each other over who will be the leader, speaking falsely about each other, telling about each other’s private lives, being proud, and opposing those whom God has chosen to lead you. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -12:21 ddw3 πενθήσω πολλοὺς τῶν προημαρτηκότων, 1 Alternate translation: “I will be grieved because many of them have not given up their old sins” -12:21 hq1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism μὴ μετανοησάντων ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ 1 This could mean: (1) Paul is saying almost the same thing three times for emphasis. Alternate translation: “did not stop commiting the sexual sins that they practiced” (2) Paul is speaking of three different sins. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -12:21 rh22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **impurity**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of secretly thinking about and desiring things that do not please God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -12:21 rn6u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πορνείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **sexual immorality**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “of doing sexually immoral deeds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -12:21 yyr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀσελγείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **lustful indulgence**, you can express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “doing things that satisfy immoral sexual desire” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -13:intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Preparation\n\nPaul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Power and weakness\n\nPaul repeatedly uses the contrasting words “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other.\n\n### “Examine yourselves to see if you are in the faith. Test yourselves.”\n\nScholars are divided over what these sentences mean. Some scholars say that Christians are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say these sentences mean that Christians should look at their actions and question whether they are genuinely saved. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) -13:1 slj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Believe that someone has done something wrong only after two or three people have said the same thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -13:2 fxl6 τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν 1 Alternate translation: “all you other people” -13:4 a1bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ & ἐσταυρώθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they crucified him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -13:5 sbx4 ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, **in you** could mean: (1) Jesus is living inside each individual. (2) Jesus is living among them, part of and the most important member of the group. -13:7 u75e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ ποιῆσαι ὑμᾶς κακὸν μηδέν 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … wrong**, you could express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “you will do everything right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -13:7 gt2e δόκιμοι 1 Alternate translation: “to be great teachers and live the truth” -13:8 a3l7 οὐ & δυνάμεθά τι κατὰ τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Alternate translation: “we are not able to keep people from learning the truth” +1:19 aqzq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἐν ὑμῖν δι’ ἡμῶν κηρυχθείς, δι’ ἐμοῦ, καὶ Σιλουανοῦ, καὶ Τιμοθέου 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you use this alternate translation, you should delete the dash that follows it. Alternate translation: “the one whom I and Silvanus and Timothy proclaimed among you,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:19 ql6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Σιλουανοῦ 1 The word **Silvanus** is the name of the man who is called “Silas” in the book of Acts and who was a leader in the early church. You may want to use one spelling here and put the other spelling in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +1:19 t98z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ναὶ καὶ οὒ, ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν 1 Here, the phrase combining **“Yes” and “No”** represents a person who is unreliable. If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have this meaning or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated this in verse 18. Alternate translation: “wishy-washy, but, as we said, a rock” or “unreliable, but we consistently showed you that he is trustworthy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:19 xmu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἀλλὰ ναὶ ἐν αὐτῷ γέγονεν 1 Here, the subject of the verb **has been**, represented by **it**, could refer to: (1) the proclamation of Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. Alternate translation: “but our proclamation has been ‘Yes’ in him” (2) Jesus. In this case, **in him** would be translated as “in it,” referring to the proclamation. Alternate translation: “but he has been ‘Yes’ in it” or “but Jesus has been ‘Yes’ in our proclamation” (3) reality in general. Alternate translation: “but it has always been the case that there has been ‘Yes’ in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1:20 h2xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὅσαι & ἐπαγγελίαι Θεοῦ, ἐν αὐτῷ τὸ ναί 1 This means that Jesus makes all of the **promises of God** come to pass. He guarantees them. Alternate translation: “Jesus fulfills all of the promises of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:20 h4uv rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῷ & δι’ αὐτοῦ 1 Both occurrences of the word **him** in this verse refer to Jesus Christ. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use his name here. Alternate translation: “in Jesus … through Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1:20 lz2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis τὸ Ἀμὴν & δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is leaving out a verb of speaking that in many languages this sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply this word if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the ‘Amen’ is spoken by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1:20 sqpx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ Ἀμὴν & δι’ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we say the ‘Amen’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1:20 hro4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **us** includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:20 uuxh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς δόξαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that we glorify God” or “so that we honor God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:21 n5eq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς Χριστὸν 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the relationship of believers to Christ as if they were located **in Christ**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in close relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:21 tjc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρίσας ἡμᾶς 1 The implication is that God has anointed believers with the Holy Spirit so that they can live for him. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having anointed us with the Holy Spirit to live for him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1:21 f4c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 2 Here, **us** probably includes the Corinthian believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:22 z43l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σφραγισάμενος ἡμᾶς 1 Paul speaks of God showing that we belong to him as if God had put a visible mark of ownership on us. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having claimed us as his own” or “having shown that we belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:22 laq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν 1 Here, **us** and **our** include Paul and all believers, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:22 jcv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul is speaking of **the Spirit** as if the Spirit were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a guarantee that he will also give us every blessing that he has promised to us, which is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1:22 xe98 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here the word **hearts** refers to the innermost part of a person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in our innermost beings” or “to live within each of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:23 j8lc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν 1 The phrase **I invoke God as a witness upon my soul** could be: (1) an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “Now I swear to God upon my soul” (2) simply a statement that God knows Paul’s motives. Alternate translation: “Now I call upon God as a witness to my intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula]]) +1:23 vrkv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐγὼ δὲ μάρτυρα τὸν Θεὸν ἐπικαλοῦμαι ἐπὶ τὴν ἐμὴν ψυχήν 1 Here, **soul** represents the life of the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “So may God take my life if I am lying, but he knows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1:23 j15t rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν 1 Here, **that** introduces a goal or purpose relationship. The purpose for which Paul canceled his visit to Corinth was to spare causing pain to the Corinthian believers (see 2:1). Use a connector or phrase in your language that makes it clear that this is the purpose. Alternate translation: “that it was in order to spare you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1:23 xzir rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν οὐκέτι ἦλθον εἰς Κόρινθον 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from the context if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “that it was in order to spare you sorrow that I have not yet come to Corinth” or “that it was to keep from grieving you that I have not yet traveled to Corinth again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1:24 hepi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐχ ὅτι 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I do not mean that” or “I do not say that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1:24 mrzw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κυριεύομεν 1 Here, **lord it over** is an idiom that means “act like the masters of.” If this phrase does not have that meaning in your language, use an idiom from your language that does have that meaning or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we want to be in charge of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:24 hafq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κυριεύομεν ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Here, **faith** could mean: (1) what the Corinthians believe. Alternate translation: “we dictate to you what you must believe” (2) how the Corinthians relate to God. Alternate translation: “we are in charge of your relationship to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:24 lz4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive συνεργοί ἐσμεν 1 Here the pronoun **we** could refer to: (1) Paul and his companions, but not the Corinthian believers. (2) Paul, his companions, and the Corinthian believers. We recommend using the exclusive form here if your language marks that distinction, to be the same as the previous “we” in this verse. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1:24 cyu4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that you will be joyful” or “to make you happy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1:24 kv47 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, **for** connects the following statement as a reason for the previous two statements. Use a natural form in your language for connecting this statement to the previous ones as the reason. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1:24 cih8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἑστήκατε 1 Here, **stand firm** means to be steady, resolute, or established. Alternate translation: “you are well established” or “you are strong and steady” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1:24 xf2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ & πίστει 1 Here, **in the faith** could mean: (1) “in regard to your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers are independent of Paul in regard to their faith. They are responsible only to God for what they believe and do. Alternate translation: “concerning your commitment to God” (2) “because of your faith.” In other words, the Corinthian believers continue to belong to God because of their faith, not because of Paul’s authority. Alternate translation: “because you trust in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n3. Interrupted travel plans (1:15–2:13)\n * The interruption and the reason for it (1:15–2:4)\n * The person who caused grief (2:5–11)\n * Travel to Troas and Macedonia (2:12–13)\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The fragrance of Christ (2:14–17)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [2:3–4](../02/03.md), [9](../02/09.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter because of his love for them. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians.\n\n### “Grieving” others\n\nPaul refers to “sorrow,” “grief,” and “grieving” others multiple times in [2:1–8](../02/01.md). These words refer to how people who are close friends can “grieve” or hurt each other by what they say and do. These words do not refer to physically hurting someone. Rather, they refer to hurting someone emotionally. Paul acknowledges that his letter might have “grieved” them, and he also indicates that one of the Corinthians has “grieved” fellow believers. Consider a natural way to refer to one person hurting or injuring another person inside.\n\n### The person who caused grief\n\nIn [2:5–11](../02/05.md), Paul refers to a person who has caused grief. Almost certainly, he has one specific person in mind. Paul is not clear about what this person did to cause the grief. He or she may have committed a sexual sin or stolen money from the church or opposed Paul’s authority. Whatever the person did, Paul chooses not to be specific about the person or what he or she did. Perhaps this is because he wants the Corinthians to forgive and show love to this person now that he or she has been properly disciplined by the church. In your translation, use general words for both the person and what the person did.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Aroma and fragrance\n\nIn [2:14–16](../02/14.md), Paul identifies himself and those who serve with him as an “aroma” or “fragrance.” Paul could be thinking in general of smells and odors, or he could be referring to the smell from incense and sacrifices offered during a “triumphal procession” (see [2:14](../02/14.md)), or he could be referring to the smell from sacrifices offered at the temple. Whatever exact smells Paul has in mind, he is clear that he and his fellow workers are a smell that comes from Christ, and people react to it very differently: some think it is the smell of death, while others think it is the smell of life. Paul speaks in this way because smells spread throughout a whole area, and people have to react to them. Just as smells spread, he and his fellow workers spread the gospel throughout the world, and people have to respond to it. Further, just as some people like a smell and others hate it, so some people believe the gospel and receive life from God, while others reject the gospel and perish. If possible, preserve the “aroma” and “fragrance” language. If necessary, you could use a simile to express the idea. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s use of pronouns\n\nIn [2:1–13](../02/01.md), Paul consistently uses the first person singular to refer to himself and the second person plural to refer to the Corinthians. The only exception is in [2:11](../02/11.md), where Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and the Corinthians. However, in [2:14–17](../02/14.md), Paul uses “we” to refer to himself and those preaching the gospel with him. In these verses, “we” does not include the Corinthians. It is unclear exactly whom Paul includes in “we”: it could be just he and Titus, or he and the group that works with him, or he and everyone else who preaches the gospel. Consider natural ways to represent these changes in reference throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Paul’s travel\n\nIn [2:12–13](../02/12.md), Paul describes some of his travels. Troas is a city on the west coast of what is now Turkey. Since Troas was a port city, most likely Paul sailed from there to Macedonia, which is the northern part of what is now Greece. Since Corinth is in southern Greece, Paul was not too far away from the Corinthians. Paul continues the description of what happened in Macedonia in [7:5–7](../07/05.md). Consider what information your readers need to know to understand Paul’s travels, and include what is necessary in your translation or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/troas]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/names/macedonia]]) +2:1 wh9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in [1:23](../01/23.md) about the reason why he did not visit Corinth, which was to spare them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I have not come to Corinth:” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:1 wpd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο τὸ μὴ 1 Here, the word **this** refers ahead to what Paul is about to say: **not to come to you again in sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **this** refers to explicit, or you could rephrase the sentence so that you do not use **this**. Alternate translation: “for myself what follows: not” or “for myself not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:1 yz5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐμαυτῷ 1 Here the phrase **for myself** indicates that Paul made this choice because of reasons he thought about. In other words, he was not forced to make this choice. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that someone made their own choice or decision. Alternate translation: “on my own” or “in my own mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:1 yrbk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go τὸ μὴ & ἐλθεῖν 1 In a context such as this, it may be more natural in your language to say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “not to go” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +2:1 ma6n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul has already visited the Corinthians **in sorrow**. He does not give many details about this visit. It cannot be the first time that he visited the Corinthians, so he must have visited them again **in sorrow** sometime between when he first met them and when he wrote this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the implication more explicit. Alternate translation: “a second time” or “yet again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:1 hu8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν λύπῃ 1 Here the ones who experience the **sorrow** could be: (1) Paul and the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for all of us” (2) just the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in sorrow for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:1 ij73 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν λύπῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “in a sorrowful way” or “in a way that makes us sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:2 jb50 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul is avoiding the “sorrow” he mentioned in [2:1](../02/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “I decided that because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:2 q4aq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ & ἐγὼ λυπῶ ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to a situation that has not happened and which he intends to keep from happening. He refers to the situation using the conditional form to indicate what would result from the situation if it did happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to something that may not happen but that the author wishes to speak about. Alternate translation: “supposing that I myself grieved you” or “were I myself to grieve you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +2:2 le34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἐγὼ λυπῶ 1 Here, the word **myself** emphasizes **I**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **I** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is I myself who grieve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +2:2 nb6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion καὶ τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “there is no one else.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “then there is no one cheering me up, except the one being grieved by me.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +2:2 mbbo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος 1 Here the author uses the singular form **the one** to refer in general to people, particularly to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers in general to people. Alternate translation: “who are those cheering me up, except those being grieved” or “who are those cheering me up, except you who are being grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +2:2 mbag rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions τίς ὁ εὐφραίνων με, εἰ μὴ ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ 1 If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this question to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “is it not the one being grieved by me who is the only one cheering me up” or “is there any one cheering me up besides the one being grieved by me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +2:2 x2vr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ λυπούμενος ἐξ ἐμοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom I have grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:3 kxu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγραψα 1 Here Paul refers to a letter he had already written to the Corinthians. Most likely, he wrote this letter sometime between when he wrote 1 Corinthians and 2 Corinthians, but we do not have the letter, so we do not know for sure. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that Paul is referring to a letter that he already sent to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my last letter” or “I sent you the previous letter, which that said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:3 e7c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο αὐτὸ 1 Here, the phrase **this same thing** refers to what Paul wrote in the previous letter. He could be referring to: (1) what he just wrote in [2:1–2](../02/01.md). Alternate translation: “the same thing I am now writing” (2) the contents of the previous letter in general. Alternate translation: “those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:3 abty rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἐλθὼν 1 Here, the phrase **having come** refers to an event that is still in the future for Paul but that would happen at the same time as **I might not have sorrow**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that happens at the same time as another event in the future. Alternate translation: “whenever I came” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +2:3 v87i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ & λύπην σχῶ ἀφ’ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “I might not become sorrowful because of” or “I might not be sad because of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:3 owzn ἀφ’ ὧν ἔδει με χαίρειν 1 Here, this clause could indicate that **it is necessary** for: (1) Paul to **rejoice** in the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “from those in which it is necessary for me to rejoice” (2) the Corinthians to give “joy” to Paul. Alternate translation: “from those for whom it is necessary to give me joy” +2:3 p4q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result πεποιθὼς 1 Here, the phrase **having confidence** introduces a reason why Paul **wrote** the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because I had confidence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:3 b6f9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεποιθὼς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “being confident” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:3 i5r6 ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 Here Paul could be stating that his **joy**: (1) leads to the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy leads to your joy” (2) has the same source as the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “what gives me joy is what gives you joy” (3) comes from the Corinthians’ joy. Alternate translation: “my joy comes from your joy” +2:3 gmyo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐμὴ χαρὰ πάντων ὑμῶν ἐστιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I am joyful, and so you are joyful” or “I rejoice, and so you rejoice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:4 p4n6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation about the letter that Paul **wrote** to them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:4 tl4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγραψα 1 Here, the phrase **I wrote** again refers to the previous letter. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:4 oz8a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ & πολλῆς θλίψεως καὶ συνοχῆς καρδίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **tribulation** and **anguish**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “suffer” and “distress.” Alternate translation: “as I suffered much and was distressed in my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:4 vs7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy συνοχῆς καρδίας 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “anguish of mind” or “emotional anguish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2:4 d5vf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διὰ πολλῶν δακρύων 1 Here, the phrase **through many tears** indicates what Paul was doing while he **wrote** the letter. The word **tears** refers to the act of crying or weeping. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that a person is crying or weeping while they are doing something. Alternate translation: “with much crying” or “as I shed many tears” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2:4 y0t3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐχ ἵνα λυπηθῆτε, ἀλλὰ τὴν ἀγάπην ἵνα γνῶτε, ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “so that you might know the love that I have more abundantly for you, not so that you would be grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:4 uc77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λυπηθῆτε 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, the Paul implies that “he himself” would do it. Alternate translation: “I would grieve you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:4 g826 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀγάπην & ἣν ἔχω περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “how abundantly I love you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:4 zw13 περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **more abundantly** could indicate that: (1) Paul has “abundant” love for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “most abundantly for you” or “very abundantly for you” (2) Paul loves the Corinthians more than he loves other people. Alternate translation: “more abundantly for you than I have for others” +2:5 xomm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δέ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how Paul did not want to “grieve” them. Here he addresses how someone has **caused grief**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +2:5 xlxc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & τις λελύπηκεν, οὐκ & λελύπηκεν 1 Here Paul is speaking as if someone causing **grief** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that someone has indeed **caused grief**. Alternate translation: “the person who caused grief has not grieved only” or “if anyone has caused grief, and it has happened, he has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +2:5 ln83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns λελύπηκεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “grieve.” Alternate translation: “has grieved people” or “has caused others to grieve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:5 j6bn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐκ & λελύπηκεν 1 Here, Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has **grieved** others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual has not grieved only” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +2:5 d7fx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐμὲ λελύπηκεν 1 Here Paul could be indicating that the person has: (1) **grieved** Paul some, but mostly the person has **grieved** the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me much” (2) not **grieved** Paul at all but only the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he has not grieved me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:5 rvpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ μέρους 1 Here, the phrase **in part** indicates that only some of an action or group is involved. In this case, Paul could be using **in part** to refer to: (1) how many of the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “some of you” or “part of your group” (2) how much the Corinthians have been **grieved**. Alternate translation: “he has partially grieved you” or “you also in part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:5 iva7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἀπὸ μέρους, ἵνα μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ πάντας ὑμᾶς 1 There are several ways to understand how the pieces of the sentence go together. You could translate the sentence so that: (1) **in order that I might not burden all of you** indicates the reason why Paul uses the phrase **in part**, which would refer to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “you in part, which I say so that I might not burden all of you” (2) **in part** and **all of you** go together, and **in order that I might not burden** is a parenthetical statement explaining why Paul says **in part**. Alternate translation: “in part—which I say so that I might not burden—all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:5 or46 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ ἐπιβαρῶ 1 Here, to **burden** someone refers to placing a heavy object on someone’s back. Paul could be using the phrase **I might not burden** to refer to: (1) how he is trying to avoid saying too much about the situation. In other words, Paul uses the phrase **in part** because he does not want to make his words too strong, which would make the words like a person carrying a heavy load. Alternate translation: “I might not say too much about” or “I might not exaggerate about” (2) how he wants to avoid troubling or distressing all of them, which would be like “burdening” them with a heavy object. Alternate translation: “I might not distress” or “I might not trouble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:6 iy4r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἡ ἐπιτιμία αὕτη 1 Here, the word **This** indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew what the **punishment** was. However, Paul never states exactly what the punishment was. You should use a word or phrase that is as general as what Paul used. Alternate translation: “That punishment” or “The punishment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +2:6 g3eo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῷ τοιούτῳ 1 Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he mentioned in the previous verse, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the person we are talking about” or “on that individual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:6 d7b7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τῶν πλειόνων 1 Here the phrase **the majority** implies a “minority.” These are some of the Corinthians who either did not agree with the **punishment** or who thought that the person had done nothing wrong. However, Paul does not give any information about this “minority,” so you should use a word or phrase that refers to most of the people in a group. Alternate translation: “all but a few of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +2:6 a7c4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἱκανὸν 1 Here, the word **sufficient** could indicate that the **punishment**: (1) has been severe enough. Alternate translation: “is severe enough” or “is sufficiently strong” (2) has lasted long enough. Alternate translation: “has lasted long enough” or “can end now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:7 we1i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast τοὐναντίον μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς χαρίσασθαι 1 Here, the words **on the contrary** and **rather** indicate that Paul wishes the Corinthians to do now the opposite of what they were doing. Instead of “punishing” the person, Paul wants them now to **forgive and comfort** the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that naturally indicate such a change in behavior. Alternate translation: “in contrast, you should instead forgive” or “instead of doing that, you should change your behavior and forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +2:7 w4n6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations παρακαλέσαι & τῇ 1 Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “comfort the individual … any” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +2:7 vpx1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ, καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “so that excessive sorrow might not overwhelm such a person” or “so that such a person might not experience overwhelming and excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:7 i3dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μή πως τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ καταποθῇ ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 Here Paul speaks as if a person could be **overwhelmed** or swallowed up by **sorrow**. He speaks in this way to indicate that a person can experience so much **sorrow** that it controls and destroys them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “so that such a person might not be overcome by excessive sorrow” or “so that such a person might not despair because of his excessive sorrow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:7 me4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 Here Paul speaks in general terms about **such a {person}**. However, he is referring more specifically to the person that he has already mentioned, the one who “grieved” the Corinthians (see [2:5](../02/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this reference more explicit. See how you translated this phrase in [2:6](../02/06.md). Alternate translation: “the person we are talking about” or “that individual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:7 cgil rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ περισσοτέρᾳ λύπῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sorrow**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sorrowful” or “sad.” Alternate translation: “as he is excessively sorrowful” or “because he is excessively sad” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:8 r916 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **So** introduces an exhortation that is based on what Paul said in the previous verse about “forgiving” and “comforting” the person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an exhortation or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:8 ii0x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure κυρῶσαι εἰς αὐτὸν ἀγάπην 1 Here, the phrase **for him** could go with: (1) **love**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm the love that you have for him” (2) **reaffirm**. Alternate translation: “to reaffirm to him your love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:8 yi2z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς & ἀγάπην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “that you love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:8 vlmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations αὐτὸν 1 Here, just as in [2:5](../02/05.md), [7](../02/07.md), Paul may be referring specifically to a man, especially if the way that he has “grieved” others is by sinning sexually. However, it is not certain that Paul is referring to a man here. Consider using a form that does not specify the gender of this person. Alternate translation: “that individual” or “the person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +2:9 oadd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **Indeed** introduces more information about the letter that Paul wrote to them (see [2:3–4](../02/03.md)). It does not identify a close link with the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **Indeed** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “As a matter of fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:9 lc78 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἔγραψα 1 Here, the phrase **I also wrote** again refers to the letter that Paul sent to them before he wrote 2 Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3–4](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I also wrote that letter” or “I also sent that previous letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:9 pp4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet εἰς τοῦτο & ἵνα 1 Here, the phrases **for this reason** and **so that** both introduce the purpose for which Paul **wrote** the previous letter. Paul uses this repetition to emphasize his purpose. If the repetition would be confusing in your language, and if it would not emphasize the purpose, you could combine the two phrases and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “so that” or “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +2:9 eebj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, the word **proof** refers primarily to the results of a test or trial. In this case, Paul is saying that he wants to **know** how they did on the test, which were the commands he included in the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the results of a test. Alternate translation: “how you responded to my commands” or “your character” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:9 uzsx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **proof** that the Corinthians give or provide. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the prove you provide” or “the proof from you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:9 gs2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν δοκιμὴν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **proof**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “prove.” Alternate translation: “what you would prove to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:9 xw5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπήκοοί 1 Here, Paul does not state to whom they are **obedient**. He could be implying that they are **obedient** to: (1) him as an apostle. Alternate translation: “obedient to me” (2) God and God’s commands. Alternate translation: “obedient to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:10 r7ib rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δέ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in Paul’s argument. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about the previous letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development or a conclusion, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Finally,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:10 o14x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ᾧ & τι χαρίζεσθε, κἀγώ 1 Here Paul could be making: (1) a specific statement about forgiving the person who “grieved” the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “to that person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (2) a general concluding statement about forgiveness. Alternate translation: “to any person to whom you forgive anything, I also forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:10 uzvm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis κἀγώ 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “I also forgive it” or “I also forgive them for it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +2:10 tzn1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **for indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous clause (**for**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “furthermore,” or “and in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:10 d9ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ὃ κεχάρισμαι, εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι, δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul includes the comment **if I have forgiven anything** in the middle of his sentence. Consider what may be a natural place to include extra information like this. Alternate translation: “for indeed, if I have forgiven anything, what I have forgiven is for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:10 avqv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴ τι κεχάρισμαι 1 This clarification fits with what Paul said in [2:5](../02/05.md) about how the person did not “grieve” him but rather the Corinthians. Paul could be saying that: (1) he does not have very much to forgive, since the person only hurt him a little. Alternate translation: “what little I had to forgive” (2) he really has nothing to forgive, since the person hurt the Corinthians, not him. Alternate translation: “although I have nothing to forgive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:10 cbm6 δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **for your sake** could mean that: (1) Paul forgives the person in order to benefit or help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “is for your benefit” (2) Paul forgives the person because the Corinthians forgave him. Alternate translation: “is because of you” or “is because you forgave” +2:10 b6uy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν προσώπῳ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in the presence of Christ** could indicate that: (1) Paul forgives because he knows that **Christ** sees or knows what he does. So, he acts in a way that pleases **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christ desires” or “with Christ watching” (2) Paul forgives with **Christ** as witness. Alternate translation: “with Christ as witness” or “with Christ guaranteeing it” (3) Paul forgives as someone who represents **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as one who represents Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:11 xaoc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul and Corinthians should “forgive” others (see [2:10](../02/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:11 xoaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ πλεονεκτηθῶμεν ὑπὸ τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Satan would not take advantage of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:11 z6no rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the first half of this verse about **Satan**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “because” or “inasmuch as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:11 m46t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ & αὐτοῦ τὰ νοήματα ἀγνοοῦμεν 1 Here the author uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “we are fully aware of his schemes” or “we are very knowledgeable about his schemes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +2:12 nh7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section. Paul has finished speaking about the person that he and the Corinthians should forgive. He now returns to the topic of his travel plans and why he has not visited the Corinthians (see [1:8–23](../01/08.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic or section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” or “I wish to speak again about my journeys:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:12 l6vd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθὼν & εἰς 1 In a context such as this, it may be more natural in your language to say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +2:12 c14o rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας & ἀνεῳγμένης 1 This clause gives information that contrasts with what Paul will say in the previous verse about how he left **Troas**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate this contrast with a natural form. Alternate translation: “and although a door for the gospel of Christ had been opened” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +2:12 a1ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης 1 Here Paul speaks of God providing opportunities for him to preach the **gospel** as if God were “opening” a **door** for the **gospel**. The image is of God opening a door so that Paul can go in and preach the message about Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and an opportunity to preach the gospel of Christ having been given to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:12 n9cr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ θύρας μοι ἀνεῳγμένης ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. In this case, Paul could be stating that the **Lord** did it, or he could be implying that “God” did it **in the Lord**. See the note about **in the Lord**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord having opened a door for the gospel of Christ for me” or “and God having opened a door for the gospel of Christ for me in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:12 vtg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the gospel** that could: (1) be about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the gospel concerning Christ” (2) belong to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “Christ’s gospel” or “the gospel from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:12 fcf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe his union with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, shows that the **door** was **opened** to Paul: (1) by the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “by the Lord” (2) so that he could continue to serve in his union with the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “in my union with the Lord” or “so that I can do what the Lord wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:12 m7x6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Κυρίῳ 1 Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord, the Messiah” (2) God generally. Alternate translation: “the Lord God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:13 rjy9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου 1 Here, the clause **I had no relief in my spirit** indicates that Paul was anxious or concerned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable form or plain language. Alternate translation: “My mind could not rest” or “I was concerned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +2:13 k7k9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου 1 Here Paul does not clarify what he was concerned or anxious about. He clarifies later in [7:5–16](../07/05.md) that he was anxious to know how Titus’ visit to the Corinthians went. The Corinthians would have made this inference, since Titus had already visited them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit. Alternate translation: “I had no relief in my spirit about Titus’ visit to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:13 trp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔσχηκα ἄνεσιν τῷ πνεύματί μου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **relief**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “restful” or “relieved.” Alternate translation: “My spirit was not restful” or “My spirit was not relieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:13 w79i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ εὑρεῖν με Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Here Paul is stating that **Titus** was not in Troas, not that he simply could not find him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that shows that **Titus** was not in the city of Troas when Paul visited there. Alternate translation: “as I found out that my brother Titus was not there” or “as my brother Titus was not in the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:13 xd5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Τίτον τὸν ἀδελφόν μου 1 Here Paul speaks of **Titus** as if he were his **brother** (probably a younger **brother**). He speaks in this way to indicate that **Titus** is a fellow believer and that he and Paul are as close as if they were brothers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language to express this idea. Alternate translation: “Titus, who is like my own brother,” or “my very dear friend and fellow believer Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:13 wq6j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀποταξάμενος αὐτοῖς 1 Here Paul refers to how he **said farewell** to the people from Troas, but he also means that he left their city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having said farewell to them and departed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:13 j9je rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the word **them** refers to the friends that Paul made in the city of “Troas” (see [2:12](../02/12.md)). Most likely, these people were fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make to whom **them** refers more explicit. Alternate translation: “to the people from Troas” or “to my friends in Troas” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:14 s6k3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. Paul will not speak again about Titus and his travel plans until [7:5](../07/05.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or topic, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “But now,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:14 g39s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations τῷ & Θεῷ χάρις 1 Here, the phrase **thanks {be} to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “we thank God” or “we give glory to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +2:14 qgok rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς & ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach … us” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2:14 gpd2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ πάντοτε θριαμβεύοντι ἡμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if **God** were a leader who had won a victory and set up a parade or **triumphal procession** to celebrate. In this parade, Paul and his fellow workers could be either or both of the following: (1) prisoners who have been conquered and who are put in the parade to illustrate the victory. This is the normal meaning of the word in other places. Alternate translation: “always parading us as his captives” or “always showing that he leads us” (2) soldiers who helped win the victory and who are celebrating. This is not the normal meaning of the word, but it is possible and fits the context well. Alternate translation: “always having us participate in his triumphal parade” or “always helping us to conquer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:14 so2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why or how they are involved in the **triumphal procession**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that union with Christ is the reason or the means for participating in the **procession**. Alternate translation: “because of our union with Christ” or “by means of our union with Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2:14 l1nr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ, φανεροῦντι δι’ ἡμῶν ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the knowledge of him** were an **aroma**, a smell or odor. In this case, the context implies that this is a pleasing or good smell. He speaks in this way to indicate that everyone hears and reacts to the message about Christ, just like everyone smells and reacts to a strong odor. Also, just like a smell fills a whole room, so the good news fills **every place** on earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a simile or plain language. Consider using a form that you can continue to use in the following two verses, in which Paul continues the **aroma** metaphor. Alternate translation: “making known through us and in every place the knowledge of him, which is like an good smell” or “powerfully revealing through us the knowledge of him, which is spreading into every place” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +2:14 tlqe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ὀσμὴν τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **aroma** that is **knowledge**. In other words, the possessive indicates what the **aroma** stands for. Then, Paul indicates that this **knowledge** is about **him**, meaning Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the aroma, which is knowledge about him” or “the aroma, that is, knowing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:14 ihbw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς γνώσεως αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “that is knowing him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:14 lxlc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the word **him** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “of God” (2) Christ specifically. Alternate translation: “of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:14 eq21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ 1 Here Paul speaks as if God used him and his fellow workers to make God known **in every place**. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that God uses them to make God known in many places, or in every place that they visit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea clearer. Alternate translation: “in every place we go” or “throughout the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +2:15 cjjj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse about “the aroma” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “Here is what I mean:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +2:15 yfx6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 Here, just as in [2:14](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2:15 x6nn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor Χριστοῦ εὐωδία ἐσμὲν τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14](../02/14.md)). He identifies himself and his fellow workers as a **fragrance** that comes from **Christ** and which goes toward **God**. By speaking in this way, he shows that **we** are those who represent or declare who Christ is in the presence of God. Just like everyone smells a good smell and knows where it comes from, so everyone notices Paul and his fellow workers and realizes that they represent **Christ** before **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Make sure that your translation fits with the previous and the following verses. Alternate translation: “we are like a good odor that spreads from Christ before God” or “we represent Christ before God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +2:15 b1k1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Χριστοῦ εὐωδία 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **fragrance** could: (1) come or spread from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance from Christ” (2) be presented or offered by **Christ**. Alternate translation: “a fragrance that Christ presents” or “a fragrance that Christ offers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:15 itc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῖς σῳζομένοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +2:15 ze7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 Christians disagree over whether God causes people to “perish” or whether people cause themselves to “perish.” The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the **perishing**. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the “perishing.” Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +2:16 zrae rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οἷς μὲν & οἷς δὲ 1 Here, the word translated as **indeed** indicates that the author is introducing the first of two parts. The word **but** introduces the second part. The author uses this form to contrast “the ones perishing” and “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally contrasts two groups of people. Alternate translation: “on one hand, to the ones … but on the other hand, to the others” or “to the ones … but to the others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +2:16 pv6o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οἷς μὲν ὀσμὴ ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον, οἷς δὲ ὀσμὴ ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 Here Paul refers to “the ones perishing” before he refers to “the ones being saved,” which is the opposite of the order he used in [2:15](../02/15.md). This was good style in his culture. If reversing the order from [2:15](../02/15.md) would be confusing for your readers, and if it would not be good style, you could reverse the order here to match that in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “to the ones indeed, an aroma from life to life, but to the others, an aroma from death to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +2:16 t3vw rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἷς -1 Here, the phrase **to the ones** refers to “the ones perishing,” and the phrase **to the {others}** refers to “the ones being saved” (see [2:15](../02/15.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify to whom these phrases refer. Alternate translation: “to the latter … to the former” or “to the ones perishing … to the ones being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:16 dwk6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ὀσμὴ -1 Here Paul continues to speak about **fragrance** and good smells (see [2:14–15](../02/14.md)). He specifically explains what kind of **aroma** he and his fellow workers are. Those who do not believe think that the **aroma** smells bad, while those who do believe think that the **aroma** smells good. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated the “smelling” language in [2:14–15](../02/14.md). Alternate translation: “we smell like an aroma … we smell like an aroma” or “our message is … our message is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +2:16 ud2u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 Twice here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word. He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the **aroma**, and **to** indicates the effects of the **aroma**. Alternate translation: “that smells like death and leads to death … that smells like life and leads to life” or “of death causing death … of life causing life” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the **aroma** is characterized completely by either **death** or **life**. Alternate translation: “of death … of life” or “characterized completely by death … characterized completely by life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:16 yau5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ θανάτου εἰς θάνατον & ἐκ ζωῆς εἰς ζωήν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live” or adjectives such as “dead” and “alive.” Make sure your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “that comes from something dying and that leads to people dying … that comes from something living and leads to people living” or “that smells like something dead … that smells like something alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:16 cdr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πρὸς ταῦτα 1 Here, the phrase **these things** refers back to what those who proclaim the good news must do, things that Paul has outlined in [2:14–16](../02/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to what **these things** refers. Alternate translation: “to do what I have said” or “to preach the gospel like this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +2:16 be6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πρὸς ταῦτα τίς ἱκανός? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question could imply that the answer is that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers are **sufficient** since God works through them. Alternate translation: “for these things, we are indeed sufficient!” (2) no one is **sufficient**. Alternate translation: “for these things, nobody is sufficient!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +2:17 h7y1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) an explanation of the implied answer to the previous question, which is that Paul and his fellow workers are “sufficient” since God works through them. Alternate translation: “But we are sufficient, because” (2) an explanation of why Paul and his fellow workers are like an aroma of life or death (see [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “We are an aroma of life or death because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +2:17 pmpz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἐσμεν & λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach are … we speak” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … I speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +2:17 u7ui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οἱ πολλοὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +2:17 yf8u rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown καπηλεύοντες 1 Here, the word **peddling** refers to the practice of selling goods that one has. The word implies that the person who is **peddling** is trying to make as much profit as they can, whether by honest or deceitful means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to selling something for as much money as possible. Alternate translation: “trading in” or “selling off” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +2:17 a5sa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +2:17 ohh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the word** that could be: (1) from **God**. Alternate translation: “the word from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “the word about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +2:17 u4iy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ ὡς -1 Here Paul uses **but as** to introduce a contrast with **the many** who “peddle” God’s word. Paul repeats **but as** to continue and emphasize this contrast, not to contrast **sincerity** and **from God**. If the repetition of **but as** would be confusing, you could use **but as** once and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “but instead as … and even more as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +2:17 x86y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ εἰλικρινείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sincerity**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sincere.” Alternate translation: “those who are sincere” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +2:17 f9x4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἐκ Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **as from God** indicates that God sent Paul and his fellow workers to **speak** the gospel. The word **as** indicates how they **speak**. It does not mean that they are not really **from God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as those whom God has sent” or “as ones sent by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:17 aizg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαλοῦμεν 1 Here, Paul implies that they are speaking **the word of God** that he already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what they **speak** more explicit. Alternate translation: “we speak the word of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:17 vpdc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **in the presence of God** could indicate that: (1) they **speak** as they do because they know that **God** sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases **God**. Alternate translation: “as God desires” or “with God watching” (2) they **speak** with **God** as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “with God as witness” or “with God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2:17 u2zb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains how they **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that they **speak** as those who are united to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “as Christians” or “as those united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:1 mdwx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἀρχόμεθα & ἑαυτοὺς & μὴ χρῄζομεν 1 Here, just as in [2:14–15](../02/14.md), [17](../02/17.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “Are we who preach beginning … ourselves … we do not need … do we” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “Am I beginning … myself … I do not need … do I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +3:intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Qualification for ministry (3:1–6)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Letters of recommendation\n\nIn [3:1–3](../03/01.md), Paul refers to “letters of recommendation.” These were letters that a person carried with them when they traveled to a new place. Someone that the traveler knew would write that the traveler could be trusted and should be welcomed, and the traveler would give this letter to people that he or she visited. If something like this is not a common practice in your culture, you may need to explain it for your readers in a footnote. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/letter]])\n\n### Letter and Spirit\n\nIn [3:6–8](../03/06.md), Paul contrasts “letter” and “Spirit.” In these verses, the word “letter” refers to written characters, and the word “Spirit” refers to the Holy Spirit. Paul’s point is that whatever is characterized by the “letter” is something that is only written down and does not have any power. Whatever is characterized by the “Spirit” has power and can change people. Although it also might be written down, the “Spirit” gives it power. Paul uses this contrast to describe one of the differences between the old covenant (“letter”) and the new covenant (“Spirit”). Consider a natural way to express this contrast in your language.\n\n### Glory\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul speaks extensively of “glory.” He indicates that the old covenant and ministry had glory, but the new covenant and ministry have much more glory. The word “glory” refers to how great, powerful, and amazing someone or something is. Consider how to express this idea throughout the chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]])\n\n### Veiling of the glory on Moses’ face\n\nIn [3:7](../03/07.md), [13](../03/13.md), Paul refers to a story about what happened when Moses received the Ten Commandments from God. Because he met God and spoke with him, Moses’ face became bright or shining. Because of that, Moses would cover his face with a veil or cloth when he was with the Israelites after he spoke with God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). Paul also notes that the brightness or “glory” on Moses’ face would fade away. This detail cannot be found directly in the story in Exodus. Paul either inferred it from the story, or it was tradition to say that the “glory” faded away. If your readers would not understand what Paul refers to in these verses, you could include a footnote or explanatory information. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/veil]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### The Corinthians as a letter of recommendation\n\nIn [3:2–3](../03/02.md), Paul describes the Corinthians themselves as a letter of recommendation for him and his fellow workers. He speaks in this way because anyone who knows the Corinthians will know that they believed because of Paul and those who worked with him. In this way, the Corinthians “recommend” Paul as a true apostle of Jesus. If possible, preserve the metaphor of a letter of recommendation or express the idea with a simile.\n\n### The “veil”\n\nAfter he introduces how Moses put an actual “veil” over his face, Paul begins to use the word “veil” and related words in figurative ways (see [3:14–18](../03/14.md)). He claims that people who are not united to Christ cannot understand the Old Testament, and he describes this inability to understand as a “veil” that covers their hearts. In other words, just as the the veil obscured the glory on Moses’ face, so the meaning of the Old Testament is obscured for someone who hears it but does not believe in Jesus. However,\nPaul says that this “veil” is taken away when someone believes in Jesus. Because of that, those who believe have no “veil” and can reflect God’s glory even more than Moses’ did. This is a complex figure of speech that connects directly to the story about Moses and his veil. Because of that, it is important to preserve the “veil” language. If your readers would not understand that Paul is speaking figuratively, you could use a simile to express the idea.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### “The Lord is the Spirit”\n\nIn [3:17](../03/17.md), Paul states that “the Lord is the Spirit.” Scholars have understood this sentence in three primary ways. First, Paul could be defining who he meant when he referred to “the Lord” in the previous verse ([3:16](../03/16.md)). Second, Paul could be stating that the way that believers experience “the Lord” is as the Holy Spirit. Third, Paul could be stating that “the Lord” is a spirit or is spiritual. It is most likely true that Paul is defining who “the Lord” he has referred to is, so it is recommended that you follow the first option. See the notes on this verse for translation possibilities. +3:1 um8x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “no, we are not.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “We are certainly not beginning to commend ourselves again!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +3:1 fuds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and his fellow workers had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:1 noiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἢ 1 The word **Or** introduces an alternative to what Paul asked in the first question. In that question, he implied that they were not “commending” themselves again. With **Or**, then, Paul poses a question that introduces the incorrect alternative: they might need **letters of recommendation**. He introduces this incorrect alternative to show that the implication of his first question is true: they are not “commending” themselves again. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the contrary,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +3:1 y8yc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “we do not need them.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “In fact, we certainly do not need, like some, letters of recommendation to you or from you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +3:1 syny rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὥς τινες 1 Here, the word **some** refers generally to people other than Paul and his fellow workers. Paul may more specifically have in mind the people who opposed him in Corinth, but he does not make this explicit. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people other than Paul and those who serve with him. Alternate translation: “like some others” or “like some people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:1 ad1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to **letters** that gave a **recommendation** for the person who carry the letter. Many people in Paul’s culture would ask friends to write these letters, and then they would show the letters to people they visited to prove that they were trustworthy and could be welcomed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally refers to this kind of letter. Alternate translation: “letters of reference” or “letters of introduction” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:1 dygq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **recommendation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “recommend.” Alternate translation: “letters that recommend us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:2 ty59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Here Paul continues to speak about “letters,” but now he tells the Corinthians that they themselves are the **letter** of recommendation for Paul and his fellow workers. This **letter** is not a physical document, but is **written** in their **hearts**, and **all men** can **read** it. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that the recommendation he relies on is the Corinthian believers. In other words, the fact that they believe and that they are close with Paul (**in our hearts**) shows that Paul is trustworthy and a true apostle. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “You yourselves are like our letter of recommendation, which you wrote on us and that is known and read by all men” or “We do not need a letter of recommendation because you yourselves are the recommendation that is in our hearts and that is known and understood by all men” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:2 f8s8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς ἐστε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **You**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **You** in your language. Alternate translation: “You indeed are” or “It is you who are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +3:2 a7xl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1](../03/01.md), the word **our** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “the letter for us who preach the gospel … our hearts” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “my letter … my heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +3:2 ygx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἡμῶν & ἐνγεγραμμένη 1 With the phrase **our letter**, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **letter** that could: (1) recommend “us.” Alternate translation: “the letter for us written” or “a letter that recommends us written” (2) be written by “us.” Alternate translation: “a letter written by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:2 v2e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐνγεγραμμένη ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that the recommendation from the Corinthians is not written down on paper but, rather, is a part of their relationship with Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “written inside us” or “expressed by our relationship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +3:2 ko7w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνγεγραμμένη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul states in the following verse that “Christ” did it (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). Alternate translation: “that Christ has written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:2 bu1u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη ὑπὸ πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which all men know and read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:2 pzpz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet γινωσκομένη καὶ ἀναγινωσκομένη 1 Here, the words **known** and **read** express very similar ideas. It is likely that **known** indicates that people are aware that there is a **letter**, while **read** indicates that they know what the **letter** says. If you do not have words that express these distinctions, and if the repetition would be confusing in your language, you could express the idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “read” or “noticed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +3:2 dr5k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πάντων ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the word **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to all people, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “every person” or “all men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +3:3 s717 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit φανερούμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **making known** could: (1) indicate that something is well-known or obvious to people. Alternate translation: “being clear” or “so it is evident” (2) state that the Corinthians show or reveal something to others. Alternate translation: “you making it clear” or “you revealing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:3 aylw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐστὲ ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ, διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν, ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 Here Paul continues to speak as if the Corinthians were a **letter**. Here, he states that this **letter** was written by **Christ** and **administered** by Paul and his fellow workers. He means that **Christ** is the one who enabled the Corinthians to believe, and **Christ** worked through Paul and his fellow workers to do that. Paul then contrasts a **letter** written with **ink** and on **tablets of stone** with a **letter** written by the power of the **Spirit** and on **hearts of flesh**. What he means by this is that the letter is the Corinthians, not some written document, and that the message is communicated by the **Spirit**, not by letters written with **ink**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or in some other natural way. Alternate translation: “you are like a letter of Christ having been administered by us, not written with ink but as if with the Spirit of the living God, not on tablets of stone but as if on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “you are a message from Christ having been administered by us, not communicated by ink but by the Spirit of the living God, not presented on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:3 hlap rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπιστολὴ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that the **letter** is from or written by **Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a letter from Christ” or “a letter written by Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:3 wrk4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we have administered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:3 dsxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διακονηθεῖσα ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **having been administered by us** could indicate that: (1) “we” delivered the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been delivered by us” or “having been sent by us” (2) “we” helped **Christ** compose the **letter**. Alternate translation: “having been composed with our help” or “that we wrote down” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:3 bfsl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–2](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +3:3 akc6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ μέλανι, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 If your language would not put the negative statements before the positive statements, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “written with the Spirit of the living God, not with ink, on tablets of hearts of flesh, not on tablets of stone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +3:3 vyuh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Πνεύματι Θεοῦ ζῶντος, οὐκ ἐν πλαξὶν λιθίναις, ἀλλ’ ἐν πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 These phrases leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply the word **written** from earlier in the sentence in some or all of the phrases. Alternate translation: “but written with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but written on tablets of hearts of flesh” or “but with the Spirit of the living God, not written on tablets of stone but on tablets of hearts of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +3:3 q96q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνγεγραμμένη οὐ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that Christ did it. Alternate translation: “which Christ wrote not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:3 qt5g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μέλανι 1 Here, the word **ink** refers to colored liquid that people in Paul’s culture used to write letters and words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever term naturally refers to what people use to write letters and words. Alternate translation: “with a pen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +3:3 t5ah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 Here, the phrase **living God** identifies God as the one who “lives” and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that **God** actually lives, unlike inanimate idols and other things that people may call gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:3 ana2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐν πλαξὶν -1 Here, the word **tablets** refers to thin, flat pieces of stone on which people would write words, especially important words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the surface on which people write something important. Paul may be referring here to the **tablets** on which Moses wrote God’s commandments (see [Exodus 34:1–4](../exo/34/01.md)), so, if possible, use a word that could refer to those **tablets**. Alternate translation: “on flat pieces … on flat pieces” or “on plaques … on plaques” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +3:3 ih89 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πλαξὶν λιθίναις 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that are made out of **stone**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “stone tablets” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:3 u959 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πλαξὶν καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **tablets** that refer to **hearts** that are made of **flesh**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “tablets that are fleshly hearts” or “tablets that are hearts made of flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:3 no25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καρδίαις σαρκίναις 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. Here Paul states that these **hearts** are made of **flesh**, meaning that they are live, functional body parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “of living people” or “of what we think and do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +3:4 pyev rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development in the argument. Here it indicates that Paul is moving on to a slightly different topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that introduces a development in the argument, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:4 wy6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἔχομεν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–3](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel have” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +3:4 z7qx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην ἔχομεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “confident.” Alternate translation: “we are confident in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:4 q0kr rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns πεποίθησιν & τοιαύτην 1 Here, the word **such** indicates that the **confidence** is the kind that Paul showed in the previous verses, especially in [3:1–3](../03/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it clearer that **such** refers back to what Paul has said in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “that kind of confidence” or “confidence in those ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:4 y72k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς τὸν Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **toward God** could indicate that the **confidence** is: (1) before or in the presence of **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God approves of him and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “with regard to God” (2) in **God**. In other words, Paul has **confidence** that God will do what he has promised. Alternate translation: “in God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:5 knf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast οὐχ 1 Here, the word **Not** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about **confidence** (see [3:4](../03/04.md)). He wishes to clarify that the **confidence** is not based on human abilities but on **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “But it is not” or “However, it is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +3:5 i7nt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἑαυτῶν & ἐσμεν & ἑαυτῶν & ἡμῶν 1 Here, just as in [3:1–4](../03/01.md), the words **we**, **ourselves**, and **our** do not include the Corinthians. They could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel are … ourselves … ourselves … our” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I am … myself … myself … my” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +3:5 qye9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν ἱκανοί & ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul does not state what they are not **sufficient** to do. He implies that it is serving God by preaching the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “sufficient in preaching the gospel from ourselves … our sufficiency for this task” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:5 e5e7 ἑαυτῶν & λογίσασθαί 1 Here, the phrase **to consider** introduces an explanation or elaboration of what **sufficient from ourselves** means. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or elaboration. Alternate translation: “ourselves, that is, we do not consider” or “ourselves, so that we consider” +3:5 tws9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τι 1 Here, the word **anything** refers to whatever they do to serve God well. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “anything we do preach the gospel” or “whatever we do well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:5 wi1t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἱκανότης ἡμῶν ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufficiency**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “sufficient.” Alternate translation: “God makes us sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:6 t785 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς διακόνους 1 Here, just as in [3:1–5](../03/01.md), the word **us** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “us, who preach the gospel, … as servants” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “me … as a servant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +3:6 r5ea rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διακόνους καινῆς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify himself and his fellow workers as **servants** who serve for the benefit of **a new covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as those who serve a new covenant” or “as servants who administer a new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:6 j8rd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit, not of the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +3:6 poyq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 When Paul contrasts **letter** and **Spirit**, he implies that **letter** describes the old covenant and **Spirit** describes the new covenant. What he means is that the old covenant was only written down and could not change people on the inside. On the other hand, the new covenant is empowered by the Holy **Spirit**, who can change people on the inside. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “not a covenant of the letter that is powerless but a covenant of the powerful Spirit” or “not one that is only written down but one that the Spirit puts inside people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:6 dp6i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy γράμματος & τὸ & γράμμα 1 Here, the word **letter** refers generally to a message written using sound-symbols called letters. More specifically, Paul uses the word **letter** to refer to the old covenant, a written document. It could not change people like the **Spirit** can. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to a message written in “letters”. Alternate translation: “in written form … what was written” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +3:6 bdrz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession γράμματος, ἀλλὰ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **covenant** that is given or mediated by the **Spirit**, not by the **letter**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in letters but by the Spirit” or “mediated by letter but by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:6 tc4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματος & τὸ δὲ Πνεῦμα 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit … but God’s Spirit” (2) the spirit of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit … but the spirit” or “of the heart … but the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:6 q4at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὸ & γράμμα ἀποκτέννει 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the letter** were a person who **kills** others. He speaks in this way to indicate that **the letter** (which refers to the old covenant and its regulations) does not have the power to give life but instead can only condemn people to die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “the letter is like someone who kills” or “the letter dooms people to die” or “the letter causes death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +3:7 lyf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:7 yzhq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry** of **death** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +3:7 rife rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that leads to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:7 du65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of ministering. In this case, the word refers to how Moses administered the old covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of this death” or “the act of ministering that led to death” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the old covenant or its laws. Alternate translation: “the system of this death” or “the laws that led to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:7 ut6r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ διακονία τοῦ θανάτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract nouns for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “the ministry that causes people die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:7 j1hp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that God did it (see also [Exodus 34:1](../exo/34/01.md)). Alternate translation: “which God engraved in letters on stones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:7 rx13 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν γράμμασιν ἐντετυπωμένη λίθοις 1 Here Paul refers to how God **engraved** or carved the regulations for the **ministry** on **stones** or tablets. Much as in the previous verse, **letters** refers to written characters, so the point is that God used writing. Paul is probably referring to the story about how Moses met God on a mountain, and God carved the regulations of the covenant on two pieces of stone. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:1–28](../exo/34/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “engraved in writing by God onto two stone slabs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:7 r5p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐγενήθη ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “was very great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:7 myms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὥστε μὴ δύνασθαι ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον Μωϋσέως, διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here Paul refers to a story about what happened after God **engraved** the stone tablets. When Moses returned to talk to the Israelites, his face shone brightly because he had been talking to God. In other words, some of God’s **glory** became part of Moses’ **face**, and the Israelites could not **look intently** at his face because it was a little like looking at God. You can read this story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or include a footnote explaining the story. Alternate translation: “so that the sons of Israel were not able to look carefully at the face of Moses because of the fading glory on his face that came from talking with God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:7 s9zp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +3:7 mh54 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +3:7 enwt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here, the reason why the Israelites **were not able to look intently** at Moses’ face could be that: (1) Moses’ face was very “glorious.” Alternate translation: “because of the glory of his face, even though it was fading” (2) the **glory of his face** was **fading**. Alternate translation: “because the glory of his face was fading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:7 pqbi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “shining.” Alternate translation: “how his face was shining, even though that was fading” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:7 ewkr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν δόξαν τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ, τὴν καταργουμένην 1 Here, the word **fading** could describe: (1) the **glory** of Moses’ **face**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face that faded” (2) the **ministry of this death**. Alternate translation: “the glory of his face, although that ministry was fading away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:8 xxn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πῶς οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος ἔσται ἐν δόξῃ? 1 Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question implies that the answer is “yes, it has much more glory.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “then the ministry of the Spirit will certainly be with much more glory.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +3:8 wkvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture οὐχὶ & ἔσται 1 Here Paul could use the future tense because: (1) he is stating an inference from something in the past, so the inference is future. Paul does not mean that the **ministry** will only have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “then is … not” (2) he is stating that the **ministry** will have **glory** in the future. He could mean that it only has **glory** in the future, or he could mean that it has **glory** in the present and will also have **glory** in the future. Alternate translation: “will … in the future not be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +3:8 wq1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the ministry** that could: (1) lead to people receiving the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry that provides the Spirit” or “the ministry that leads to the Spirit” (2) be accomplished by the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the ministry worked by the Spirit” or “the ministry accomplished by the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:8 dhs5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ διακονία τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of ministering. In this case, the word refers to how Paul and his fellow workers administered the new covenant. Alternate translation: “the service of the Spirit” or “the act of ministering that leads to the Spirit” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to the new covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of the Spirit” or “the principles that lead to the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:8 bmme rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “of God’s Spirit” (2) the “spirit” of a person, or their mind or heart. Alternate translation: “of the spirit” or “of the heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:8 tcp5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μᾶλλον & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “much more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:9 m2ci rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces further explanation of what Paul has said about the two ministries in [3:7–8](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:9 p7p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as **if** the **glory** of the **ministry of this condemnation** were only a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +3:9 ufq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως & ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here, the word **ministry** could refer primarily to: (1) the action of ministering. In this case, the word refers to how people administered the two covenants. Alternate translation: “the service of this condemnation … the service of this righteousness” or “the act of ministering that leads to this condemnation … the act of ministering that leads to this righteousness” (2) the system of **ministry**. In this case, the word refers to a covenant or its principles. Alternate translation: “the system of this condemnation … the system of this righteousness” or “the law that leads to condemnation … the principle that leads to righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:9 k779 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **condemnation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this condemnation” or “the ministry that ended in this condemnation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:9 tcxw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ διακονίᾳ τῆς κατακρίσεως, δόξα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **condemnation** and **glory**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused people to be condemned was great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:9 if33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ 1 Here, Paul uses an exclamation to emphatically compare the two ministries and to show that **the ministry of this righteousness** has **much more glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally compares the **glory** of the two ministries. Alternate translation: “then certainly the ministry of this righteousness abounds in much more glory!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +3:9 egmy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that leads to **righteousness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that caused this righteousness” or “the ministry that ended in this righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:9 e5zz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῷ μᾶλλον περισσεύει ἡ διακονία τῆς δικαιοσύνης δόξῃ. 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness** and **glory**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that makes people righteous is even more great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:10 q8bg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information that supports what he said about **glory** in [3:7–9](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “And in fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:10 n4pe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ δεδοξασμένον & τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης 1 Here, the phrase **{what} had been glorified** refers to the old covenant that God gave through Moses. The phrase **surpassing glory** refers to the new covenant that Paul and his fellow workers serve. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what these phrases refer to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that was glorified … the surpassing glory of the new covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:10 t2dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the “glorifying,” since Paul is focusing on the fact of “glory” rather than on the action of becoming “glorious.” Alternate translation: “what had glory does not have glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:10 hmcu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ δεδόξασται, τὸ δεδοξασμένον ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει 1 Here, the phrase **in this part** could modify: (1) in what way the old covenant is **not glorified**. In other words, **in this part** introduces the way in which something that has **been glorified** can actually be **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “what had been glorified is not glorified, and here is why:” or “what had been glorified is not glorified in this way” (2) **{what} had been glorified**. In other words, the old covenant was **glorified** only “partially.” Alternate translation: “what had been glorified in part is not glorified” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +3:10 es4c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει 1 Here, the phrase **in this part** indicates that a statement is only true in **part** or in some specific way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the qualification that some statement or action is partially true or accurate. Alternate translation: “in a sense” or “in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +3:10 d7k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν τούτῳ τῷ μέρει εἵνεκεν 1 Here, the phrase **in this part** and the word **because** both introduce how or why **{what} had been glorified** is **not glorified**. Paul uses both elements because he wants to make his point very clear. If the repetition would not make the point clearer, and if using both elements would be confusing in your language, you could use one word or phrase that introduces how what was **glorified** is **not glorified**. Alternate translation: “because of” or “in comparison to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +3:10 pvbx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “what was much more glorious” or “what was even greater” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:10 f2mo τῆς ὑπερβαλλούσης δόξης 1 Alternate translation: “the glory that surpasses it” +3:11 grwl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of the comparison between the two covenants and their **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “As it is,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:11 r7c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul is speaking as if the **glory** of **{what} is fading away** were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word such as “since” or “given that.” Alternate translation: “since” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +3:11 ym37 τὸ καταργούμενον 1 Here, the words translated **{what} is fading away** could indicate: (1) that something is disappearing or temporary without stating that anyone is making it disappear. Alternate translation: “what is passing away” (2) that God is causing something to disappear or pass away. Alternate translation: “what is being abolished” or “what God is abolishing” +3:11 zwb2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ καταργούμενον 1 Here, the phrase **fading away** translates the same word that Paul used in [3:7](../03/07.md) to refer to how the glory was “fading” from Moses’ face. Paul means that just like the glory on Moses’ face was temporary, so the old covenant that God made through Moses was also temporary. See how you translated this idea in [3:7](../03/07.md) and use similar language if possible. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea using a simile. Alternate translation: “what is temporary” or “what is fading, like the glory on Moses’ face,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:11 hm9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ καταργούμενον & τὸ μένον 1 Here, the phrase **{what} is fading away** refers to the old covenant, while the phrase **{what} remains** refers to the new covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what these phrases refer to. Alternate translation: “the old covenant that is fading away … the new covenant that remains” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:11 wtht rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ δόξης & ἐν δόξῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great” or an adverb such as “gloriously.” Alternate translation: “was great … is great” or “came gloriously … will come gloriously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:11 wrf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations πολλῷ μᾶλλον τὸ μένον ἐν δόξῃ 1 Here, Paul uses an exclamation to emphatically compare the two covenants and to show that the covenant that **remains** has much more **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a way that naturally compares the **glory** of the two covenants. Alternate translation: “then certainly what remains will come with much more glory!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +3:12 tnc1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he has said about the ministry of “glory” in [3:4–11](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Because of this ministry of glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +3:12 ib35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers **act with much boldness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +3:12 j76k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔχοντες & τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “hope” or an adjective such as “hopeful.” Alternate translation: “being hopeful in such a way” or “hoping in that way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:12 u5qa rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοιαύτην ἐλπίδα 1 Here, the word **such** refers to back to what Paul has said about the “glory” of the ministry in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). In other words, the **hope** is based on the glorious ministry and covenant. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **such** refers to. Alternate translation: “that kind of hope” or “hope in such a covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:12 rf9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive χρώμεθα 1 Here, just as in [3:1–6](../03/01.md), the word **we** does not include the Corinthians. It could refer to: (1) Paul and those who proclaim the gospel with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +3:12 zbff rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χρώμεθα 1 Here Paul does not say exactly what it is that **we** do. He implies that it is the “ministry” that he has referred to in [3:7–11](../03/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **we** do more explicit. Alternate translation: “we perform the ministry” or “we proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:12 b5ql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλῇ παρρησίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **boldness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “bold” or an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “as very bold people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:13 fb59 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ οὐ καθάπερ Μωϋσῆς 1 Here Paul contrasts the **boldness** that he and his fellow workers show with how **Moses** could not show God’s glory openly. In other words, Paul and his fellow workers can reveal God’s glory openly, in contrast to Moses, who could not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this contrast more explicit. Alternate translation: “and without hiding the glory, like Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:13 p1y3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς ἐτίθει κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, πρὸς τὸ μὴ ἀτενίσαι τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ, εἰς τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here Paul refers to a story in [Exodus 34:29–35](../exo/34/29.md) that describes how Moses’ face shone with God’s glory after Moses spoke with him. Moses would hide his face with a **veil** when **his face** shone like this. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is writing about more explicit. See how you translated the similar phrases in [3:7](../03/07.md), where Paul has already referred to this story. Alternate translation: “Moses wearing a veil to hide his face so that the sons of Israel would not look directly at it when the glory on his face, which came from talking with God, was disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:13 boui rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τοὺς υἱοὺς 1 Although the word **sons** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any children or descendants, both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the sons and daughters” or “the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +3:13 pdnk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραὴλ 1 Here the author uses the word **sons** to refer in general to all the descendants of **Israel**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to descendants in general. Alternate translation: “the descendants of Israel” or “those descended from Israel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) +3:13 vuyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ τέλος 1 Here, the word **end** could refer to: (1) the result of the **fading**, which was that the “glory” completely stopped shining from Moses’ face. Alternate translation: “the cessation” or “the termination” (2) the purpose or implication of how the “glory” ceased shining from Moses’ face, which was that the old covenant too would cease. Alternate translation: “the result” or “the meaning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:13 p5u2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here, the phrase **{what} was fading away** could refer to: (1) the “glory” that shone from the **face** of Moses. In this case, Paul could also be implying that the old covenant would also “fade.” Alternate translation: “of the glory that was fading from his face” (2) the old covenant, that would “fade away” when God instituted a new covenant. Alternate translation: “of the covenant that would fade away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:13 mczg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ τέλος τοῦ καταργουμένου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **{what} was fading away** completely ceased or “ended.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how what was fading away ended” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:14 kb8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **But** could introduce a contrast between: (1) being able to “look intently” and having **hardened** minds. Alternate translation: “But instead of looking intently,” (2) what Moses did (veiling his face) and what the Israelites did (have **hardened** minds). Alternate translation: “In contrast to Moses,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +3:14 csl1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **their** refers to “the sons of Israel” that Paul mentioned in [3:13](../03/13.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun **their** refers. Alternate translation: “the minds of the sons of Israel” or “the minds of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:14 khkq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If it is possible, avoid stating who did the “hardening,” since Paul is emphasizing the fact that their minds were “hard,” not who did the “hardening.” If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Israelites did it to themselves. Alternate translation: “they hardened their minds” or “their minds became hard” (2) God did it to them. Alternate translation: “God hardened their minds” (3) Satan did it to them. Alternate translation: “Satan hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:14 zvf5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπωρώθη τὰ νοήματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if people’s **minds** were a soft substance that could be **hardened**, becoming resistant to change. He speaks in this way to indicate that their **minds** could not know or understand what was happening, unlike a soft substance that would change when something impacts it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they could not realize what was true” or “they could not think properly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:14 tzbd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a further explanation of what Paul has said about how **their minds were hardened**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “since” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:14 w68p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **veil** kept people from understanding the **old covenant** when it is “read,” and this veil is not **lifted**. He speaks in this way to identify the inability of people to understand the **old covenant** with how Moses’ kept the Israelites from looking at his face with a **veil**. Just as the **veil** kept them from seeing the glory on his face, so a **veil** keeps people from understanding **the reading of the old covenant**. Since Paul uses this figure of speech to connect what he is saying with what he has said about Moses, you should preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is a like a veil that remains at the reading of the old covenant, not being lifted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:14 wcbv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης μένει, μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 Here, the phrase **not being lifted** could: (1) explain why the veil **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil remains at the reading of the old covenant, since it is not lifted” (2) describe the state that **remains**. Alternate translation: “the same veil is still not lifted at the reading of the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +3:14 wymg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here, the phrase **same veil** could refer to: (1) the veil that Moses wore (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). Alternate translation: “the veil that Moses wore” (2) the veil that **hardened** their **minds**. Alternate translation: “the veil that hardened their minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:14 gg2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐπὶ τῇ ἀναγνώσει τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer to a person **reading** the **old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when the old covenant is read” or “when they read the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:14 orvo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς παλαιᾶς διαθήκης 1 Here, the phrase **old covenant** refers to the words that contain or describe **the old covenant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer directly to these words. Alternate translation: “of the message about the old covenant” or “of the words that describe the old covenant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +3:14 gl8l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ ἀνακαλυπτόμενον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who would do the action, Paul implies that “God” would do it. Alternate translation: “God not lifting it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:14 vygf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **because** could indicate why: (1) the **veil** is not “lifted.” Alternate translation: “and it is not lifted, because” (2) the **veil remains**. Alternate translation: “and the veil remains, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +3:14 m7lk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains why and how the **veil** is “lifted.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ leads to the “lifting” of the **veil**. Alternate translation: “only when a person is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:14 r1lt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καταργεῖται 1 Here, the phrase **fading away** is the same phrase that Paul used to describe how the “glory” was “fading” from Moses’ face (see [3:13](../03/13.md)). What Paul means is that the **veil** disappears or is removed **in Christ**. If possible, use a word or phrase that reminds your readers of how you translated “fading” in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “is it being abolished” or “is it disappearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:14 rhid rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns καταργεῖται 1 Here, the word **it** could refer to: (1) the **veil**. Alternate translation: “is this veil fading away” (2) the **old covenant**. Alternate translation: “is this covenant fading away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:15 cv2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with what Paul said in the previous verse about the veil “fading away” in Christ ([3:14](../03/14.md)). What Paul says in the rest of the verse repeats many of the ideas from the first parts of [3:14](../03/14.md). Consider whether a contrast word or a connecting word expresses the idea most clearly. Alternate translation: “However,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +3:15 t3dl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς 1 Here, the word **Moses** could refer to: (1) the first five books of the Old Testament, often called “the Law” or the “Pentateuch.” Alternate translation: “the Law is read” or “the first parts of the Old Testament are read” (2) the entire Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures are read” or “the Old Testament is read” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +3:15 ip29 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναγινώσκηται Μωϋσῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone reads Moses” or “they hear someone read Moses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:15 bb5u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κάλυμμα ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν κεῖται 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “their lack of understanding is like a veil that lies over their heart” or “they do not understand, as if a veil lies over their heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:15 gwp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate **heart** by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by expressing the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “over their mind” or “over their understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +3:15 z5zh rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **heart** is a singular noun that refers to the “hearts” of many people. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “their hearts” or “each of their hearts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +3:15 lmu6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὴν καρδίαν αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **their** could refer to: (1) anyone who hears the reading of **Moses** without being “in Christ.” Alternate translation: “the hearts of those who listen” (2) the same people that “their” referred to in [3:14](../03/14.md): the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelites’ heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:16 k2dr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψῃ πρὸς Κύριον 1 Here, the phrase **turn to the Lord** refers to a how people stop doing whatever they want and instead begin to trust and obey God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “one begins to serve the Lord” or “one begins to believe in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:16 aqna rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐπιστρέψῃ 1 Here, the word **one** refers to any person who does the “turning.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person. Alternate translation: “anyone might turn” or “any person might turn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +3:16 wawh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Κύριον 1 Here, the word **Lord** could refer to: (1) God generally. Alternate translation: “God the Lord” (2) Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Lord Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:16 mibm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a **veil** that keeps people from understanding the Scriptures. Express the metaphor as you did in [3:14–15](../03/14.md). Alternate translation: “the lack of understanding that is like a veil is taken away” or “one understands, as if the veil were taken away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:16 w1y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive περιαιρεῖται τὸ κάλυμμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “the veil disappears” or “God takes away the veil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:17 lrxy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:17 ulmp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ & Κύριος & Κυρίου 1 Here, just as in [3:16](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in [3:16](../03/16.md). Alternate translation: “God the Lord … of God the Lord is” or “the Lord Jesus … of the Lord Jesus is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:17 erpi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμά & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit … that Spirit of the Lord is” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “the spirit … the spirit of the Lord is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:17 f2o7 ὁ & Κύριος τὸ Πνεῦμά ἐστιν 1 Here Paul could mean that: (1) the “Lord” mentioned in [3:16](../03/16.md) is the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of whom I speak is the Holy Spirit” (2) believers encounter God the **Lord** as the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord is experienced as the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Lord** is “spiritual.” Alternate translation: “the Lord is a spirit” +3:17 sp81 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὗ & τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου, ἐλευθερία 1 Here Paul speaks of the **Spirit** being in a place, and so **freedom** also is in that place. Here he speaks in this way to connect the **Spirit** and **freedom**. He means that whoever has the **Spirit** also has **freedom**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whoever has the Spirit of the Lord also has freedom” or “the Spirit of the Lord gives freedom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:17 b016 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ Πνεῦμα Κυρίου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Spirit** as belonging to or part of the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit, who is the Lord, is” or “the Spirit, who belongs to the Lord, is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +3:17 uoss rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλευθερία 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **freedom**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “free.” Alternate translation: “people are free” or “you are free” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:17 ao12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐλευθερία 1 Here Paul does not give any details about from or for what people experience **freedom**. If possible, you also should not make these ideas explicit. However, if you must express more information about the **freedom**, it could be **freedom** (1) from the veil. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the veil” (2) from the condemnation of the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from condemnation” (3) from the old covenant and its law. Alternate translation: “there is freedom from the old covenant” (4) to preach the gospel. Alternate translation: “there is freedom to proclaim the good news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:18 r6rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous section. In this case, Paul is concluding his discussion about Moses and the veil in [3:12–17](../03/12.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In the end,” or “Finally,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +3:18 l3xw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνακεκαλυμμένῳ προσώπῳ, τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου κατοπτριζόμενοι 1 Here the author speaks as if believers do not have a veil over their faces and can thus reflect God’s **glory**. Since the veiling language is an important part of what Paul is saying, you should preserve the figure of speech or express the idea by using a simile. Paul is indicating a contrast that could be: (1) with Moses, who had to veil the glory on his face. Unlike him, believers do not need to veil their faces. Alternate translation: “revealing the glory of the Lord like those who have unveiled faces” (2) the Israelites, who could not look directly at the glory of God. Unlike them, believers can see God’s glory directly without a veil. Alternate translation: “seeing the glory of the Lord, unlike those who could only see a veil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +3:18 ui8y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατοπτριζόμενοι 1 Here, the word translated **reflecting** could refer to: (1) acting as a mirror that “reflects” an image. Alternate translation: “mirroring” (2) seeing something that is “reflected” in a mirror. Alternate translation: “seeing in a mirror” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:18 mdu9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν δόξαν Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “how great the Lord is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:18 brpu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Κυρίου 1 Here, just as in [3:16–17](../03/16.md), the word **Lord** could refer to God generally or to Jesus specifically. Express the idea the same way you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “of God the Lord” or “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:18 rc9x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεταμορφούμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “are those whom God is transforming into” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +3:18 cq3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα 1 Here, the phrase **the same image** refers to the **image** that belongs to the **Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “into his image” or “into that image” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:18 g0ku rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα & ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **image** and **glory**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” and an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “people who reflect the Lord from what is glorious to what is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +3:18 bx5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 Here Paul uses the words **from** and **to** with the same word, much as he did in [2:16](../02/16.md). He could be using this form because: (1) **from** indicates the source of the transformation, and **to** indicates the effects of the transformation. Alternate translation: “by someone who has glory so that we also have glory” (2) **from** and **to** together emphasize that the transformation is characterized completely by **glory**. Alternate translation: “with great glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +3:18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ 1 Here, the phrase **just as from** indicates the source of the transformation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and this is from” or “even as it is accomplished by” +3:18 wlp1 Κυρίου, Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul could be using this phrase to: (1) identify the **Lord** as the **Spirit**, as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Just as in that verse, he could mean that the **Lord** is the **Spirit**, or he could mean that the **Lord** is experienced as the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord, that is, the Spirit” or “the Lord, whom we experience as the Spirit” (2) name the Holy Spirit as “the Spirit of the Lord,” as he did in [3:17](../03/17.md). Alternate translation: “the Spirit of the Lord” (3) refer to the **Lord** to whom the **Spirit** belongs or who sends the **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “the Lord of the Spirit” +3:18 mmdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Πνεύματος 1 Here, the word **Spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Spirit” (2) what is “spiritual” as opposed to what is written or fleshly. Alternate translation: “who is spiritual” or “who is a spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Ministry of Moses and ministry of Paul (3:7–4:6)\n * Suffering and ministry (4:7–18)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Life and death\n\nIn [4:7–14](../04/07.md), Paul refers to life, death, and resurrection. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience death or dying, he is referring to how they suffer and experience things related to death. When he refers to how he and his fellow workers experience life or being raised, he is most likely referring to how God will resurrect them. He could also be referring to how God delivers them from death when they suffer or are persecuted. Consider what forms you could use to refer to experiences related to death and resurrection. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Light and darkness\n\nIn [4:3–6](../04/03.md), Paul describes a lack of understanding and belief in the gospel as veiling, blinding, and darkness. He describes understanding and belief in the gospel as shining and light. These figures of speech compare believing and understanding to seeing. If possible, preserve these figures of speech, but you could express the ideas in plain language if necessary. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])\n\n### “Outer” and “inner” man\n\nIn [4:16](../04/16.md), Paul refers to two different parts of himself and his fellow workers: their inner man and their outer man. The “inner” and the “outer” are probably not directly related to the spiritual and physical parts of people. Rather, the inner is connected to what is not seen, and the outer is connected to what is seen (see [4:18](../04/18.md)). Consider what form you can use to refer to the parts of a person that people can observe and the parts of a person that they cannot observe. Make sure that your translation does not simply distinguish between the skin and what is under the skin. It is more important to use words that suggest that what people observe is not always what is really true about a person.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses these words, he does not include the Corinthians unless a note specifies otherwise. He could be referring to: (1) himself and those who preach the gospel with him. (2) just himself. It is recommended that you follow the first option, but both are possible. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The contrasts in [4:8–12](../04/08.md).\n\nIn these verses, Paul contrasts bad things that happen to him and those with him with good things that happen to them. Paul wrote these verses as one long sentence with short clauses because this was a powerful form in his culture. Consider using a form that is powerful in your culture. The UST expresses the idea with many short sentences because this is one kind of powerful form in English. +4:1 lyi4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion based on what Paul has said, particularly what he said in [3:4–18](../03/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “So then” or “Because of that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:1 ln4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers **do not become discouraged**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:1 h1ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 Here, this phrase could indicate: (1) the way that Paul and his fellow workers received the **ministry**. Alternate translation: “which we received by God’s mercy” (2) what led to Paul and his fellow workers receiving the ministry, which was their conversions. Alternate translation: “which we received after God had mercy on us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:1 que0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἠλεήθημεν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **mercy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “merciful” or an adverb such as “mercifully.” Alternate translation: “God acted mercifully toward us” or “God was merciful to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:1 ix7n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 Here, the word **discouraged** could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:2 yp4g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the word **Instead** introduces a contrast with “becoming discouraged” in the previous verse ([4:1](../04/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “Instead of that” or “On the other hand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +4:2 z4c2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης 1 Here, the phrase **shameful hidden things** could refer to: (1) things that people “hide” because they are **shameful**. Alternate translation: “the shameful things that people hide” (2) things that are both **hidden** and **shameful**. Alternate translation: “anything that is shameful and hidden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:2 ey75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ περιπατοῦντες 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if people were **walking in** something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not acting” or “not behaving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:2 vvzc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πανουργίᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **craftiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “crafty” or an adverb such as “craftily.” Alternate translation: “craftily” or “in a crafty way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:2 gcqm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the word that comes from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:2 gp3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the words” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +4:2 mrri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **manifestation** that reveals **the truth**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by revealing the truth” or “by making the truth known” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:2 e7y7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ φανερώσει τῆς ἀληθείας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **manifestation** and **truth**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “reveal” and an adjective such as “true.” Alternate translation: “by revealing what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:2 aj24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the word **man’s** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person’s” or “to man’s and woman’s” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +4:2 f6n1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul refers to being **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies or bears witness to Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “with God testifying about us” (2) people can recognize that Paul preaches the gospel only when they are **before God** or in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “that is in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:3 lu2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a development from what Paul said in the previous verse ([4:2](../04/02.md)). In this verse, he explains that, although they reveal “the truth,” it may be **veiled** to some people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of development. Alternate translation: “Now” or “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +4:3 m82q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & καὶ 1 Here Paul could be using **even if** to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. Alternate translation: “even though” (2) something that he thinks might be true. Alternate translation: “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +4:3 mti5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 Here Paul again uses the language of “veiling,” just as he did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). A **gospel** that **is veiled** is one that people do not understand or believe in. If possible, express the idea the same way you did in [3:12–18](../03/12.md). Alternate translation: “it is as though a veil hides our gospel, this happens to the ones perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:3 hz2f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰ & ἔστιν κεκαλυμμένον τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν, ἐν & ἐστὶν κεκαλυμμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If possible, avoid stating who does the veiling and instead refer to how a veil hides the **gospel**. Alternate translation: “if a veil covers our gospel, this happens for” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:3 e5yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῖς ἀπολλυμένοις 1 Christians disagree over whether God causes people to perish or whether people cause themselves to perish. The word that Paul uses here intentionally does not include the person who causes the perishing. If possible, your translation also should avoid stating who causes the perishing. See how you translated the similar phrase in [2:15](../02/15.md). Alternate translation: “the ones on the path to destruction” or “the ones who are not being saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +4:4 m71d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here, the phrase **the god of this age** refers to Satan, or the devil. Paul describes him in this way because God has allowed Satan to have some control or power in **this age**, which refers to the world as it is right now. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the god of this age, Satan,” or “the devil, who rules over this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:4 ptb6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ θεὸς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **god** who rules over or controls **this age**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the god who controls this age” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:4 r6pz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐτύφλωσεν τὰ νοήματα τῶν ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ μὴ αὐγάσαι τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **minds** were eyes that could be **blinded** or that could see **light**. If **minds** are **blinded**, they cannot understand something. If **minds** can see **light**, they can understand something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “has made the minds of the unbelievers to be like blind eyes, so that they do not understand the gospel of the glory of Christ, who is the image of God.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:4 squ9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀπίστων, εἰς τὸ 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, with the result that” (2) the purpose of **the god of this age** blinding people’s minds. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers, in order that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:4 j1vz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φωτισμὸν τοῦ εὐαγγελίου τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the author uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the **light** either is or comes from the **gospel**, and the **gospel** is about the **glory of Christ**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **Christ** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the light, which is the gospel about the glorious Christ” or “the light that comes from the gospel concerning how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:4 hj21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δόξης τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of the great Christ” or “Christ, the glorious one,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:4 fmaq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὅς ἐστιν εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **image**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reflect” or “represent.” Alternate translation: “who reflects God” or “who represents God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:4 tx9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰκὼν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe how **Christ** functions as the **image** that shows what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the image that shows what God is like” or “the image that reflects God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:5 nvg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about “the gospel of the glory of Christ” in [4:4](../04/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +4:5 ddw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον, ἑαυτοὺς δὲ δούλους ὑμῶν 1 These two clauses leave out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but we proclaim the Lord Christ Jesus, and we proclaim ourselves as your servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +4:5 xvs8 Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν Κύριον 1 Here, the phrase **Lord Christ Jesus** could: (1) give a title or name for Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who is Christ Jesus” (2) state that **Christ Jesus** is the **Lord**. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus as Lord” +4:5 t8du rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here Paul could be indicating that he and his fellow workers are **servants** because of: (1) who Jesus is. Alternate translation: “because of who Jesus is” (2) what Jesus has done. Alternate translation: “because of what Jesus has done” (3) what Jesus wants Paul and his fellow workers to do. Alternate translation: “because that is what Jesus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:6 nbpt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not proclaim themselves but. rather, Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:6 fy6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations ὁ Θεὸς ὁ εἰπών 1 Here Paul introduces something that God **said**. The quotation is not directly from the Old Testament. Rather Paul is probably paraphrasing [Genesis 1:3](../gen/01/03.md), and he may also be referring to [Isaiah 9:2](../isa/09/02.md). Introduce the quotation as something that God said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote that refers to the passages that Paul may be paraphrasing. Alternate translation: “God is the one who declared” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +4:6 rw5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations εἰπών, ἐκ σκότους φῶς λάμψει 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “who said that from darkness a light will shine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +4:6 mukf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ σκότους 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **darkness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “In a dark place” or “From what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:6 d5x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔλαμψεν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν, πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως 1 Here Paul continues the “light” metaphor from [4:4](../04/04.md). When God **shined** in their **hearts**, that means that he caused them to understand. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “who caused us to understand, just as if he had illuminated our hearts, the knowledge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:6 bj1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 In the Paul’s culture, **hearts** are considered to be the places where humans think and plan. What Paul means is that God has **shined** on their thoughts or on what they think. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in our minds” or “in our thoughts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +4:6 m6rf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Paul is focusing on himself and those with him, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us who preach the gospel” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “the hearts of us, who believe,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +4:6 fkq3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form multiple times. What he means is that the **illumination** either is or comes from the **knowledge**, and the **knowledge** is about the **glory of God**. In this last phrase, **glory** describes what **God** is like. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in a more natural form. See how you translated the similar construction in [4:4](../04/04.md). Alternate translation: “the illumination, which is the knowledge about the glorious God” or “the illumination that comes from the knowledge concerning how glorious God is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:6 mpg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς φωτισμὸν τῆς γνώσεως τῆς δόξης τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **illumination**, **knowledge**, and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “illumine” and “know” and an adjective such as “great” or “glorious.” Alternate translation: “to illumine us so that we can know the great God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:6 p736 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν προσώπῳ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the **glory** that is **in {face} of Jesus Christ** contrasts with the glory that faded on Moses’ face (see [3:7](../03/07.md)). What Paul means is that Jesus reveals or shows what God is like, particularly how glorious he is. If possible, use words that remind your readers of what Paul said about Moses in [3:7](../03/07.md). If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “that Jesus Christ reveals as if it shined on his face” or “that Jesus Christ shows to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:7 xe5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** contrasts the “glory of God” from the previous verse with how Paul and his fellow workers are **clay jars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +4:7 xx2c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔχομεν & τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον ἐν ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν 1 Here Paul speaks of the knowledge about God’s glory as if it were a **treasure**, that is, something that is very valuable. He speaks of himself and those who proclaim the gospel as if they were **clay jars**, which are not valuable and can break easily. He speaks in this way to contrast how valuable and long-lasting the gospel is (**the treasure**) with how worthless and weak he and those who preach the gospel with him are in comparison (**clay jars**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could explain the figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we have these riches in disposable containers” or “we have this valuable gospel as weak and worthless people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:7 yzd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὸν θησαυρὸν τοῦτον 1 Here, the word **this** identifies the **treasure** as “the knowledge of the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ” (see [4:6](../04/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what **this** refers to. Alternate translation: “the treasure of the knowledge of the glory of God” or “that treasure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +4:7 nz0r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὀστρακίνοις σκεύεσιν 1 Here, the word **jars** refers to any type of container that is meant to hold something else. The word **clay** refers to dirt or mud, which was used to make inexpensive and fragile containers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to containers made out of cheap and weak material. Alternate translation: “inexpensive containers” or “fragile and cheap vessels” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +4:7 i1rs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to characterize the **power** as something with **surpassing greatness**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the surpassing greatness that characterizes the power” or “the surpassingly great power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:7 u16o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ὑπερβολὴ τῆς δυνάμεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **greatness** and **power**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives such as “great” and “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how surpassingly great and powerful these things are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:8 ga9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι; ἀπορούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use indefinite subjects. Alternate translation: “in every side someone pressing us in, but not crushing us; feeling perplexed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:8 wqg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν παντὶ θλιβόμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **in every {side}** could go with: (1) all the statements in this verse and the following verse. Alternate translation: “in every situation experiencing these things: being pressed in” (2) just the first statement about **being pressed in, but not being crushed**. Alternate translation: “being pressed in on every side” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +4:8 vhjn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ 1 Here, the word **every** indicates that what Paul is about to describe happens often or in many situations. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in every situation” or “at many times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:8 fi9c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θλιβόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were physically being **pressed in** by other people but not **being crushed** by them. He speaks in this way to indicate that other people are making his life difficult or trying to hurt him, but they are not fully succeeding. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being pushed, but not being knocked over” or “being mistreated, but not being harmed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:9 bz8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διωκόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐνκαταλειπόμενοι; καταβαλλόμενοι, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἀπολλύμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, you could use indefinite subjects for **persecuted** and **thrown down**, or you could indicate that God is the one who does not “forsake.” Alternate translation: “someone persecuting us, but God not forsaking us; someone throwing us down, but we not perishing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:9 uvq1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταβαλλόμενοι 1 Here, Paul speaks as if people physically push him and his fellow workers so that they fall down. By speaking in this way, he is referring to any time people act against or bully him and his fellow workers, which may or may not be physical. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “being bullied” or “being attacked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:10 zt4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι περιφέροντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the dying of Jesus** were an object that he and his fellow workers could carry around. He could speak in this way to indicate that: (1) he experiences suffering and pain that are like the **dying of Jesus**. Alternate translation: “experiencing in the body dying that is like the dying of Jesus” (2) he and his fellow workers proclaim the **dying of Jesus** both by what they say and what they do (**in the body**). Alternate translation: “proclaiming in the body the dying of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:10 ethc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τῷ σώματι & τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **body** is a singular noun that refers to the bodies of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use a plural form. Alternate translation: “the bodies … our bodies” or “each of our bodies … each of our bodies” +4:10 rnup rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν νέκρωσιν τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **dying** that **Jesus** experienced. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the death that Jesus experienced” or “how Jesus died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:10 l6f6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 Here, the revelation of **the life of Jesus** in **our body** could mean that: (1) the **life** that Jesus has will become the life that they too have. In other words, like Jesus resurrected, they too will resurrect. Alternate translation: “we too might experience in our body the new life that Jesus has” (2) they reveal the fact that Jesus is alive. In other words, by **carrying around** Jesus’ death, they also reveal his resurrection. Alternate translation: “we might reveal in our body the resurrection of Jesus” (3) they are delivered from the sufferings that they experience so that they have **life** from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “we might experience life from Jesus when we are delivered from suffering in our body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:10 w3jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἐν τῷ σώματι ἡμῶν φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal in our body the life of Jesus also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:10 k10l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **life** that could: (1) belong to **Jesus**. In other words, it is his resurrection life. Alternate translation: “the life that Jesus has” (2) come from **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “life from Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:10 j23j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:11 vivg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a clarification of what Paul said in [4:10](../04/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a clarification. Alternate translation: “in fact,” or “in other words,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +4:11 l1xk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God is always handing us, being alive, over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:11 ggb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἀεὶ & ἡμεῖς, οἱ ζῶντες & παραδιδόμεθα 1 Here, the phrase **being alive** identifies the situation in which the rest of Paul’s statement is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “we, during the time in which we are alive, are always being handed over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +4:11 ht74 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀεὶ & εἰς θάνατον παραδιδόμεθα 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were objects that someone could hand over to **death**. He means that they are under the power of **death** or are experiencing things related to death, like suffering and hardship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are always experiencing what relates to death” or “are always under death’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:11 admc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς θάνατον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “so that we might die” or “to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:11 wt5i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ Ἰησοῦν 1 Here, the phrase **for the sake of Jesus** could indicate that Paul and his fellow workers **are always being handed over to death**: (1) to serve **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “in order to serve Jesus” (2) because of **Jesus**, particularly because they preach about him. Alternate translation: “because of Jesus” or “because we proclaim Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:11 d1wm ἵνα καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ ἐν τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul uses words and ideas that are very similar to what he used in the second part of [4:10](../04/10.md). You should express the idea much as you did in that verse. +4:11 ww5r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ φανερωθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God might reveal also the life of Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:11 r513 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ζωὴ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live.” Alternate translation: “how Jesus lives” or “the fact that Jesus lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:11 kucp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ θνητῇ σαρκὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **mortal flesh** refers to people who will die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that describes people as those who will die. Alternate translation: “in us who will die” or “our mortal bodies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +4:12 dc7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the phrase **So then** introduces a conclusion that is based on [4:7–11](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the conclusion to a section. Alternate translation: “Therefore” or “In the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:12 q3il rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks of **death** and **life** as if they were persons who could “work.” He means that he and those will experience things related to **death**, while the Corinthians experience things related to **life**. Alternate translation: “we experience death, but you experience life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +4:12 r5se rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ θάνατος ἐν ἡμῖν ἐνεργεῖται, ἡ δὲ ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **death** and **life**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “die” and “live.” Alternate translation: “we are dying, but you are living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:12 n7or rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δὲ 1 Here Paul may be: (1) simply contrasting **death** and **life**. Alternate translation: “but on the other hand,” (2) indicating that the **death** in them leads to the **life in you**. Alternate translation: “but so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:12 tvne rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἡ & ζωὴ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “life works in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +4:12 albz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ & ζωὴ 1 Here, the word **life** could refer: (1) specifically to resurrection life, which the Corinthians will receive. Alternate translation: “eternal life” (2) generally to being alive and not experiencing suffering or dangerous things. Alternate translation: “the experience of life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:13 jqmm rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** could introduce: (1) a development or new idea. Alternate translation: “Further,” (2) a contrast with the “death” that works in them. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +4:13 cckc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason or cause for why **we also believe** and **speak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “because we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:13 ret6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here Paul uses the possessive to refer to a **spirit** that could: (1) be characterized by **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same believing spirit” (2) give or cause **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same spirit that gives faith” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:13 wrr3 τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα 1 Here, the word **spirit** could refer to: (1) a human spirit or attitude, which is characterized by faith. Alternate translation: “the same attitude” (2) the Holy Spirit, who gives **faith**. Alternate translation: “the same Holy Spirit” +4:13 ery0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ πνεῦμα τῆς πίστεως 1 Here, the word **same** could indicate that: (1) this is the **same spirit** that the person who wrote the quotation had. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that the psalmist had,” (2) this is the **same spirit** that the Corinthians also have. Alternate translation: “the same spirit of the faith that you have,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:13 qma7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “believe” or “trust.” Alternate translation: “that believes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:13 gzf4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ γεγραμμένον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could express it so that the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “what the psalmist wrote” or “to what the psalm says” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:13 il5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations κατὰ τὸ γεγραμμένον 1 In Paul’s culture, **according to {what} has been written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 116:10](../psa/116/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from Psalms. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “as it says in the book of Psalms,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +4:14 sfxb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for what Paul said that he and his fellow workers do (see [4:13](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:14 ruov rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ ἐγείρας 1 Here, the word **one** refers to God the Father, who **raised Jesus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “God who raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +4:14 t2i8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ ἐγείρας τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἡμᾶς & ἐγερεῖ 1 Paul uses the words **raised** and **raise** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “the one having restored Jesus to life will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +4:14 zd0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺν Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **with Jesus** could indicate that the Paul and his fellow workers will: (1) be where **Jesus** is. Alternate translation: “to be where Jesus is” (2) be resurrected as **Jesus** was. Alternate translation: “as he raised Jesus” (3) be joined with **Jesus**. Alternate translation: “together with Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:15 w37z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul has said in [4:7–14](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +4:15 v7sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** refers to everything that Paul and his fellow workers do and experience as they preach the gospel, including their sufferings (see [4:7–12](../04/07.md)) and the message that they preach (see [4:13–14](../04/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “everything I have described is for your sake” or “everything I have referred to is for your sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:15 wl88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ χάρις 1 Here Paul implies that the **grace** comes from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “grace from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:15 lg1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gracious.” Alternate translation: “how God is gracious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:15 xdxk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῶν πλειόνων 1 Here, the phrase **through more and more** could indicate that: (1) the **grace** increases by being received by **more** people. Alternate translation: “among more and more people” (2) the **grace** increases because God uses **more** situations and experiences to spread the gospel. Alternate translation: “by means of more and more service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:15 u8pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν εὐχαριστίαν περισσεύσῃ εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **thanksgiving** and **glory**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “thank” and “glorify.” Alternate translation: “may cause people to abound in thanking God to glorify him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:15 zt5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession εἰς τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **glory** that **God** receives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to glory for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:16 u6e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ 1 Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has said, probably focusing on what he said in [4:7–15](../04/07.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion from a previous section. Alternate translation: “So then,” or “Because of all that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:16 p7pv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἐνκακοῦμεν 1 See you how translated the word **discouraged** in [4:1](../04/01.md). It could refer to: (1) losing motivation and confidence. Alternate translation: “we do not lose hope” (2) becoming tired or exhausted. Alternate translation: “we do not become tired” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:16 cb92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 1 Here Paul is speaking as if **our outer man is decaying** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by indicating that **our outer man** is indeed **decaying**. Alternate translation: “despite the fact that” or “although” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +4:16 hhv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔξω ἡμῶν ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, the phrase **outer man** refers to the part of the person that others can observe and see. It includes the physical part of the person, but it is not only a person’s body. Alternate translation: “our observable self” or “our external part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:16 pnms rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωπος & ἔσω 1 Although the word **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “person … inner person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +4:16 jcra rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἄνθρωπος διαφθείρεται & ἔσω & ἀνακαινοῦται 1 Here the author is speaking of **outer** and **inner** men in general, not of one particular **man**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to men or people in general. Alternate translation: “men are decaying … inner men are being renewed” or “persons are decaying … outer persons are being renewed”\n +4:16 vliu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διαφθείρεται 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **outer man** were a dead thing that was **decaying**. He speaks in this way to indicate that the **outer man** is in the process of dying or passing away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is dying” or “is passing away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:16 s9b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **inner {man}** could refer to: (1) the part of the person that others cannot observe and see. Alternate translation: “our hidden part” or “our inward part” (2) the spiritual part of the person. Alternate translation: “our heart” or “our spiritual part” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:16 zct5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ ἔσω ἡμῶν ἀνακαινοῦται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that God does it. Alternate translation: “God is renewing our inner man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:17 no4a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and his fellow workers do not become discouraged (see [4:16](../04/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We do not become discouraged because” or “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:17 e4s0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ & παραυτίκα ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affliction**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “afflict” or “suffer.” Alternate translation: “how we are afflicted in light and momentary ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:17 pd63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐλαφρὸν τῆς θλίψεως & αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης 1 Here Paul describes **affliction** and **glory** as if they were objects that could be **light** or have **weight**. He speaks in this way to indicate how unimportant or insignificant the **affliction** is compared with how important or significant the **glory** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “small affliction … an eternal, great glory” or “insignificant affliction … an eternal, significant glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:17 jzhi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατεργάζεται ἡμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **affliction** were a process that was **producing** the **glory**. He means that the **affliction** leads to **glory** for **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “is leading us to” or “is enabling us to gain” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +4:17 qv6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession αἰώνιον βάρος δόξης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **an eternal weight** that is made up of **glory**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an eternal weight that is glory” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +4:17 xg92 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “glorious” or “great.” Alternate translation: “of what is great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +4:17 na9y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν 1 Here, the phrase **far beyond all comparison** identifies something that is much greater than anything else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that identifies something that is greatest or most amazing. Alternate translation: “that is greater than anything” or “that is the greatest of all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:18 thyv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result μὴ σκοπούντων ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **We are not watching** could introduce: (1) a result or inference from what Paul said about “affliction” and “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “Therefore, we are not watching” (2) what Paul does while he experiences the “affliction” he mentions in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true while we are not watching” (3) the reason why the “affliction” leads to “glory” in [4:17](../04/17.md). Alternate translation: “That is true because we are not watching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:18 fp4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ σκοπούντων 1 Here, the word **watching** refers specifically to focusing on something or paying close attention to something. It does not require the attention or focus to be visual. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to non-visual focus or attention. Alternate translation: “are not focusing on” or “are not concentrating on” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +4:18 t2fp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ βλεπόμενα, ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “the things that people see, but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +4:18 f97x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we are watching the things not being seen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +4:18 hbrg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why **We** are **watching** the things that are not seen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “We do that because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +4:18 kx7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ γὰρ βλεπόμενα & τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could refer to “we” or to people in general. Alternate translation: “For the things that people see … but the things that people do not see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Confidence in the resurrection (5:1–10)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Resurrection bodies\n\nIn [5:1–5](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about new bodies that believers will receive when Jesus comes back. Right now, he and his fellow workers groan while they have their current bodies. That is because these bodies are weak and will eventually die. However, Paul and his fellow workers do not want to just get rid of their bodies. Rather, they are looking forward expectantly to receiving new bodies that will not die. Paul expresses these ideas by using building and clothing language. See the sections below that address how this language functions. Make sure that your translation clearly contrasts old bodies with new bodies and does not suggest that Paul just wants to get rid of his body.\n\n### The intermediate state?\n\nIn [5:6–9](../05/06.md), Paul speaks about being away from the body and with the Lord. As the previous section has illustrated, Paul’s goal is to have a new body, not to be “away from the body.” So, what is he referring to here? There are three primary options. First, many Christians believe that Paul is talking about the time period between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back. During this time period, the believer does not have a body but is with Jesus in heaven. Then, when Jesus comes back, the believer receives a new body. Second, some Christians believe that Paul is talking about how believers receive new bodies immediately after they die. In other words, the next thing that a believer experiences after he or she dies is Jesus’ return. In this case, there is no time period between death and resurrection. Third, some Christians believe that Paul is speaking about how believers receive a temporary body for the time they are in heaven with Jesus before he comes back. If possible, your translation should allow for all three of these interpretations. Make sure that you include at least option one, since this is the option that most Christians believe.\n\n### New creation\n\nIn [5:17](../05/17.md), Paul speaks about how being “in Christ” leads to “new creation,” with “old things” passing away and “new things” coming. Paul uses very general language, and the “new creation” could identify the person who is “in Christ” or everything that God is making “new.” If it is about people primarily, Paul’s point is that they are made “new” when they are in Christ. If it is about the world in general, Paul’s point is that God makes the world “new” in Christ, and people experience this “new creation” when they too are in Christ. Since Paul’s language is so general, it is best to express the idea in such a way that both of these interpretations are possible. If you must choose one, most interpreters think that Paul is focusing on people here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/creation]])\n\n### Reconciliation\n\nIn [5:18–20](../05/18.md), Paul speaks about how God reconciles people to himself and gives the ministry of reconciliation to Paul and his fellow workers. The word “reconcile” refers to how someone restores a relationship with someone else so that they can be together again. In other words, when someone does something that breaks or hurts a relationship, “reconciliation” heals the broken relationship. Consider how you might naturally express this idea in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Bodies as homes\n\nIn [5:1–9](../05/01.md), Paul speaks about bodies as if they were homes. He identifies current earthly bodies as “tents,” which indicates that they do not last. He identifies resurrection bodies as “buildings” that God makes. Paul uses the language of “home” to indicate that people belong in bodies and not without bodies. However, he does seem to think that people can be without bodies for a period of time, just as people can leave their homes for a period of time (see the above discussion of the “intermediate state”). Further, he contrasts “tent” homes with “building” homes to indicate that the “building” is the home (that is, body) that will last forever and which believers should long for. If possible, preserve the “home” language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/house]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/tent]])\n\n### Bodies as clothing\n\nIn [5:2–4](../05/02.md), Paul mixes “clothing” language in with his “home” language. The clothes are bodies, and Paul again uses this language to indicate that people belong in bodies (clothed), not without bodies (naked or unclothed). He does not use clothing language to show that bodies are an unimportant part of who people are. If possible, preserve the clothing language in your translation, either in metaphor or simile form. However, if how Paul mixes together home and clothing language would be confusing, you may need to use only the home language and express the clothing language plainly or as home language. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/clothed]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). However, he does not necessarily mean that what he says is not true of the Corinthians or of believers in general. Consider how you can communicate the focus on Paul and his fellow workers without totally excluding the Corinthians. In every case where Paul may be using the first person plural in a way different than this, a note will explain the options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Singular nouns in general statements\n\nIn [5:1–10](../05/01.md), Paul consistently refers to “body,” “building,” “tent,” and “home” in singular form. He does this because the singular form was a natural way to refer to these things in general. Throughout this section, the UST models how to express the ideas in plural form, since this is more natural for general statements in English. Consider how your language might naturally express a general statement about “bodies.”\n\n### Translating [5:21](../05/21.md)\n\nPaul speaks in a very compressed way in this verse, and Christians disagree about what exactly he means. What is relatively clear is that Paul has in mind what some people call an “exchange” between Christ and believers. Christ, who is “righteous,” is somehow identified with “sin,” and believers, who are “sinners,” are somehow identified with “righteousness.” The “in him” at the end of the verse indicates that this interchange occurs in union with Christ. For details about what it could mean for Christ to be “made sin” and for believers to “become the righteousness of God,” see the notes on this verse. If possible, however, your translation should be as general as Paul’s sentence. This means that you should express the general idea of “exchange” and allow for many of the possible interpretations listed in the notes. +5:1 p7b7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) an explanation of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “In fact,” (2) an example or illustration of what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “For example,” (3) a basis for what Paul said in [4:18](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “That is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:1 v03z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive οἴδαμεν & ἡμῶν & ἔχομεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. See the chapter introduction for more information on how to translate these words. Here, the words **we** and **our** could refer to: (1) just Paul and his fellow workers. Paul is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, but he does not mean to exclude the Corinthians entirely. Alternate translation: “we who preach the gospel … our … we have” (2) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us know … our … we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +5:1 la71 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν 1 Here, the word **if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul thinks will definitely happen, but he is not sure when. Alternate translation: “whenever” (2) something that Paul thinks might happen. Alternate translation: “even if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +5:1 z4vs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν, οἰκίαν ἀχειροποίητον αἰώνιον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Here Paul speaks as if a person’s body were a **house**, **tent**, or **building** in which that the person lives. This was a common way to refer to a person’s body in Paul’s culture. He identifies the current body as a **tent** that is **torn down**, because this body will die. He describes the body that a person will have when God resurrects them as a **building from God** and an **eternal house** that is **not made with hands**. This is an important metaphor in [5:1–9](../05/01.md), so preserve the **house**, **tent**, and **building** language if possible. If it would be helpful, you could use a simile or identify the **house** in another natural way. Alternate translation: “our earthly house of this tent, that is, our mortal body, is torn down, we have a building from God, that is, our resurrection body, an eternal house in the heavens, not made with hands” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:1 zy2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone tears down our earthly house of this tent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:1 bvz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους 1 Here, Paul uses the possessive form identify the **earthly house** as a **tent**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “our earthly house, which is a tent,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:1 gz3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν & οἰκίαν & αἰώνιον 1 Here and throughout [5:1–8](../05/01.md), Paul uses the singular form to refer to “bodies” in general, sometimes described as buildings or clothing. See the chapter introduction for more information. Consider what would be natural in your language and use that form throughout these verses. Alternate translation: “our earthly houses of these tents are torn down … buildings … eternal houses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +5:1 xifl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here Paul refers to how the **eternal house** can be found **in the heavens**. Since Paul does not include details about the heavens, translate **heavens** with a word or phrase that refers to all of heavenly space, including the idea of multiple heavens if possible. Alternate translation: “in the heavenly realm” or “in the heavenly spaces” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:1 bqi5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἀχειροποίητον 1 Here, the word **hands** refers to the main part of the body that we use to make things. So, the phrase refers to the whole person who makes things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that **hands** refers to “humans” in general, not just their hands. Alternate translation: “not made by humans” or “not made by people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +5:1 bbvr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀχειροποίητον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “which hands did not make” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:2 mt4s rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous verse (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:2 tc2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν τούτῳ 1 Here, the phrase **in this** could refer to: (1) the earthly house that is a tent, that is, the person’s current body. Alternate translation: “in this tent” or “in our bodies on earth” (2) the current time period. Alternate translation: “right now” or “in this time” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:2 yg6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐν τούτῳ στενάζομεν, τὸ οἰκητήριον ἡμῶν τὸ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἐπενδύσασθαι ἐπιποθοῦντες 1 Here Paul continues to refer to mortal bodies and resurrection bodies as “houses” or “dwellings.” You should express the idea as you did in [5:1](../05/01.md). Paul also begins to refer to receiving new, resurrection bodies as if they were pieces of clothing that people could put on. This also is an important figure of speech for the following verses, so preserve the language if possible. If it is necessary, you could use a simile or express the idea in another natural way that fits with the “building” language. Alternate translation: “in this house, that is, our mortal body, we groan, longing to completely live in our dwelling that is from heaven, that is, our resurrection body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:2 ss6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who will do the action, Paul implies that “God” will do it. Alternate translation: “for God to fully clothe us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:3 bjau rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι, οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα 1 Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as if they were clothing. You should express the idea as you did in [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “we have a house to live in, we will not be found homeless” or “having a new body that is like clothing, we will not be found naked, that is, without a body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:3 da0z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ γε & ἐνδυσάμενοι 1 Here Paul is speaking as if **having clothed ourselves** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it will actually be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when” or “whenever.” Alternate translation: “when indeed we have clothed ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +5:3 i4es ἐνδυσάμενοι 1 Here Paul could mean that: (1) **we** clothe **ourselves**. Alternate translation: “we clothe ourselves” (2) God clothes “us.” Alternate translation: “God clothes us” +5:3 ap7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & εὑρεθησόμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **naked** rather than on who “finds” them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **found**. Alternate translation: “we will not be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:4 zvz8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For indeed** indicates that Paul is adding more information (**indeed**) that supports what he said in the previous two verses (**For**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that introduce added information that supports a previous statement. Alternate translation: “Further” or “And in fact” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:4 bz6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῷ σκήνει & οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 Here Paul continues to speak of bodies as buildings and clothing. You should express the ideas as you did in [5:1–3](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “the ones being in this tent, that is, our mortal body … we do not want to be homeless, but to have a home” or “the ones being in this tent, that is, this body … we do not want to have no body, which is like being unclothed, but to have a resurrection body, which is like being fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:4 e34b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρούμενοι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were carrying a heavy burden. He means that something is making their lives difficult. The burden could be: (1) how the **tent**, that is, their current bodies, falls apart and dies. Alternate translation: “being distressed by it” (2) how other people’s situations make life hard for them. Alternate translation: “being troubled by many people and things” or “being oppressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:4 g9yu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive βαρούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that either the **tent** (their mortal bodies) or other people and things did it. Make sure your translation fits with how you chose to express the metaphor in the previous note. Alternate translation: “the tent burdening us” or “many people and things burdening us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:4 f8rb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ θέλομεν ἐκδύσασθαι, ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form to focus on the state of being **unclothed** or **clothed** rather than on whoever clothes or unclothes them, so you should avoid stating a subject for **unclothed** and **clothed**. Alternate translation: “we do not want to be naked, but to have clothes on” or “we do not want to have no clothing, but to wear clothing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:4 nezo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλ’ ἐπενδύσασθαι 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we want to be fully clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +5:4 n78p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τὸ θνητὸν 1 Paul is using the adjective **mortal** as a noun in order to refer to all bodies that are **mortal**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the mortal bodies” or “what is mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +5:4 e5zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταποθῇ τὸ θνητὸν ὑπὸ τῆς ζωῆς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “life may swallow up the mortal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:4 de2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καταποθῇ 1 Here Paul refers to **the mortal** as if it were food that could be **swallowed up**. This illustrates that **the mortal** has been defeated as surely as if **life** devoured it as food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may be destroyed” or “may be taken over” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:4 y0db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ζωῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **life**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “live” or an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “what is alive” or “what lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:5 x35l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:5 m2id rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατεργασάμενος ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **having prepared** could refer to how God: (1) has acted in believers’ lives to get them ready for resurrection and new life. Alternate translation: “having gotten us ready” (2) created believers when they first began to live. Alternate translation: “having created” or “having made us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:5 xr9o rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτὸ τοῦτο 1 Here, the phrase **this very thing** refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about receiving a new body in place of the one that people have now (see [5:4](../05/04.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what the phrase refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “receiving resurrection bodies” or “this new life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:5 n20x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὁ δοὺς 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +5:5 g7yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the **Spirit** as if he were a **down payment**, that is, a partial payment for a purchase with a promise to pay the rest of the amount on a future date. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [1:22](../01/22.md). Alternate translation: “a guarantee, which is the Spirit, that he will also give us eternal life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:5 kyyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν ἀρραβῶνα τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to the **down payment** as the **Spirit**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the Spirit as a down payment” or “the down payment that is the Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:6 clh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:1–6](../05/01.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:6 xjg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also knowing” (2) a reason why they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “because we know” (3) something that is true even though they are **courageous**. Alternate translation: “even though we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:6 bde4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure θαρροῦντες & πάντοτε, καὶ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου; 1 Paul never gives a main verb to go with these statements. Instead, he introduces a parenthetical statement in the following verse and then ends the sentence. At the beginning of [5:8](../05/08.md), he repeats the word that is translated **courageous** here, which indicates that he is going to resume speaking about what he started speaking about in this verse. If you can clearly indicate that Paul does not finish this sentence, you could use that form here, as the ULT does by using a dash. If your readers would find this structure confusing, you could make this verse a complete thought on its own. Alternate translation: “we are always courageous and know that being at home in the body, we are away from the Lord,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +5:6 xv3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐνδημοῦντες ἐν τῷ σώματι, ἐκδημοῦμεν ἀπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building that a person could be **at home in**. Express the idea as you did in [5:1–2](../05/01.md). Alternate translation: “living in the body, as if it were a home, we are not present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:6 ebl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ σώματι 1 Paul implies that this **body** is the one that people have before they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “in our current body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:7 w885 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces an explanation of what it means to be “away from the Lord” (see [5:6](../05/06.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of a previous statement. Alternate translation: “that means that” or “thus,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:7 rfn4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατοῦμεν 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were “walking.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “we act” or “we live our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:7 wok7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith** and **sight**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “believe” and “see.” Alternate translation: “by believing, not by seeing” or “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:7 n9el rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ πίστεως & οὐ διὰ εἴδους 1 Here, the words **faith** and **sight** could refer to: (1) the acts of “believing” or “seeing” Jesus the Messiah. Alternate translation: “by believing in Jesus, not by seeing him” (2) what is “believed” or “seen.” Alternate translation: “by what we believe, not by what we see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:8 iq0j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces again what Paul started speaking about in [5:16](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that resumes an earlier idea or thought. Alternate translation: “Again,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:8 npio rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **and** could introduce: (1) additional information. Alternate translation: “and also” (2) a contrast with how they are **confident**. Alternate translation: “but” (3) what it is that they are **confident** about. Alternate translation: “enough that we” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:8 a6au εὐδοκοῦμεν, μᾶλλον 1 Alternate translation: “would prefer” +5:8 i3m3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος καὶ ἐνδημῆσαι πρὸς τὸν Κύριον 1 Here Paul continues to refer to the **body** as if it were a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md). Alternate translation: “not to live in the body as if it were a home but to be present with the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:8 bca2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκδημῆσαι ἐκ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the word **body** refers to the body that people have before they die. The phrase **be away from the body** could refer to: (1) a temporary situation between when a believer dies and when Jesus comes back in which the believer does not have a body but is still **with the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to be without a body for now” (2) the eternal situation of believers, in which they either have no bodies or have new bodies. Alternate translation: “to be away from this body forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:9 owmc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ καὶ 1 Here, the phrase **And therefore** introduces an inference or conclusion based on what Paul has already said, particularly in [5:6–8](../05/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion based on what has been said. Alternate translation: “Because of that,” or “And so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:9 ml5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul could be referring to how people are **at home** or **away** from: (1) the Lord. Alternate translation: “whether being at home with the Lord or being away from him” (2) this body. Alternate translation: “whether being at home in this body or being away from it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:9 gadz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor εἴτε ἐνδημοῦντες εἴτε ἐκδημοῦντες 1 Here Paul continues to refer to a building in which a person could be **at home**. Express the idea as you did in [5:6](../05/06.md), [8](../05/08.md). Make sure that your translation matches or fits with what you chose in the previous note about whether Paul implies “body” or “Lord” here. Alternate translation: “whether being in the body as if it were a home or out of the body” or “whether being present or being absent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +5:9 j1sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, the word **him** refers to the Lord, that is, Jesus, whom Paul mentioned in the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit what the pronoun refers to. Alternate translation: “to the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:10 k0qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul and those with him “aspire to be well-pleasing” to Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “We aspire to that because” or “After all,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:10 awq4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 Here, the word **us** could refer to: (1) Paul and everyone who believes, including the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “all of us who believe” (2) all humans. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +5:10 uv7o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοὺς & πάντας ἡμᾶς φανερωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) we reveal ourselves. Alternate translation: “us all to reveal ourselves” or “us all to stand” (2) God reveals us. Alternate translation: “God to reveal us all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:10 kdf2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **judgment seat** refers to a raised seat that a judge or official would sit on when he or she was making official decisions. In Paul’s culture, people expected the Messiah to sit on this kind of seat when this world ends and decide whether to reward or punish people. Paul uses this idea to refer to how Jesus will judge **us all**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit or refer more directly to how **Christ** will judge. Alternate translation: “before the judgment seat that Christ will sit on when he returns” or “before Christ to be judged by him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:10 c499 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κομίσηται & τὰ διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 In this context, the phrase **receive back** refers to getting something in payment or in return for something else. Paul is speaking as if everyone **will receive back** as payment or recompense exactly what they did **through the body**. By this, Paul means that God will reward or punish everyone in a way that fits with what they did. If this figure of speech would be misunderstood in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “may receive a punishment or reward that fits what they did through the body” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:10 v8sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **each one** did it. Alternate translation: “what he or she has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:10 cr07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom διὰ τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the phrase **through the body** clarifies that **the {things done}** are what people did while they had mortal bodies and lived on this earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to what people do in their current bodies. Alternate translation: “with their earthly bodies” or “before they died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +5:10 nhwf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸς ἃ ἔπραξεν 1 Here, the phrase **with regard to what things he did** introduces what **Christ** is judging. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “on the basis of what things he did” or “being judged based on what he did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:10 izpv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἔπραξεν 1 Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she did” or “that person did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +5:10 lsh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἀγαθὸν εἴτε κακὸν 1 Here, the words **good or bad** could describe: (1) the things that people did. Alternate translation: “whether those things were good or bad” (2) both the things that people did and what they **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether good things deserving commendation or bad things deserving rebuke” (3) just what people **receive back**. Alternate translation: “whether reward or rebuke” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:11 hszo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said in [5:10](../05/10.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or inference. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:11 dzh5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδότες 1 Here, the word **knowing** introduces a reason for why Paul and those with him **persuade men**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:11 pa4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **the Lord**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to the Lord” or “the fear that we experience for the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:11 e0c9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν φόβον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fear**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “fear.” Alternate translation: “how we fear the Lord” or “what it is to fear the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:11 qm34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀνθρώπους πείθομεν 1 Here Paul could be implying that he “persuades” people: (1) to know **the fear of the Lord** as he and those with him do. Alternate translation: “we persuade men also to know the fear of the Lord” (2) to realize that he and those with him are people who know **the fear of the Lord** and are thus trustworthy. Alternate translation: “we persuade men that we are those who fear the Lord” or “we persuade men that we are trustworthy” (3) to accept the gospel. Alternate translation: “we persuade men to believe the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:11 b7dd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with how they **persuade men**. In contrast with that, they do not need to persuade God, since they are already **clearly known** by him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clear. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +5:11 v11v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive Θεῷ & πεφανερώμεθα & πεφανερῶσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God knows us clearly … that you know us clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:11 qb7z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεφανερώμεθα & ἐν ταῖς συνειδήσεσιν ὑμῶν πεφανερῶσθαι 1 Here Paul does not state what it is about them that is **clearly known**. He implies that **God** knows that Paul and his coworkers are faithful to God and preach the good news properly. Paul wants the Corinthians to recognize this also. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “we are clearly known to be faithful … to be clearly known in your consciences as faithful” or “we are clearly known to preach the truth … to be clearly known in your consciences as one preaching the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:12 r7sg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνομεν ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ ἀφορμὴν διδόντες ὑμῖν καυχήματος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν, ἵνα ἔχητε πρὸς τοὺς ἐν προσώπῳ καυχωμένους, καὶ μὴ ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the order of the elements here. Alternate translation: “We are giving you an opportunity of boasting on our behalf, so that you may have an answer for the ones boasting in appearance and not in heart. It is not that we are again commending ourselves to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +5:12 ufwe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here, the word **again** implies that Paul and those with him had already “commended themselves” at some point in the past. Most likely, this happened when they first met the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. See how you translated the similar form in [3:1](../03/01.md). Alternate translation: “once more” or “again, like we did at first,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:12 c134 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀφορμὴν & καυχήματος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe an **opportunity** that is for **boasting**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “an opportunity for boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:12 e6k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν προσώπῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “appear” or “look.” Alternate translation: “in what people look like” or “in how things appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:12 ikd5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ ἐν 1 This phrase leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “not boasting in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +5:12 it2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐν καρδίᾳ 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in who they really are” or “in mind” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +5:13 ys3l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said about boasting in the previous verse. In this verse, he indicates that he acts in certain ways **for** the Corinthians, even if he acts in other ways **for God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:13 e4mp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴτε -1 Here, the word **if** in both places introduces situations that Paul thinks have happened. He is not using **if** to introduce things he thinks might happen. If your language does not use the conditional form for things that definitely happened, you could use another form that refers to alternate situations. Alternate translation: “whenever … whenever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +5:13 cy57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐξέστημεν & σωφρονοῦμεν 1 Here Paul uses two opposite phrases. These phrases could contrast: (1) fanatical or extreme behavior with moderate or sane behavior. Alternate translation: “we are fanatical … we are moderate” (2) ecstatic or visionary behavior with rational or normal behavior. Alternate translation: “we see visions … we have control of our minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +5:13 b4ri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεῷ & ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrases **for God** and **for you** could indicate: (1) the people for whose benefit Paul is behaving in these ways. Alternate translation: “it is for God’s sake … it is for your sake” (2) the people to whom he directs his behavior. Alternate translation: “it is in our relationship with God … it is in our relationship with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:14 a5w7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul acts in the ways that he does (see [5:13](../05/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “We do those things because” or “We act in those ways because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:14 azi9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **love** that could be: (1) **love** that **Christ** has for Paul and those with him. Alternate translation: “the love Christ has for us” (2) **love** that Paul and those with him have for **Christ**. Alternate translation: “the love we have for Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:14 gjmd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & ἀγάπη τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **love**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “love.” Make sure that your translation fits with the option you chose in the previous note about whose **love** this is. Alternate translation: “how Christ loves us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:14 l1y6 κρίναντας 1 Here, the phrase **having judged** could introduce: (1) what he and those with him think about how **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “and we have judged” or “as we judge” (2) a reason why **the love of Christ controls** them. Alternate translation: “because we have judged” +5:14 ig7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο, ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul is about to say, which he introduces with the word **that**. This form was powerful in his culture. If it would not be powerful in your culture, and if your readers might find both **this** and **that** confusing, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “that” or “what follows:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:14 nd9g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj εἷς 1 Paul is using the adjective **one** as a noun in order to refer to **Christ**, who is **one** person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase, and you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “one human” or “one human, Christ,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +5:14 crsa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ 1 Here, the phrase **for the sake of** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save” or “for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of” or “instead of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:14 trmb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντων & οἱ πάντες 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans … all humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +5:14 ocra rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo πάντων & οἱ πάντες 1 Here, the word **all** could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Since Paul did not clarify which he meant, if possible you also should use a general word that could be interpreted in either way. Alternate translation: “everyone … everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +5:14 nezi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ πάντες ἀπέθανον 1 Here Paul speaks as if **all died** because or when Jesus **died**. Since the following verse states that some people are still “living,” he cannot mean that every person has physically **died**. He may mean that people have **died** to sin, or that they participated in how Christ **died**, or that who they used to be **died**. Since some or all of these interpretations are possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea in a form that could allow for several of these interpretations, such as in simile form. Alternate translation: “in a way, all died” or “all died in a manner of speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:15 h831 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ -1 Here, much as in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **for** could indicate that Jesus **died**: (1) to benefit or help others. Alternate translation: “to save … to save” or “for the benefit of … for the benefit of” (2) instead of or in place of others. Alternate translation: “in place of … in place of” or “instead of … instead of” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:15 b5d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πάντων 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to refer to **all** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all humans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +5:15 rbbw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo πάντων 1 Here, just as in [5:14](../05/14.md), the word **all** could refer in general to all humans, or it could refer more specifically to all humans who believe in Jesus. Express the idea as you did in [5:14](../05/14.md). Alternate translation: “everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +5:15 s4yr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ζῶντες 1 Here, the phrase **the ones living** could identify people who: (1) have spiritual life, that is, those who have received new life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the ones having new life” (2) have physical life, that is, who have not died. Alternate translation: “those who are alive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:15 bc7p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηκέτι ἑαυτοῖς ζῶσιν, ἀλλὰ τῷ 1 Here, to **live for** a person refers to acting in a way that pleases or fulfills that person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “should live no longer to please themselves, but to please the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:15 g9k4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῷ 1 This clause leaves out some words that many languages might need to be complete. If it would be helpful in your language, you could supply these words from the first half of the verse. Alternate translation: “but they should live for the one” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +5:15 ri6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τῷ 1 Here, the word **one** refers to the same person to whom **he** refers at the beginning of the verse, Jesus the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom **one** refers. Alternate translation: “for the Messiah, the ones” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:15 h52q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγερθέντι 1 Paul uses the word **raised** to refer to someone coming back to life after they died. If your language does not use this word to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “having been restored to life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +5:15 aovc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive αὐτῶν & καὶ ἐγερθέντι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “them, the one whom God raised” or “them, whom God raised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:16 ic21 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference conclusion from what Paul has said, especially referring back to [5:14–15](../05/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from previous claims. Alternate translation: “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:16 f2ww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν & νῦν 1 Here, the word **now** could refer to: (1) the time when **we** believed. Alternate translation: “starting when we believed, … since then” (2) the time in which Paul was writing this letter. Alternate translation: “from the present moment on … right now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:16 t1cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα -1 Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions … according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value … according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +5:16 y8mk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ -1 Paul is speaking as **if** it were a possibility that **we regarded Christ according to the flesh** in the past, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can introduce the clause with a word or phrase such as “although” or “despite the fact that.” Alternate translation: “Even though” or “Despite the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +5:17 yx28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε 1 Here, the word **Therefore** could introduce an inference from: (1) [5:16](../05/16.md). In this case, Paul is saying that “regarding” Christ in a new way indicates that a person is also a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Regarding Christ in this new way shows that” (2) [5:14–15](../05/14.md). In this case, Paul is saying that how Christ died for people causes them to be a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “Because Christ died for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:17 khzj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ 1 Here Paul uses the conditional form to show that being **in Christ** leads to being **a new creation**. If the conditional form does not indicate a cause-and-effect relationship like this in your language, you could express the **if** statement in a way that does show the relationship. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +5:17 wark rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that a person believes in Christ and is a Christian. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that the person is a Christian, someone who is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “is a Christian” or “is united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:17 af1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations καινὴ κτίσις 1 Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any person, either man or woman. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that applies to both men and women or you could refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” or “he or she is a new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +5:17 tl3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καινὴ κτίσις 1 Here Paul does not directly state what is **a new creation**. He could be implying that: (1) the person **in Christ** is a **new creation**. Alternate translation: “that person is a new creation” (2) the world is a **new creation**, and the person can experience that when he or she is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “there is a new creation” or “that person experiences the new creation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +5:17 rt67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καινὴ κτίσις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **creation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “create.” Paul could be focusing on: (1) what is created. Alternate translation: “he is something that God has newly created” (2) the act of creating. Alternate translation: “God has newly created him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:17 ue8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ἀρχαῖα & καινά 1 Here, the phrases **old things** and **new things** could refer to: (1) things that characterize a person and their life. Alternate translation: “The things of the old life … things of the new life” (2) the world and how a person experiences it. Alternate translation: “The things of the old world … things of the new world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:17 vpe3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **behold** with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen. Alternate translation: “listen” or “hear me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +5:17 d7i9 γέγονεν καινά 1 Here, the phrase **new things** could be: (1) the subject of **have come**. Alternate translation: “new things have happened” (2) the object of **have come**, and the subject is the person who is **in Christ**. Alternate translation: “he has become new” +5:17 izkz rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants γέγονεν καινά 1 Some early manuscripts include the word “all” in this clause, so that it reads, “all things have become new.” Consider whether translations that your readers might be familiar with include “all.” Otherwise, it is recommended that you follow the ULT here, since the best manuscripts do not include “all.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +5:18 whyb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces the development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:18 jyf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** could refer to: (1) the “new creation” and “new things” that Paul mentioned in [5:17](../05/17.md). Alternate translation: “all these new things” (2) everything that exists. Alternate translation: “all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:18 s1q2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τοῦ καταλλάξαντος 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “and he has reconciled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +5:18 u66s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify a **ministry** whose goal or aim is **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the ministry that accomplishes this reconciliation” or “the ministry that leads to this reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:18 lj2h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόντος ἡμῖν τὴν διακονίαν τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “having commissioned us to minister, so that God reconciles people to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:19 o5j8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὡς ὅτι 1 Here, the phrase **namely, that** introduces more information about the “ministry of this reconciliation” that Paul mentioned in [5:18](../05/18.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information or further explanation. Alternate translation: “that is, that” or “and by this I mean that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +5:19 payo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure Θεὸς ἦν ἐν Χριστῷ & καταλλάσσων 1 Here, **in Christ** could modify: (1) **reconciling**, so that God **was reconciling** by means of or through **Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about how **God** accomplishes the reconciliation. Alternate translation: “in Christ God was reconciling” (2) **was**, so that God was **in Christ**, and he was **reconciling** while he was acting **in Christ**. In this case, Paul is saying something about the relationship between **Christ** and **God**, namely that **Christ** is **God**. Alternate translation: “God was in Christ, reconciling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +5:19 sfrj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor Θεὸς & ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains the means by which God accomplishes the “reconciliation.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that God “reconciles” people by uniting them to Christ. Alternate translation: “God, by uniting people to Christ,” or “God by means of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:19 w1d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κόσμον 1 Here, the word **world** could refer to: (1) the people in the **world**. Alternate translation: “all people” (2) the **world** as a whole, including people, places, and things. Alternate translation: “everything he created” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +5:19 joj6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, καὶ θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul may have intended that: (1) **not counting** and **having placed** both introduce ways that God **was reconciling**. Alternate translation: “and he did that by not counting their trespasses against them and by placing in us the word of reconciliation” (2) **not counting** further defines **reconciling**, and **having placed** introduces an action parallel to **reconciling**. Alternate translation: “that is, not counting their trespasses against them, and he was placing in us the word or reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +5:19 mckq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ λογιζόμενος αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if God could keep a “count” of people’s **trespasses**, which means that he would keep track of everything that a person did wrong in order to condemn them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to keeping track of or condemning people for what they have done wrong. Alternate translation: “not keeping track of their trespasses” or “not using their trespasses to condemn them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:19 a1io rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν 1 Here, the words **their** and **them** refer to the people who live in **the world**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “the trespasses of the people in the world … them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:19 b62q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the word of reconciliation** were an object that God would “place in” Paul and those with him. He means that God has called or commissioned them to proclaim this **word of reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having given to us” or “having called us to proclaim” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:19 om5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the news” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +5:19 ix97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸν λόγον τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **word** about **reconciliation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the word about reconciliation” or “the word concerning reconciliation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:19 zuoe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς καταλλαγῆς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **reconciliation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reconcile.” Alternate translation: “about how God reconciles the world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:20 wg8f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul said in the previous verse about how God “placed in us the word of reconciliation” (see [5:19](../05/19.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “So then” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +5:20 q9u9 ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ -1 Here, the phrase **on behalf of** could indicate that: (1) Paul and those with him represent **Christ**. Alternate translation: “who act for Christ … as those who act for Christ” (2) Paul and those with him act for the benefit of **Christ**. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ … for the sake of Christ” +5:20 uqy7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς 1 Here, the phrase **as though** introduces the implication or meaning of being **ambassadors on behalf of Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an implication or explanation. Alternate translation: “and so” or “which means that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:20 lr70 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure παρακαλοῦντος δι’ ἡμῶν; δεόμεθα ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, the clause **We implore {you} on behalf of Christ** could be: (1) the introduction to what Paul and those with him say as God **is appealing** through them. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us as we implore you on behalf of Christ, ‘Be reconciled to God!’” (2) part of what **God is appealing through us**. Alternate translation: “is appealing through us when we say, ‘We implore you on behalf Christ: be reconciled to God!’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +5:20 me5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρακαλοῦντος 1 Here Paul does not state to whom **God is appealing**. He could imply that he **is appealing** to: (1) everyone. Alternate translation: “is appealing to all people” (2) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “is appealing to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:20 eoef rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δεόμεθα 1 Here what Paul says could be addressed to: (1) the Corinthians specifically. Alternate translation: “We implore you Corinthians on behalf of Christ” (2) every person with whom Paul and those with him speak. Alternate translation: “We implore everyone we meet” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:20 t7be rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations Χριστοῦ, καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “Christ that you should be reconciled to God!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +5:20 a6fx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταλλάγητε τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) the Corinthians do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Reconcile yourselves with God” (2) God does it. Alternate translation: “Let God reconcile you to himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +5:21 jp2a rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν & ἐποίησεν & ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here, the words **one** and **him** refer to Jesus the Messiah. The word **he** refers to God the Father. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom these pronouns refer. Alternate translation: “Jesus, who did not know sin, God made … in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +5:21 qim8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 1 Here, the phrase **having known sin** refers to committing or doing **sin**. It does not refer just to knowing about **sin**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to committing **sin**. Alternate translation: “The one not having done sin” or “The one not having sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:21 oxvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησεν 1 Here Paul speaks as if God **made** Jesus **sin**. He could mean that God: (1) treated Jesus as though he were a sinner. Alternate translation: “he regarded as a sinner” (2) identified Jesus with sinners and sin. Alternate translation: “he made like a sinner” (3) caused Jesus to be a sin offering. Alternate translation: “he made to be a sin offering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:21 dmjk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **for us** could indicate that God made Jesus **sin**: (1) to benefit or help **us**. Alternate translation: “for our sake” or “for our benefit” (2) instead of or in place of **us**. Alternate translation: “in place of us” or “instead of us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +5:21 pix7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul speaks as if people could become **the righteousness of God**. He could mean that **we**: (1) share the **righteousness** that God gives to those who believe. Alternate translation: “we might share in the righteousness of God” (2) are declared “righteous” by God. Alternate translation: “we might be declared to have the righteousness of God” (3) become those who live “righteously.” Alternate translation: “we might act according to the righteousness of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +5:21 kmt9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **righteousness** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “righteousness from God” (2) belong to **God**. Alternate translation: “God’s own righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +5:21 ebz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous.” Make sure your translation fits with how you understand what **righteousness of God** means. Alternate translation: “God might make us righteous” or “we might be righteous because of what God does” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +5:21 cypg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in him** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in him**, or united to Christ, explains how people **become the righteousness of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates that being united to Christ is the means by which people receive the **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “by being united to him” or “as God unites us to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * The gospel (5:11–6:2)\n * Proofs of ministry (6:3–10)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the quotations from the Old Testament in [6:2](../06/02.md) and [6:16–18](../06/16.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Commendation of ministry\n\nIn [6:3–4](../06/03.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that he avoids doing anything that would cause offense and lead to people blaming ministry. In fact, he and his fellow workers “commend themselves” in many ways, and he provides a list of those ways in [6:4–10](../06/04.md). Paul commends their ministry in this way because other people in Corinth were claiming that Paul was not a good apostle or minister for Christ. They claimed that they were better ministers for Christ. Paul responds here by listing what he and his fellow workers do and experience as true ministers of Christ. Make sure that you express the list so that it shows that Paul and those with him are true ministers of Christ.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### “Weapons of righteousness”\n\nIn [6:7](../06/07.md), Paul states that he and his fellow workers have “weapons of righteousness” for both hands. He could mean that righteousness: (1) is the weapons (2) is defended by the weapons (3) characterizes the weapons. Also the idea that the weapons are for both hands could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers have an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other hand (2) Paul and his fellow workers can defend against enemies coming from any direction. Paul does not state whom he is fighting against with these weapons, but it is probably sin, evil powers, and people who oppose his ministry. See the notes on this verse for translation options.\n\n### Opening the heart\n\nIn [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks about opening the heart and, in contrast, being restricted. He is speaking about loving other people as if it were an open heart and failing to love other people as it were a restriction in one’s insides. If your culture can express the idea of love by referring to where in their bodies people feel love, you could do so in these verses. Otherwise, you could use a comparable metaphor or plain language. See the notes on these verses for translation options.\n\n### The temple of the living God\n\nIn [6:16](../06/16.md), Paul claims that believers are the temple of the living God. In the last part of the verse, he quotes from the Old Testament to prove that this is true. This quotation also shows that the identification of God’s people with the temple indicates that God is with his people and treats them as his people. Since the temple is a very important part of Paul’s culture, you should preserve the temple language. If your readers would not understand the metaphor, you could express it as a simile or explain it in a footnote. See the notes on this verse for translation options.\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [6:14–16](../06/14.md), Paul asks five questions, and each question assumes that the answer is “none” or “nothing.” Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as negative statements. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [6:4–10](../06/04.md)\n\nThese verses contain one long list of the situations and ways in which Paul and his fellow workers commend their ministry. This list is divided into three parts. Each part uses a repeated form for each item. The first part uses the word “in” ([6:4–7a](../06/04.md)), the second part uses the word “through” ([6:7b–8a](../06/07.md)), and the third part uses the words “as” and “yet” or “but” ([6:8b–10](../06/08.md)). If possible, represent these parts in your language by using repeated words or some other natural form. Consider whether a long list like this would be natural in your language. The UST models one possible way to divide the list up into shorter sentences.\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the first person plural. When he uses this form, he is focusing on himself and his fellow workers, or just on himself (although this is less likely). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +6:1 kf1d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces his development of the ideas from the previous verses, especially from [5:20–21](../05/20.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +6:1 tbr6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Here Paul does not directly state **with** whom he is **working**. He could be implying that he works **with**: (1) God, since God is the subject of the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “working together with God” (2) the Corinthians, since they are the ones whom is “urging.” Alternate translation: “working together with you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:1 x4hc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **we** does not include the Corinthians. The first person plural could refer to: (1) Paul and those who work with him. Alternate translation: “we who preach the good news also urge” (2) just Paul. Alternate translation: “I also urge” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +6:1 s8db rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives καὶ, παρακαλοῦμεν μὴ εἰς κενὸν τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ δέξασθαι ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul uses two negative terms, **not** and **in vain**, to indicate a positive meaning. If your language does not use two negative words like this, you could instead use one positive term. Alternate translation: “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it has results” or “we also urge you to receive the grace of God, so that it produces its goal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +6:1 wdla rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gracious**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “act kindly” or an adverb such as “graciously.” Alternate translation: “how God acts kindly” or “how God acts graciously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:1 pdgo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς κενὸν 1 Here, **in vain** identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. In this case, receiving **the grace of God** will not lead to salvation if the Corinthians do not persevere in living as those who have received **the grace of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you use a word or phrase that identifies a cause that does not have its intended effect. Alternate translation: “for nothing” or “to no purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +6:2 ooms rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γάρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should “receive the grace of God” (see [6:1](../06/01.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reason for an exhortation. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +6:2 u9kc rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations λέγει 1 Here, the phrase **he says** introduces words that God speaks in the Scriptures. Specifically, Paul is quoting from a Greek translation of [Isaiah 49:8](../isa/49/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you use a form that indicates that God speaks these words that come from Isaiah. Alternate translation: “according to Isaiah the prophet God says,” or “God speaks these words through Isaiah:” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +6:2 pp3i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism καιρῷ δεκτῷ ἐπήκουσά σου, καὶ ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας ἐβοήθησά σοι. ἰδοὺ, νῦν καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος; ἰδοὺ, νῦν ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 The two clauses in the quotation mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Make sure that you use the same form for Paul’s interpretation of the quotation, which is also in parallel form. Alternate translation: “At an acceptable time I listened to you; yes, in a day of salvation I helped you. Behold, now is a favorable time; yes, now is a day of salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +6:2 kilf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καιρῷ δεκτῷ 1 Here, the phrase **an acceptable time** refers to a point in time that someone considers to be a proper or appropriate for doing something. Paul could be implying that this **time** is **acceptable** to: (1) God. Alternate translation: “At a time that I considered right” or “At a time appropriate for me” (2) people. Alternate translation: “At a time that people considered right” or “At a time appropriate for people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:2 iz3h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπήκουσά σου 1 Here, the word **listened** indicates that God both listened and responded. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that God did not just listen but also acted in response. Alternate translation: “I answered you” or “I listened to you and responded” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:2 be7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σου & σοι 1 Because God is speaking to one person, his special servant, **you** in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +6:2 z6w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν ἡμέρᾳ σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrase **day of salvation** refers to the time when God will bring **salvation** for his people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the time of salvation” or “at the time when I gave salvation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +6:2 qrdt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns σωτηρίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “when I saved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:2 sa94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ, νῦν -1 Here, the words **Behold** and **Look** draw the attention of the audience and ask them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with words or phrases that ask the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statements that follow. Alternate translation: “Pay attention! Now … Pay attention! Now” or “Listen, now … Now” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +6:2 j4k4 καιρὸς εὐπρόσδεκτος & ἡμέρα σωτηρίας 1 Here, the phrases **a day of salvation** and **a favorable time** repeat the words from the quotation exactly, except Paul uses a word that emphasizes that the **time** is good (**favorable**) instead of just being appropriate (**acceptable**). Use the form that you used in the quotation, although, if possible, use a word for a good **time** instead of just an **acceptable time**. Alternate translation: “is a time that God considers good … is a time of salvation” or “is a time appropriate for God … is a time when God gives salvation” +6:3 shtt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διδόντες 1 Here, the word **giving** goes with the clause “we also urge you” in [6:1](../06/01.md). It introduces an explanation of how Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In most languages, it is best to begin a new sentence with this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly links back to “we also urge” from [6:1](../06/01.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “As we urge you to receive the grace God, we give” or “As we serve God, we give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +6:3 v3wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μηδεμίαν & διδόντες προσκοπήν 1 Here, the phrase **giving no cause for offense** refers to how a person acts so that others are not offended. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “avoiding provoking others” or “doing nothing that would cause offense” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:3 sv9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν μηδενὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in anything** could refer to: (1) actions and behavior. Alternate translation: “in whatever we do” (2) people. Alternate translation: “among anybody” or “to any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:3 he3c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ μωμηθῇ ἡ διακονία 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) other people would do it. Alternate translation: “others might not blame our ministry” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God might not blame our ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +6:4 p6pl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ συνιστάντες ἑαυτοὺς ὡς Θεοῦ διάκονοι 1 Here the word **as** could introduce: (1) who they are (**servants of God**) while they **commend** themselves. Alternate translation: “we who are servants of God commend ourselves in everything” (2) what it is that they must **commend** themselves to be. Alternate translation: “we commend ourselves in everything, proving that we are servants of God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:4 p9up rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Θεοῦ διάκονοι 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to refer **servants** who serve **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “servants for God” or “God’s servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +6:4 faw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure Θεοῦ & ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν 1 Here, the phrase **in much endurance** could go with: (1) the list that follows. In this case, the list gives the situation in which they have **much endurance**. Alternate translation: “of God; we have much endurance in” (2) **we commend ourselves**. In this case, the phrase gives an explanation for how they **commend** themselves, and the list gives the situations in which this occurs. Alternate translation: “of God by having much endurance; we show this in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +6:4 xyf9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ὑπομονῇ πολλῇ, ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **endurance,** **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “enduring at all times while we are persecuted, pressured, and distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:4 ndmv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐν θλίψεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν στενοχωρίαις 1 Here, the words **tribulations**, **hardships**, and **distresses** function together to refer to many different kinds of persecution and suffering. It is possible that **tribulations** refers to direct persecution, **hardships** refers to being forced to do something difficult, and **distresses** refers to being unable to do what one wants. If you do not have three words for these categories, and if the repetition would be confusing, you could use one or two words or phrases to refer to suffering and persecution. Alternate translation: “in persecutions, in suffering” or “in every tribulation” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +6:5 ded3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πληγαῖς, ἐν φυλακαῖς, ἐν ἀκαταστασίαις, ἐν κόποις, ἐν ἀγρυπνίαις, ἐν νηστείαις 1 If your language does not express some of these ideas with nouns, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or in another natural way. Alternate translation: “in being beaten, in being imprisoned, in being mobbed, in working hard, in sleeping little, in being hungry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:6 w84c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἁγνότητι, ἐν γνώσει, ἐν μακροθυμίᾳ, ἐν χρηστότητι, ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, ἐν ἀγάπῃ ἀνυποκρίτῳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas by using verbal phrases or adjectives. Alternate translation: “we are pure, knowledgeable, patient, kind, filled with the Holy Spirit, sincerely loving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:6 e2lc ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 Here, the phrase **in the Holy Spirit** could refer to: (1) having the power or help of the **Holy Spirit**. Alternate translation: “in the power of the Holy Spirit” (2) being “holy” in one’s “spirit.” Alternate translation: “in holiness of spirit” +6:7 b6am rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας, ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **truth** and **power**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in the word about what is true, in God empowering us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:7 cr55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγῳ 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +6:7 dui6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν λόγῳ ἀληθείας 1 Here Paul could use the possessive to describe: (1) a **word** about the **truth**. Alternate translation: “in the word about the truth” (2) a **word** that is characterized by **truth**. Alternate translation: “the truthful word” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +6:7 p5l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in the power that comes from God” or “in power given by God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +6:7 ef5b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor διὰ τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if **righteousness** were **weapons** for **the right hand and the left**. He means that the righteous way in which he and his fellow workers live their lives is like armor and swords which they use to protect themselves and fight against enemies. Paul does not state who the enemy is, but he implies that it is anyone and anything that acts against God and the gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with simile form or in plain language. Alternate translation: “through righteousness, which is like weapons for the right hand and the left” or “through righteousness, which protects us from God’s enemies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:7 gg43 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weapons** that could: (1) be **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons, which are righteousness,” (2) come from or be because of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons that righteous provides” or “the weapons that come from righteousness” (3) defend or fight for **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the weapons to defend righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +6:7 ozxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῶν ὅπλων τῆς δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “righteous” or an adverb such as “righteously.” Alternate translation: “weapons, that is, how we live righteously,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:7 ijr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς δικαιοσύνης τῶν δεξιῶν καὶ ἀριστερῶν 1 Here, having **weapons** for **the right hand and the left** could describe how a soldier: (1) has an offensive weapon in one hand and a defensive weapon in the other. Alternate translation: “of righteous, both a sword and a shield” or “of righteousness for attack and defense” (2) is completely equipped for battle and able to defend against attacks from **right** and **left**. Alternate translation: “of righteous for defense on all sides” or “of righteousness with which we are fully equipped” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 ftu0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας, διὰ δυσφημίας καὶ εὐφημίας 1 In these two statements, Paul indicates that he and his fellow workers persevere in serving God whether people think and say good things or bad things about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “whether we receive honor or dishonor, whether there are bad reports or good reports about us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 m51w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξης καὶ ἀτιμίας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **honor** and **dishonor**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “honor” and “dishonor.” Alternate translation: “being honored and dishonored” or “others glorifying us and disgracing us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:8 fedq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς πλάνοι καὶ ἀληθεῖς 1 Here and in the following two verses Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers and then **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be deceivers, but actually true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:8 e4pf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἀληθεῖς 1 Paul is using the adjective **true** as a noun in order to identify himself and his fellow workers as those who truly are who they say they are. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “truthful people” or “telling the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +6:9 niij rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι, ὡς ἀποθνῄσκοντες καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν, ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 Here and in the following verse Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers, and then he uses **yet** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be unknown, but actually well known; considered to be dying, but actually—behold!—living; considered to be being disciplined, but actually not being put to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:9 fcb5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς ἀγνοούμενοι καὶ ἐπιγινωσκόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that he is: (1) **unknown** to many people but **known** to God. Alternate translation: “many people not knowing us, yet God knowing us well” (2) **unknown** to some people, but **known** to other people. Alternate translation: “some people not knowing us, yet others knowing us well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +6:9 x7bu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations καὶ ἰδοὺ, ζῶμεν 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “yet, and listen to this, living” or “yet most certainly living” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +6:9 r1d9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὡς παιδευόμενοι καὶ μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the actions, Paul could be implying that: (1) God does them. Alternate translation: “God disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (2) other people do them. Alternate translation: “people disciplining us yet not putting us to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +6:9 nqcv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ θανατούμενοι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die” or “kill.” Alternate translation: “yet not being killed” or “not dying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:10 so04 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς λυπούμενοι ἀεὶ δὲ χαίροντες, ὡς πτωχοὶ πολλοὺς δὲ πλουτίζοντες, ὡς μηδὲν ἔχοντες καὶ πάντα κατέχοντες 1 Here, just as in the previous verse, Paul uses **as** to introduce what other people think about him and his fellow workers and then **yet** or **but** to introduce what is really true about them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally expresses a contrast between what people think and what is actually true. Alternate translation: “considered to be sorrowful, but actually always rejoicing; considered to be poor, but actually making many rich; considered to have nothing, but actually possessing all things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:10 vydj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πολλοὺς & πλουτίζοντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers made other people **rich**. He means that he helps people receive blessings from God, including forgiveness and new life, which makes them spiritually **rich**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “making many spiritually rich” or “enabling many to receive new life, which is like being rich” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:10 pajk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὺς 1 Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +6:10 fpqg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα 1 Here Paul could be stating that they possess: (1) **all things** that Christ possesses. In other words, because Christ rules over everything, Paul and his fellow workers also possess everything. Alternate translation: “all things in Christ” (2) **all** spiritual blessings, which are the important **things**. Alternate translation: “all spiritual blessings” or “everything that is really important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:11 mv85 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς, Κορίνθιοι, ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the actions, Paul implies that he and his fellow workers did them. Alternate translation: “We have opened our mouth toward you, Corinthians; we have opened our heart wide” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +6:11 v74j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the words **mouth** and **heart** are singular nouns that refer to the mouths and hearts of Paul and his fellow workers. It may be more natural in your language to use plural forms. Alternate translation: “Each of our mouths … each of our hearts” +6:11 r815 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν & ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν 1 Here, the word **mouth** refers to the action of speaking with the **mouth**, and the word **heart** refers to the act of thinking and feeling with the **heart**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that refer to the actions rather than to where the actions occur. Alternate translation: “Our speaking … our feeling” or “How we speak … how we feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +6:11 jvak rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν ἀνέῳγεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers had **opened** their mouths **toward** the Corinthians. He means that he and his fellow workers have spoken what is true, and they have spoken confidently. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Paul could be specifically referring to: (1) how he and his fellow workers have interacted with the Corinthians in the past. Alternate translation: “We have always spoken confidently and truthfully to you” (2) what he has said in this letter so far. Alternate translation: “We have written confidently and truthfully to you” (3) what he said in [6:3–10](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “We wrote those things to you confidently and truthfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:11 w42w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν πεπλάτυνται 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers have **opened wide** their “hearts” to the Corinthians. He means that they love and care for the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “we have made room in our hearts for you” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:12 m2kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them (**not restricted**), they are loving and caring for others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “There is space for you in our hearts, but you do not have space for us in your hearts” or “You are being loved by us, but you are not fully loving us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:12 u4fz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στενοχωρεῖσθε ἐν ἡμῖν, στενοχωρεῖσθε δὲ ἐν τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “We are not restricting you, but your affections are restricting you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +6:12 p88s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τοῖς σπλάγχνοις ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affections**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “feel.” Alternate translation: “what you feel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:13 ypsz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure τὴν δὲ αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν (ὡς τέκνοις λέγω) πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here, the clause **I speak as to children** is a parenthetical statement that breaks up the sentence to give more information about how Paul is speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move the clause to wherever it is most natural to put a statement about how one is speaking. Alternate translation: “and—I speak as to children—in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also” or “and in the same exchange, open yourselves wide also—I speak as to children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +6:13 b62y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & αὐτὴν ἀντιμισθίαν 1 Here, the phrase **same exchange** refers to how Paul and his fellow workers have “opened their hearts” (that is, shown love) to the Corinthians. This is the first part of the **exchange**, and now Paul wants the Corinthians to complete this **exchange** by opening themselves to Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express what is being exchanged more explicitly. Alternate translation: “now that we have opened our hearts to you, in exchange” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:13 zdfh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς τέκνοις λέγω 1 Here Paul indicates that he is speaking as if he were addressing **children**. He could mean that: (1) he is using words and ideas that children use, particularly referring to the idea of **exchange**. Alternate translation: “I am using childish language” or “I speak as children speak to each other” (2) he is speaking to the Corinthians as if he was their father and they were his children. Alternate translation: “I speak to you who are like my own children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +6:13 c6vp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλατύνθητε καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 Here Paul continues to speak about loving others as if it were about having space in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they love and care for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar clause at the end of [6:11](../06/11.md). Alternate translation: “make space in your hearts also” or “love us also” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:14 qd33 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες ἀπίστοις 1 Here Paul refers to a farming practice in which two or more animals were **yoked together** with a piece of wood that was then connected to a plow or cart. In this way, the animals together pulled the plow or cart. Paul applies this farming practice to people to indicate that believers should not try to accomplish what God wants them to do by working with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not team up with unbelievers” or “Do not have a close relationship with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:14 x89j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ γίνεσθε ἑτεροζυγοῦντες 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that people do it to themselves. Alternate translation: “Do not yoke yourselves together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +6:14 v7kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces some reasons why the Corinthians should not be **yoked** with **unbelievers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces reasons for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +6:14 v7pw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ, ἢ τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 Here Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “righteousness and lawlessness cannot have partnership! Nor can light and darkness have fellowship!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +6:14 n5so rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & μετοχὴ δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ ἀνομίᾳ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **partnership**, **righteousness**, and **lawlessness**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “can righteous people and lawless people partner” or “can what is righteous partner with what is lawless” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:14 xr52 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fellowship**, **light**, and **darkness**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “can what is bright go together with what is dark” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:14 h9ks rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τίς κοινωνία φωτὶ πρὸς σκότος? 1 Here Paul speaks about how **light** and **darkness** do not have **fellowship**. He could be speaking about: (1) things and people that are good (**light**) and things and people that are evil (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship do good people have with evil people” (2) God’s kingdom and people (**light**) and Satan’s kingdom and people (**darkness**). Alternate translation: “what fellowship does God’s kingdom have with Satan’s kingdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:15 r1vq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ, ἢ τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου 1 Here, just as in [6:14](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using strong negations. Alternate translation: “And Christ has no harmony with Beliar! Nor does a believer have a share with an unbeliever!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +6:15 f832 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς δὲ συμφώνησις Χριστοῦ πρὸς Βελιάρ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **harmony**, you could express the idea by using verbs such as “agree” or “go together.” Alternate translation: “And does Christ go together with Beliar” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:15 rm3r rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Βελιάρ 1 Here, the word **Beliar** is another name for the devil, who is also called Satan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include a footnote or short phrase that clarifies that **Beliar** is another name for Satan. Alternate translation: “Beliar, that is, Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +6:15 z9iv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun τίς μερὶς πιστῷ μετὰ ἀπίστου 1 Here Paul is speaking of believers and unbelievers in general, not of one particular **believer** and one particular **unbeliever**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this form with a form that refers to believers and unbelievers in general. Alternate translation: “what share does any believer have with any unbeliever” or “what share do believers have with unbelievers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +6:16 y99x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς δὲ συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων? 1 Here, just as in [6:14–15](../06/14.md), Paul is using the question form to deny that something could be true. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could express the idea by using a strong negation. Alternate translation: “And the temple of God has no agreement with idols!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +6:16 m658 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τίς & συνκατάθεσις ναῷ Θεοῦ μετὰ εἰδώλων 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **agreement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “does the temple of God agree with idols” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +6:16 jc79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of what Paul said about **the temple of God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +6:16 s3l8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **we** refers to everyone who believes in Jesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +6:16 aqql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς & ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐσμεν ζῶντος 1 Here Paul speaks as if **we** were a **temple**. He follows this metaphor with a quotation which illustrates how God dwells with his people as their God. Since the **temple** is an important building in Paul’s culture, if possible you should preserve the language. If necessary, you could express the idea by using a simile form. Alternate translation: “we are like the temple of the living God” or “the living God dwells with us as if we were his temple” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:16 oc16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ & ζῶντος 2 Here, the phrase **the living God** identifies God as the one who lives and possibly as the one who gives life. The primary point is that God is actually alive, unlike idols and other things that people call their gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that emphasizes that God really lives. See how you translated the similar phrase in [3:3](../03/03.md). Alternate translation: “of the God who lives” or “of the true God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +6:16 es7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς εἶπεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 Here, the phrase **just as God said** introduces a quotation that supports what Paul has said about how **we are the temple of the living God**. The words Paul quotes could come from [Leviticus 26:12](../lev/26/12.md); [Jeremiah 31:33](../jer/31/33.md); and [Ezekiel 37:27](../ezk/37/27.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that the words that God speaks are from the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “just as God spoke through the prophets” or “as God spoke in the Old Testament” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +6:16 u5g3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐνοικήσω ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will dwell among them; yes, I will walk among them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +6:16 g0nl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνπεριπατήσω 1 Here the author of the quotation speaks as if God would **walk** among his people. He means that God will be as close to his people as if he were walking around with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “spend time with them” or “be close to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +6:16 vy1b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἔσονταί 1 Here, the word translated **themselves** switches focus from **God** to **they**. Consider using a natural way to switch the focus to **they** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is they who will be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +6:17 fe1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations διὸ ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε, λέγει Κύριος, καὶ 1 Here Paul uses the words **Therefore** and **says the Lord** to introduce a quotation that provides a result or inference from what Paul said in the previous verse. Most of the quotation is from [Isaiah 52:11](../isa/52/11.md), but the phrase **and I will welcome you** is from a Greek translation of [Ezekiel 20:34](../ezk/20/34.md). The ULT indicates that the quote is from two different passages by using new quotation marks with the last line. However, it is recommended that you treat the whole verse as one quote in your translation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could introduce the quote in a natural way which shows that it comes from the Old Testament. It may be more natural to move **says the Lord** to the beginning of the verse, as the UST does. Alternate translation: “Because of that, the Lord says {through the prophets}, ‘Come out from the midst of them, and be separate, and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +6:17 peek rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐξέλθατε ἐκ μέσου αὐτῶν καὶ ἀφορίσθητε 1 Here, these two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “Come out from the midst of them; yes, be separate” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +6:17 z5ld rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **them** refers to people who do not follow God and who do not trust the Messiah. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “of the unbelievers” or “of the people who do not follow God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +6:17 vfie rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 Here the author of the quotation uses the word **touch** to refer to interacting with someone in any way, not just by touching it. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “come into contact with no unclean things” or “avoid every unclean thing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +6:17 jg48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result κἀγὼ 1 Here, the word **and** introduces what happens when people do what God commanded in the first part of the verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that more clearly introduces a result. Alternate translation: “and then I” or “and when you do those things, I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +6:18 ft65 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καὶ 1 Here Paul uses the word **And** to introduce another quote from the Old Testament, specifically from [2 Samuel 7:8](../2sa/07/08.md) and [2 Samuel 7:14](../2sa/07/14.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is quoting from the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “Again, as you can read in the Scriptures,” or “Even more, as it is written,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +6:18 dks6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἔσομαι ὑμῖν εἰς πατέρα, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔσεσθέ μοι εἰς υἱοὺς καὶ θυγατέρας 1 These two clauses mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. Hebrew poetry was based on this kind of repetition, and it would be good to show this to your readers by including both phrases in your translation rather than combining them. However, if the repetition might be confusing, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “I will be to you as a Father; yes, you will be to me as sons and daughters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +7:intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n4. Paul’s ministry (2:14–7:4)\n * Join with fellow believers, not unbelievers (6:11–7:4)\n5. Paul rejoices about Titus’ visit to the Corinthians (7:5–16)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Boasting\n\nIn [7:4](../07/04.md), [14](../07/14.md), Paul refers to how he boasts about the Corinthians. What he means is that he tells people about how wonderful and great he thinks they are. It is important to indicate that Paul is not describing the Corinthians as better than they actually are. Rather, Paul indicates in [7:14](../07/14.md) that what he says about them is actually true. Use a word or phrase that refers to saying good things that are true about someone else. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### Encouragement and comfort\n\nThe words for “encouragement” and “comfort” are very closely related. Sometimes it is not clear whether Paul is focusing more on encouragement (which implies urging someone to act) or more on comfort (which implies making someone feel better). If you have a word or phrase that can indicate both comfort and encouragement, you could use it in this chapter. Otherwise, consider which emphasis the context implies. Generally, the ULT models one option, and the UST models the other option. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/comfort]])\n\n### The previous letter\n\nIn [7:8–12](../07/08.md), Paul refers to a letter that he had already written and sent to the Corinthians. He has already referred to this letter in chapter 2. While a few scholars think this letter is 1 Corinthians, most likely we do not have this previous letter. Paul acknowledges that this previous letter might have “grieved” them, but he wants them to know that he wrote the letter to help them do what was right. In your translation, make sure that these verses refer to a letter that Paul previously wrote, not to 2 Corinthians.\n\n### Grief and sorrow\n\nThe words for being “grieved” and for “sorrow” are very closely related. Paul uses these words to refer to being hurt or feeling upset about something. Paul distinguishes between two kinds of sorrow: one that is with respect to God, godly sorrow; the other is with respect to the world, worldly sorrow. If possible, use a word or words that are general enough to refer to both kinds of sorrow.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians except in [7:1](../07/01.md). You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### Switches between first person singular and first person plural\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul switches between singular forms (“I”) and plural forms (“we”) of the first person. These switches are probably not just stylistic. Rather, they indicate when Paul is referring just to himself and when he is referring to himself and those who serve with him. If possible, preserve these switches in your translation.\n\n### What happened in Corinth\n\nIn this chapter, Paul continues to refer to something that happened in Corinth, something he already discussed in chapter 2. However, Paul gives even less details here than he did in chapter 2 about what happened. What we know is that a person, probably a man from the Corinthians’ group, did something wrong and hurt some of the Corinthians and possibly also hurt Paul. In response, Paul wrote a severe letter that “grieved” the Corinthians. Paul also sent Titus to Corinth to make sure that everything was resolved. In this chapter, Paul especially focuses on how happy he was to hear what Titus told him about how the Corinthians responded. Avoid providing more details in this chapter than Paul does, but make sure that your translation generally refers to events like these. +7:1 h5xv rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an inference from what Paul has already said, especially what he said in [6:16–18](../06/16.md) about being God’s temple and family. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference from a previous section. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “On account of those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +7:1 k46r rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἔχοντες 1 Here, the word **having** introduces a reason why believers should **cleanse** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “since we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +7:1 tytd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ταύτας & ἔχοντες τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **promises**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “promise” or “pledge.” Alternate translation: “having been promised these things” or “God having pledged these things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:1 pw5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταύτας & τὰς ἐπαγγελίας 1 Here Paul is referring to the **promises** from the Old Testament that he quoted in [6:16–18](../06/16.md), which indicate that believers are God’s people, that God will welcome them, and that they are God’s sons and daughters. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly refers back to those **promises**. Alternate translation: “the promises that I have quoted” or “those promises” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:1 gwjt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 By **us** and **ourselves**, Paul means himself, his fellow workers, and the Corinthians, so use the inclusive form of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +7:1 fv49 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns παντὸς μολυσμοῦ σαρκὸς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **defilement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “defile” or “corrupt.” Alternate translation: “anything that corrupts flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:1 f00w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σαρκὸς καὶ πνεύματος 1 Here Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to the outward part of people, particularly the body. He uses the word **spirit** to refer to the inward part of people, the part that thinks, feels, and makes decisions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words that refer to similar parts of a person. Alternate translation: “of body and soul” or “of the physical and the spiritual” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:1 turq ἐπιτελοῦντες 1 Here, the word **perfecting** could introduce: (1) another thing that believers should do while they are cleansing themselves. Alternate translation: “and let us perfect” or “as we perfect” (2) the result of the “cleansing.” Alternate translation: “so that we perfect” (3) how they “cleanse” themselves. Alternate translation: “by perfecting” +7:1 c2xf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπιτελοῦντες ἁγιωσύνην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **holiness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “holy.” Alternate translation: “perfecting how holy we are” or “growing to be perfectly holy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:1 pt41 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession φόβῳ Θεοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify **fear** that is directed toward **God**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. See how you translated the similar phrase “fear of the Lord” in [5:11](../05/11.md). Alternate translation: “the fear that is directed to God” or “the fear that we experience for God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +7:1 xlet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν φόβῳ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **fear**, you could express the idea by using a verbal form of “fear.” Alternate translation: “in how we fear God” or “through fearing God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:2 x55b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς; οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν 1 Here and in the rest of this chapter, by **us** and **we** Paul means himself and his fellow workers but not the Corinthians, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +7:2 c2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χωρήσατε ἡμᾶς 1 Here, just as in [6:11–13](../06/11.md), Paul speaks of loving others as if it were about having space for others in one’s insides. When people have space for other people inside them, they are loving and caring for them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Show love for us” or “Make room in your hearts for us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +7:2 v4nu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet οὐδένα ἠδικήσαμεν, οὐδένα ἐφθείραμεν, οὐδένα ἐπλεονεκτήσαμεν 1 Here Paul uses three phrases with similar structure and meaning to strongly deny that he did anything to hurt any of the Corinthians. It is possible that the word **wronged** refers to doing something unjust, the word **ruined** refers to corrupting or perverting someone, and the phrase **took advantage of** refers to gaining money or things from somebody without doing anything in return. If the repetition would not communicate a strong denial in your language, or if you do not have three words for these ideas, you could express the idea with only one or two strong clauses. Alternate translation: “We wronged and took advantage of no one” or “We did not hurt any person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +7:3 pgze rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ λέγω 1 Here Paul refers to what he said in the previous verse about how he and his fellow workers did not hurt anyone ([7:2](../07/02.md)). Here he wishes to clarify that he does not mean that it was the Corinthians who hurt people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I did not speak what I just spoke” or “I did not write that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:3 bhb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς κατάκρισιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **condemnation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to condemn you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:3 ckpm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προείρηκα 1 Here Paul refers back to what he said in [6:11](../06/11.md): “our heart has been opened wide.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this relationship more explicit. Alternate translation: “I told you earlier in this letter” or “I wrote above in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:3 fay3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν ἐστε 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were in the **hearts** of him and his fellow workers. He means that they love the Corinthians very much. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you are in our affections” or “we love you very much” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +7:3 xzg3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism εἰς τὸ συναποθανεῖν καὶ συνζῆν 1 Here Paul refers to two extreme alternates, dying and living, to indicate that nothing that happens will keep him and his fellow workers from loving the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “come what may” or “whatever may happen to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +7:4 uamr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πολλή μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς, πολλή μοι καύχησις ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **confidence** and **boasting**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I am very confident about you; I boast greatly on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:4 yp45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μοι παρρησία πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul could be saying that he: (1) is confident that they follow Christ and do what is right. Alternate translation: “is my confidence that you follow Christ” or “is my confidence that you are doing well” (2) can speak boldly or confidently to them. Alternate translation: “is my boldness in speaking to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:4 mh12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πεπλήρωμαι τῇ παρακλήσει 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “You have filled me with encouragement” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:4 k5t2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ παρακλήσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **encouragement**, you could express the idea by using a verbal form such as “encourage” or “comfort.” Alternate translation: “how you urge me onward” or “how you comfort me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:4 mx9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ 1 Here Paul speaks as if he were “overflowing” with **joy**. He means that he has so much **joy** that he feels like it has completely filled him up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am exceedingly joyful” or “I have so much joy” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +7:4 mr75 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὑπερπερισσεύομαι τῇ χαρᾷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “rejoice” or an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “I overflow as I rejoice” or “I overflow with how joyful I am” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:5 rt1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 Here, the phrase **For even** introduces further explanation of the “afflictions” that Paul mentioned in [7:4](../07/04.md). However, Paul is also speaking again about what he said in [2:13](../02/13.md) about traveling to Macedonia. Consider a natural way to reintroduce Paul’s travel plans, and if possible, use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation of the afflictions. Alternate translation: “Speaking of afflictions, I will tell you more about my journeys:” or “Now as for the travels I have spoken about,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +7:5 f3c5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐλθόντων ἡμῶν εἰς 1 In a context such as this, it may be more natural in your language to say “go” instead of **come**. Alternate translation: “having gone to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +7:5 c8ju rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ἡ σὰρξ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **our flesh** refers to the whole person. Paul uses it to emphasize the physical or bodily nature of their suffering. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the whole person and not just their **flesh**. Alternate translation: “we ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +7:5 zwwy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν 1 Here Paul continues what he was saying in [2:13](../02/13.md) about how he “had no relief” in his “spirit.” What he means is that traveling to **Macedonia** did not help with his concerns about Titus or his sufferings. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “had no relief from our sufferings and worries at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:5 byp3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οὐδεμίαν ἔσχηκεν ἄνεσιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **relief**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “relieve” or “rest.” Alternate translation: “was not relieved at all” or “could not rest at all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:5 h3cv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive θλιβόμενοι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “we were experiencing afflictions” or “people were afflicting us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:5 i4wr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 Here, the word **without** identifies the source of the **conflicts** as external to Paul and those with him. The word **within** identifies the source of the **fears** as internal to Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use words or phrases that similarly identify internal and external sources. Alternate translation: “conflicts from others, fears from ourselves” or “conflicts on the outside, fears on the inside” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:5 zkqr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔξωθεν μάχαι, ἔσωθεν φόβοι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **conflicts** and **fears**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “quarrel” and “fear.” Alternate translation: “people fought us without, and we feared within” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:6 qdto rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with the “conflicts” and “fears” that Paul described in the previous verse ([7:5](../07/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +7:6 p3fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὁ παρακαλῶν τοὺς ταπεινοὺς 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who is the one who comforts the humble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +7:6 oe9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοὺς ταπεινοὺς 1 Paul is using the adjective **humble** as a noun in order to refer to all people who are **humble**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the humble people” or “those who are humble” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +7:6 uujt ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ Τίτου 1 Alternate translation: “by sending Titus to us” +7:7 z6jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ παρακλήσει ᾗ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **comfort**, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by how” or “by what you did so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:7 w7td rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρεκλήθη ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you comforted him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:7 nypy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀναγγέλλων 1 Here, the word **reporting** introduces how Paul knows about the **comfort** that the Corinthians gave to Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that naturally introduces how Paul knows about what happened in Corinth. Alternate translation: “since he reported” or “which we heard about when he reported” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +7:7 ljis rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, τὸν ὑμῶν ὀδυρμόν, τὸν ὑμῶν ζῆλον ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **longing**, **mourning**, and **zeal**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how you longed for me, how you mourned, and how you were anxious to do what I asked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:7 hzt6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ὑμῶν ἐπιπόθησιν, τὸν ὑμῶν ὀδυρμόν, τὸν ὑμῶν ζῆλον ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **for my sake** modifies all three items in this list. The Corinthians experience **longing** to see Paul, they experience **mourning** because they grieved Paul, and they have **zeal** for Paul. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make these ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “your longing for me, your mourning concerning me, and your zeal for my sake” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:7 xojr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive με & χαρῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “you caused me to rejoice” or “what you did caused me to rejoice” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:7 fifc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μᾶλλον 1 Here, Paul speaks about how his joy upon receiving the report from Titus is **even more** than the joy that he already described in [7:4](../07/04.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the comparison more explicit. Alternate translation: “even more than I already had rejoiced” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:8 zuvp rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s explanation of why he “rejoices even more” (see [7:7](../07/07.md)). This explanation continues in [7:9](../07/09.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Here is why I rejoice even more:” or “That is because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +7:8 ptq2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 1 Here Paul is speaking as if grieving them were only a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “although” or “though.” Alternate translation: “although” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +7:8 lzww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ἐπιστολῇ & ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη 1 Here Paul again refers to a letter that he previously sent to them. See how you referred to this letter in [2:3–9](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “my previous letter … the letter” or “the letter that I sent you before … that letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:8 wlbh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην (βλέπω ὅτι ἡ ἐπιστολὴ ἐκείνη, εἰ καὶ πρὸς ὥραν ἐλύπησεν ὑμᾶς) 1 Here, the phrase **Even if I was regretting {it}** could go with: (1) “now I rejoice” in [7:9](../07/09.md). In other words, although Paul may have regretted sending the letter, now he rejoices. Alternate translation: “Even if I was regretting it—I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour—” (2) **I see**. In other words, Paul may have regretted sending the letter because he saw that it **grieved** the Corinthians. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to begin a new sentence with the following verse. Alternate translation: “Even if I was regretting it, it was because I see that that letter grieved you, if only for an hour.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +7:8 b552 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ καὶ μετεμελόμην 1 Here, the phrase **Even if** could introduce: (1) something that Paul did in the past but does not do now. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he “regretted” sending the letter after he sent it, but he does not regret it now. Alternate translation: “Even though I was regretting it then” (2) something that Paul did not actually do. In other words, Paul wishes to indicate that he might have “regretted” sending the letter, but there is no possibility of that now. Alternate translation: “Even though I might have regretted it”(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +7:8 vk7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy βλέπω 1 Here, the word **seeing** refers generally to “knowing” something, not just to looking with one’s eyes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word that clearly refers to knowing. Alternate translation: “I recognize” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +7:8 ftuo rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants βλέπω 1 Here, some manuscripts have “for I see,” and a few manuscripts have “seeing.” However, the best manuscripts have “I see.” Unless your readers are already familiar with one of these other wordings, it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +7:8 b2xj rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 3 Here Paul is speaking as if being grieved **for an hour** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it was actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “though.” Alternate translation: “though only” or “although just” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +7:8 ob23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy πρὸς ὥραν 1 Here Paul uses the word **hour** to refer to a short period of time, but he does not specify how short. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression that refers to a short period of time. Alternate translation: “for a brief time” or “for a short while” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +7:9 z820 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐχ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε, ἀλλ’ ὅτι ἐλυπήθητε εἰς μετάνοιαν 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “that you were grieved to the point of repentance, not that you were grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +7:9 kn5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλυπήθητε -1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself or his letter did it. Alternate translation: “I grieved you … I grieved you … I grieved you” or “my letter grieved you … it grieved you … my letter grieved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:9 i8n0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς μετάνοιαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **repentance**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “repent.” Alternate translation: “so that you repented” or “in such a way that you repented” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:9 lmw9 κατὰ Θεόν 1 Here, the phrase **with respect to God** indicates that how the Corinthians **were grieved** was how God desires people to be grieved. In other words, their “grief” was pleasing to God or “godly.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses this idea more clearly. Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God approves” +7:9 cg0o Θεόν, ἵνα 1 Here, the word translated **so that** could introduce: (1) a result. Alternate translation: “God, with the result that” (2) a purpose. Alternate translation: “God in order that” +7:9 l6d2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν μηδενὶ ζημιωθῆτε ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul explains that the Corinthians were not harmed or injured in any way by how they **were grieved**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you did not lose anything because of us” or “you were not harmed in any way by us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:10 y0gi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([7:9](../07/09.md)) about “grief with respect to God” and how it does not lead to “suffering loss.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +7:10 dtm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ & κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη 1 Here Paul uses words very similar to those he used in [7:9](../07/09.md): “you were grieved with respect to God.” Use a similar form to what you used there. Alternate translation: “the godly sorrow” or “the sorrow that God approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:10 wmtx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ & κατὰ Θεὸν λύπη, μετάνοιαν εἰς σωτηρίαν ἀμεταμέλητον ἐργάζεται 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sorrow**, **repentance**, **salvation**, and **regret**, you could express the ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “being grieved with respect to God causes people to repent so that they are saved and do not regret being grieved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:10 lc4m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀμεταμέλητον 1 Here, the phrase **without regret** could describe: (1) how those who have **sorrow with respect to God** do not experience **regret**. Alternate translation: “so there is no regret” (2) how Paul does not have **regret** for how he caused the Corinthians to feel **sorrow**. Alternate translation (preceded by a comma): “so that I do not have any regret” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:10 lc1s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ δὲ τοῦ κόσμου λύπη 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the kind of **sorrow** that the **world** experiences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “But worldly sorrow” or “But the sorrow that is characteristic of this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +7:10 t234 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 Here, the word **world** refers to the people in the world who do not believe in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this group of people. Alternate translation: “of unbelievers” or “of other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +7:10 uwz5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns θάνατον κατεργάζεται 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **death**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “die.” Alternate translation: “leads these people to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:10 s94l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θάνατον 1 Here, the word **death** refers not only to physical **death** but also to spiritual **death**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “spiritual death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:11 hz1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a specific example of what Paul said in the previous verse about how “sorrow with respect to God works repentance towards salvation” ([7:10](../07/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a specific example, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “In your case,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +7:11 gpp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “look at” or “consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +7:11 uxa4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns αὐτὸ τοῦτο & πόσην κατειργάσατο ὑμῖν σπουδήν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “earnest.” Alternate translation: “how earnest this same thing caused you to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:11 hpyz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit αὐτὸ τοῦτο τὸ κατὰ Θεὸν λυπηθῆναι & κατειργάσατο ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **to be made sorrowful with respect to God** further defines what **this same thing** is. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this relationship in a more natural form. Alternate translation: “this same thing, that is, to be made sorrowful with respect to God, produced in you” or “this same the experience of being made sorrowful with respect to God produced in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:11 qnsg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive λυπηθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he himself did it. Alternate translation: “to feel sorrowful” or “that I made you sorrowful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:11 t7uk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ Θεὸν 1 Here, just as in [7:9–10](../07/09.md), the phrase **with respect to God** indicates that how the Corinthians were **sorrowful** was how God desires people to be sorrowful. In other words, their “sorrow” was pleasing to God or “godly.” See how you expressed the idea in [7:9–10](../07/09.md). Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God approves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:11 h6jc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀλλὰ ἀπολογίαν, ἀλλὰ ἀγανάκτησιν, ἀλλὰ φόβον, ἀλλὰ ἐπιπόθησιν, ἀλλὰ ζῆλον, ἀλλὰ ἐκδίκησιν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for some or all of these ideas, you could express the ideas in another way. Each of the items in the list refers to one way that the Corinthians responded to the incident that caused Paul to write the previous letter that “grieved” them. Make sure that how you express the Corinthians’ responses fits with this situation. Alternate translation: “you were eager to defend yourselves, you were indignant, you were fearful, you were anxious to see us, you were zealous, and you were quick to punish the wrongdoer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:11 tcvv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ πράγματι 1 Here, the phrase **this matter** refers to what happened at Corinth that caused Paul to write the previous letter. Paul has already discussed this incident in [2:3–11](../02/03.md), so he simply refers to it here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that similarly refers to something that has already happened and that has already been discussed. Alternate translation: “in this incident” or “in what was done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:12 d4uc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα 1 Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul said in [7:8–11](../07/08.md) about the letter and its results. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +7:12 n0qv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔγραψα 1 Here, the phrase **I wrote** refers to the previous letter that Paul sent to the Corinthians. See how you translated “I wrote” in [2:3–4](../02/03.md). Alternate translation: “I wrote that letter” or “I sent the letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:12 tqcb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀδικηθέντος 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person **having done wrong** did it. Alternate translation: “whom that person wronged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:12 i6sn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τοῦ φανερωθῆναι τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that he or his letter did it. Alternate translation: “I might reveal to you your earnestness which is on our behalf” or “my letter might reveal to you your earnestness which is on our behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:12 rqr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν σπουδὴν ὑμῶν, τὴν ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “earnest.” Alternate translation: “how earnest you are on our behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:12 ycy7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul refers to something being revealed **before God** to indicate a close connection to God. See how you translated the phrase **before God** in [4:2](../04/02.md). The phrase could indicate that: (1) God testifies to or approves the Corinthians’ **earnestness**. Alternate translation: “with God testifying to it” (2) the Corinthians recognize their **earnestness** when they are in God’s presence. Alternate translation: “in God’s presence” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +7:13 afti rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διὰ τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul has said in [7:6–12](../07/06.md) about how the Corinthians treated Titus and how they responded to Paul’s letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you make the referent of **this** more explicit. Alternate translation: “Because of those things” or “Because you responded in those ways,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +7:13 kn2q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διὰ τοῦτο παρακεκλήμεθα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the Corinthians did it. Alternate translation: “Because of this, you have encouraged us” or “So then, what you did has encouraged us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:13 f3xr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces Paul’s development of the ideas from the previous sentence. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +7:13 axyk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ παρακλήσει ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **encouragement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “how we have been encouraged” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:13 k6gm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ χαρᾷ Τίτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “joyful.” Alternate translation: “how joyful Titus was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:13 n69e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if Titus’ **spirit** were a tired body that needed to be **refreshed**. He could mean that Titus: (1) was encouraged or given new energy. Alternate translation: “he was encouraged by all of you” or “he was energized by all of us” (2) was no longer worried about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “he stopped worrying about all of you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +7:13 v2g6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀναπέπαυται τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all of you had refreshed his spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:14 c72a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces another reason why Paul and his fellow workers rejoiced even more abundantly ([7:13](../07/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “Also, we rejoiced since,” or “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +7:14 b4uq rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τι αὐτῷ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν κεκαύχημαι, οὐ κατῃσχύνθην 1 Paul is speaking as if his boasting about the Corinthians were a possibility, but he means that it is actually true. He uses this form to introduce what he said about the Corinthians that might have caused him to be **ashamed** if it were not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that Paul did that might have led to being **ashamed**. Alternate translation: “I was not ashamed because of what I had boasted to him about you” or “what I boasted to him about you did not cause me to be ashamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +7:14 m22c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ κατῃσχύνθην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “I did not feel shame” or “you did not shame me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +7:14 wrxa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντα & ἐλαλήσαμεν ὑμῖν 1 Here Paul could be referring to: (1) everything he has told the Corinthians, including the gospel. Alternate translation: “we spoke everything we have told you” (2) specifically what he told the Corinthians about his travel plans. Alternate translation: “we spoke to you about our travel plans” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:14 t1za rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀληθείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “truthfully” or “in a truthful way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:14 q5hg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ καύχησις ἡμῶν ἡ ἐπὶ Τίτου ἀλήθεια ἐγενήθη 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **boasting** and **truth**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what we boasted about became true with reference to Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:15 p2ja rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ περισσοτέρως εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐστιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **affections**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he loves you more abundantly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:15 qm18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσοτέρως 1 Here, the phrase **more abundant** could indicate that: (1) Titus has more **affections** for them than he did before he visited them. Alternate translation: “more abundant than before” (2) Titus simply has a great deal of **affections**. Alternate translation: “very abundant” or “great” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:15 ezep rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἀναμιμνῃσκομένου 1 Here, the word **remembering** introduces a reason why Titus’ **affections** are **more abundant**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “since he remembers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +7:15 gp09 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 Here, the Corinthians’ **obedience** could be directed toward: (1) Paul and his fellow workers, including Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to us” (2) just Titus. Alternate translation: “the obedience of all of you to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:15 uagc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 Here the Corinthians’ **fear** could be directed toward: (1) Titus as Paul’s representative. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling with respect to him” (2) the consequences of what had happened. Alternate translation: “with fear and trembling because of what had happened” (3) God, whom Titus represented. Alternate translation: “with and trembling with respect to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +7:15 dtni rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **fear** and **trembling**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “as you feared and trembled” or “fearfully and nervously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +7:15 g9bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 The terms **fear** and **trembling** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “great fear” or “deep respect” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +7:16 hr3w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit θαρρῶ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 The implication is that Paul is **confident** that the Corinthians are doing what is right or proper. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am confident that you do what is proper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)\n * Example of the Macedonians (8:1–6)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation from [Exodus 16:18](../exo/16/18.md) in [8:15](../08/15.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### The collection for the church in Jerusalem\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul encourages the Corinthians to finish collecting the money they were going to contribute to what Paul was gathering to send to the believers in Jerusalem. Paul sometimes calls participating in this collection a grace. He often refers to this collection indirectly, which was a polite way to talk about financial matters in his culture. If people in your culture speak more directly about financial matters, you may need to make some of the ideas more explicit. In order to encourage the Corinthians to give to this collection, Paul tells them that the Macedonian believers have already given generously ([8:1–5](../08/01.md)), states reasons why the Corinthians should give ([8:6–15](../08/06.md)), and assures the Corinthians that the people who are managing the collection are trustworthy ([8:16–24](../08/16.md)). Make sure that your translation includes these elements that encourage the Corinthians to give to the collection.\n\n### The generosity of the Macedonians\n\nIn [8:1–5](../08/01.md), Paul tells the Corinthians about how the Macedonian believers contributed generously to the collection even though they were poor and suffering. He does this to encourage the Corinthians also to give generously. While Paul does not directly compare how much the Corinthians and Macedonians have given, he does use the Macedonians as an example. Your translation should clearly present the Macedonians as an example to imitate.\n\n### Equality\n\nIn [8:13–14](../08/13.md), Paul indicates that one of the reasons for the collection is “equality” among believers. He does not mean that every believer must have exactly the same amount of possessions and money. What he does mean is that believers who have much should share with believers who have little. He wants all believers to be doing “equally” well. So, while this does not mean that everyone has exactly the same amount of possessions and money, it does mean that some believers should not be rich when others are poor. Consider how you might express the idea of general, although not exact, “equality.”\n\n### Titus and two traveling companions\n\nIn [8:16–23](../08/16.md), Paul commends Titus and then introduces and commends the two men who travel with him. Most likely, these three men traveled together and carried Paul’s letter (2 Corinthians) with them. Paul does not name the two men, but he does indicate that they are trustworthy and should be respected. If you have normal ways of introducing and commending people, you could use them here.\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +8:1 mm8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new topic. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:1 d3pn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:1 a73v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +8:1 nqwf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **grace** that comes from **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a form that makes it clear. Alternate translation: “the grace from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +8:1 phws rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift of God” or “what comes graciously from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:1 d1mj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν δεδομένην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “that he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +8:1 xnfz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 As Paul indicates in [7:5](../07/05.md), he is in **Macedonia** when he writes this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could indicate that this place was Paul’s location when he wrote the letter. Alternate translation: “of Macedonia, where I am currently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:2 zjd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **that** could introduce: (1) an explanation or definition of the “grace of God” in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “that is, that” (2) a reason or support for what Paul said in [8:1](../08/01.md). Alternate translation: “which we know to be true because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:2 usu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession πολλῇ δοκιμῇ θλίψεως 1 Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **severe trial** that is made up of or characterized by **affliction**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a severe trial that afflicted them” or “affliction, which was a severe trial” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +8:2 b7k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance**, **joy**, and **poverty**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how very joyful they were and how deeply impoverished they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:2 a6td rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul is speaking of **poverty** as if it were a **deep** hole. He means that they were very poor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “their extreme poverty” or “their great poverty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:2 pr8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul is speaking of **generosity** as if it were **riches**. He means that these people had very much **generosity**, just like a rich person has very much money. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the greatness of their generosity” or “how much generosity they had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:2 z6mt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul is using the possessive form to describe **riches** that could: (1) indicate how much **generosity** these people had. Alternate translation: “their rich generosity” (2) be made up of **generosity**. Alternate translation: “the riches that are their generosity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +8:2 hcgh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generosity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how richly generous they were” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:3 muo6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a support for what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:2](../08/02.md)) about the “riches of their generosity.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces support for a claim. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “As a matter of fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +8:3 tf8b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ δύναμιν & παρὰ δύναμιν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **ability**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “they gave according to what they were able to give … beyond what they were able to give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:3 wxoh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐθαίρετοι 1 Here, the phrase **of their own accord** indicates that no one forced or required the believers in Macedonia to act as they did. Rather, they chose to do so on their own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “of their own free will” or “because they wanted to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +8:3 soq9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure αὐθαίρετοι 1 Here, the phrase **of their own accord** could modify: (1) the word **gave** which is implied in this verse. Alternate translation: “which they did of their own accord” (2) “pleaded” in the following verse ([8:4](../08/04.md)). If you use the following alternate translate, you will need to remove the comma at the end of this verse. Alternate translation: “and that of their own accord and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +8:4 tfsj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δεόμενοι ἡμῶν, τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν τῆς διακονίας τῆς 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **favor** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “they pleaded with us to favor them and allow them to take part in this ministry that is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:4 jdqw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys τὴν χάριν καὶ τὴν κοινωνίαν 1 The two words **favor** and **fellowship** work together to express a single idea. The word **fellowship** describes what **the favor** is. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a different way. Alternate translation: “the favor of the fellowship” or “the gift of fellowship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +8:4 nmw8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Here Paul does not give very many details about the **ministry** because he had already told the Corinthians about it in [1 Corinthians 16:1–4](../1co/16/01.md). From that passage and other passages, we know that Paul was collecting money from various churches to send to Jerusalem to help the believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that this is what Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “of this ministry that is for the saints in Jerusalem” or “of this ministry of sending money to the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:5 y9sj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ καθὼς ἠλπίσαμεν, ἀλλ’ 1 Here Paul is implying that the Macedonians did more than Paul and his fellow workers had **hoped**, not that they did less. If this clause would imply that the Macedonians did less, you could use a form that implies that they did more. Alternate translation: “while we had hoped for something, they did more:” or “doing more than we had hoped,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:5 t73o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν, πρῶτον 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Macedonians were gifts that they themselves **gave** to **the Lord** and to **us**. He means that the Macedonians chose to completely serve and honor **the Lord** and **us**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “they first devoted themselves” or “they chose first to be servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:5 w0el πρῶτον & καὶ 1 Here, the words **first** and **then** could indicate what is: (1) more and less important. Alternate translation: “primarily … and secondarily” (2) first and second in sequence. Alternate translation: “first … and second” +8:5 k4pa καὶ ἡμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **and then** could introduce: (1) what comes after what they **first** did. Alternate translation: “and after that to us” (2) the second part of what they **first** did. Paul implies that what comes after what they **first** did is giving money. Alternate translation: “and to us before they gave money” +8:5 m2mg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡμῖν 1 Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and then they gave themselves to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +8:5 kq0n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἑαυτοὺς ἔδωκαν, πρῶτον τῷ Κυρίῳ, καὶ ἡμῖν, διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **by the will of God** could modify: (1) how the Corinthians both gave themselves to **the Lord** and to **us**. Alternate translation: “by the will of God they first gave themselves to the Lord and then to us” (2) just how the Corinthians gave themselves to **us**. Alternate translation: “they first gave themselves to the Lord and then, by the will of God, to us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +8:5 kphi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **will**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as God wanted” or “which is what God desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:6 z42y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς προενήρξατο 1 Here Paul could be implying that Titus already **began**: (1) the **grace**, which is collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “just as he began this grace” (2) to work for the sake of the Corinthians in general. Alternate translation: “just as he began to serve you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:6 vn4u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην 1 Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:4](../08/04.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in [8:4](../08/04.md). Alternate translation: “this gift as well” or “this gracious act of giving as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:6 i4jd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ τὴν χάριν ταύτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what you also are graciously contributing” or “what you also are giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:7 x7cd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ἀλλ’ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. It is does not primarily contrast with what Paul has already said, although it does introduce a change in focus from the Macedonians and Titus to the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section or a change in focus. Alternate translation: “Now” or “In your case,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:7 mv4w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν παντὶ 1 Paul says **everything** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in so many things” or “in very many ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +8:7 iu8n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πίστει, καὶ λόγῳ, καὶ γνώσει, καὶ πάσῃ σπουδῇ, καὶ τῇ ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν ἀγάπῃ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **faith**, **speech**, **knowledge**, **earnestness**, and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that is, you are faithful, proper in what you speak, knowledgeable about many things, very earnest, and full of how we have loved you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:7 hy1o rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **from us in you**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “from you in us.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +8:7 zhg5 ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, the phrase **from us in you** could indicate that: (1) the **love** is how Paul and his fellow workers feel about the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we have for you” (2) Paul and those with him enabled or caused the Corinthians to have **love**. Alternate translation: “that came from us and is now in you” +8:7 gqz3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι 1 Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:4](../08/04.md), [6](../08/06.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “in this gift” or “in this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:7 fpe1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ χάριτι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in what you are graciously contributing” or “in what you are giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:8 mc1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns λέγω 1 The pronoun **this** refers to what Paul said in the previous verse about how the Corinthians “should abound in this act of grace” ([8:7](../08/07.md)). If this is not clear for your readers, you could more clearly refer to that exhortation. Alternate translation: “I say what I just did” or “I say that you should abound in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +8:8 xgi5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς & τὸ τῆς ὑμετέρας ἀγάπης γνήσιον 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **genuineness**, **love**, and **earnestness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that how you love others is genuine through how earnest others are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:8 wn2k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῆς ἑτέρων σπουδῆς 1 Here, the phrase **through the earnestness of others** indicates the standard by which Paul is **proving** the **love** of the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the standard by which something else is proved or tested. Alternate translation: “in comparison with the earnestness of others” or “against the earnestness of others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:8 x7fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἑτέρων 1 Paul is using the adjective **others** as a noun to mean other people, particularly other believers. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of other believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +8:9 irzk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should give money to help fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “That is because,” or “Now you should abound in giving because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +8:9 c1ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν χάριν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “what our Lord Jesus Christ has graciously done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:9 iz6z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δι’ ὑμᾶς ἐπτώχευσεν, πλούσιος ὤν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ πλουτήσητε 1 Here, Paul is speaking of what God considers valuable, including blessings, power, and honor, as if it were wealth. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea with a simile or plain language. Alternate translation: “he became like a poor person for your sake, though he was like a rich person, so that by what was like that one’s poverty, you might become like rich people” or “he gave up blessings and honor for your sake, though he had possessed great blessings and honor, so that by giving those things up, you might receive blessings and honor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:9 j5ym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἐκείνου πτωχείᾳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **poverty**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by that one being poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:10 b7ht rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐν τούτῳ 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the issue that Paul is speaking about, which is the Corinthians collecting money for believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “about this grace of giving” or “about collecting money” (2) what Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “in what follows” or “in what I am about to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +8:10 azlo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** could refer to: (1) the Corinthians hearing Paul’s **opinion**. Alternate translation: “listening to my opinion” (2) how Paul is giving an **opinion** instead of a command. Alternate translation: “an opinion instead of a command” (3) giving money. Alternate translation: “the act of giving” or “collecting money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +8:10 z8kg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὑμῖν & οἵτινες 1 Here, the word **who** could introduce: (1) further information about what the Corinthians were doing. In this case, it describes the Corinthians instead of distinguishing them from other people. Alternate translation: “for you, who” (2) what kind of people the Corinthians are. In this case, it distinguishes the Corinthians from other people and describes them as the kind of people for whom **this is profitable**. Alternate translation: “for you, you who” or “for you, since you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +8:10 spzy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ μόνον τὸ ποιῆσαι, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ θέλειν, προενήρξασθε ἀπὸ πέρυσι 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Paul is emphasizing **desire**, so consider a natural way to emphasize this part of the sentence. Alternate translation: “certainly desired to begin to do this and did not just begin to do it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +8:10 mt5f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ ποιῆσαι & τὸ θέλειν 1 In these phrases, Paul is speaking about collecting money for the believers in Jerusalem. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to collect money for the Jerusalem believers … to do desire to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:11 himo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases νυνὶ δὲ 1 Here, the phrase **But now** introduces an exhortation for what to do in the present time as opposed to what they already did “a year ago” (see [8:10](../08/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that transitions from the past to the present. Alternate translation: “So at this present time,” or “At this time,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:11 fc27 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καθάπερ ἡ προθυμία τοῦ θέλειν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **readiness** and **desire**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “just you were ready and willing to do it” or “just as you were eager and wanted to do it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:11 d6ly rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ τὸ ἐπιτελέσαι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **completion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “also you may complete it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:11 rgl0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκ τοῦ ἔχειν 1 Here, the phrase **from what you have** indicates that Paul wants the Corinthians to give some of the things or money that they own. He does not want them to borrow money or give everything that they own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “from what you are able” or “with you giving what you can afford” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:12 c50n rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:11](../08/11.md)) about giving “from what you have.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “I say that you should give from what you have, because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:12 tgch rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ 1 Paul uses the word **if** to indicate that this is a hypothetical condition. In other words, what people give will only be **acceptable** if **the readiness is already there**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing one thing that is a requirement for another thing. Alternate translation: “as long as” or “given that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +8:12 mx7f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ προθυμία πρόκειται 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “someone is ready” or “a person is already eager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:12 c2zc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὸ & εὐπρόσδεκτος 1 Here Paul does not state what is **fully acceptable**. He implies that it is whatever they give that is **fully acceptable**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “it is fully acceptable to give” or “whatever one gives is fully acceptable according to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:12 k9wh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐκ ἔχει 1 Although the word **he** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “what one does not have” or “what he or she does not have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +8:13 mp6k rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὐ γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:13](../08/13.md)) about giving “according to whatever one might have.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see, I want you to give not” or “I say that because my goal is not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +8:13 iyop rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὐ 1 Here Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. Paul implies that he is speaking about the goal or purpose of giving to other believers. The ULT supplies very general words here. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use more specific words. Alternate translation: “I do not want you to give” or “we give to fellow believers not” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +8:13 smk2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ & ἵνα ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις, ἀλλ’ ἐξ ἰσότητος 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “this is out of equality, not so that there is relief for others but tribulation for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +8:13 zht9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἄλλοις ἄνεσις, ὑμῖν θλῖψις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **relief** and **tribulation**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “others are relieved but you are troubled” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:13 y6xj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ὑμῖν & ἀλλ’ ἐξ ἰσότητος 1 Here, the phrase **but out of equality** could: (1) contrast with what Paul has said in this verse about some having **relief** and others having **tribulation**. Alternate translation: “for you, but so that there is equality” (2) introduce what Paul says in the following verse about believers sharing “abundance.” If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the capital letter at the beginning of the following verse. Alternate translation: “for you. Rather, out of equality,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +8:13 no45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐξ ἰσότητος 1 Here, the phrase **out of equality** could provide: (1) the basis or principle for giving and sharing. Alternate translation: “because the goal is equality” or “from the principle of equality” (2) the desired result from giving and sharing. Alternate translation: “so that everyone is equal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:13 ktd1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἰσότητος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **equality**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “focusing on everyone being equal” or “we are trying to make everyone equal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:14 um8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ νῦν καιρῷ, τὸ ὑμῶν περίσσευμα εἰς τὸ ἐκείνων ὑστέρημα, ἵνα καὶ τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα 1 Here, the phrase **At the present time** could refer to: (1) how things were when Paul wrote this letter. In this case, Paul is telling the Corinthians that they have more than the Jerusalem believers do, and so they should help. In the future, if the Jerusalem believers have more than the Corinthians, they will help the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “At this time, your abundance of money is for the lack of those ones, so that also the abundance of money of those ones may be for your need in the future” (2) the time between Christ’s first and second comings. In this case, Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should help the Jerusalem believers financially, and the Jerusalem believers will help them spiritually. Alternate translation: “In this new age, your abundance of money is for the lack of those ones, so that also the spiritual abundance of those ones may be for your need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:14 uqyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ ὑμῶν περίσσευμα εἰς τὸ ἐκείνων ὑστέρημα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance** and **lack**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what you abundantly possess is for what those ones lack” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:14 jkwe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ ἐκείνων περίσσευμα γένηται εἰς τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **abundance** and **need**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what those ones abundantly possess may be for what you need” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:14 om8r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns γένηται ἰσότης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **equality**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everyone is equal” or “everyone does equally well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:15 xpr7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures, specifically from [Exodus 16:18](../exo/16/18.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way, or you could include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “just as it is written in the Scriptures” or “just as you can read in Exodus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +8:15 ue8w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the person who wrote the book of Exodus. Alternate translation: “someone wrote in Exodus” or “it says in Exodus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +8:15 u28y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ τὸ πολὺ, οὐκ ἐπλεόνασεν; καὶ ὁ τὸ ὀλίγον, οὐκ ἠλαττόνησεν 1 Here Paul is quoting from a story about how God led the Israelites through the desert. They did not have much food, so God miraculously made something like bread appear on the ground for them. The Israelites called the food “manna,” and God commanded each of them to gather a specific amount for each person. This amount was just right, which is what this quotation describes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could include some of this information in your translation or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “Any Israelite who gathered much manna did not have too much, and any Israelite who gathered little manna did not have too little” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:15 ahrp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun ὁ τὸ -1 The phrase **the one** represents people in general, not one particular person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression. Alternate translation: “Those … those” or “Everyone … everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +8:16 w40p rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a new section. Paul is again speaking about **Titus**, whom he last mentioned in [8:6](../08/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Next,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:16 w8zo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations χάρις & τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, **thanks {be} to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. Alternate translation: “we give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +8:16 dgpj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish τῷ διδόντι 1 Here Paul is adding more information about **God**. He is not distinguishing between different gods. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly adds information instead of distinguishing between people. Alternate translation: “who has placed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +8:16 duy8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῷ διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου 1 Here, Paul is speaking as if **earnestness** were an object that **God** could put **into the heart of Titus**. He means that God made **the heart of Titus** earnest. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one making the same earnestness on your behalf characterize the heart of Titus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:16 yhr2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν 1 Here, the word **same** indicates that the **earnestness** that Titus has is the same **earnestness** that Paul and his fellow workers have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same earnestness that we have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:16 vsm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διδόντι τὴν αὐτὴν σπουδὴν ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestnest**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “making the heart of Titus earnest on your behalf” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:16 cr18 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ Τίτου 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “the mind of Titus” or “what Titus wants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +8:17 d9he rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of one way in which Titus showed the “earnestness” that Paul referred to in the previous verse ([8:16](../08/16.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or basis for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “For example,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:17 e4xn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν & παράκλησιν 1 Here Paul implies that the **appeal** was for Titus to visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “our appeal that he visit you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:17 g404 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go ἐξῆλθεν 1 Most likely, Titus and those who traveled with him took this letter to the Corinthians. In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **gone**. Alternate translation: “he has come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +8:17 jlyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἐξῆλθεν 1 Most likely, Titus and those who traveled with him took this letter from Paul to the Corinthians. Use whatever tense is most natural for referring to this action. Alternate translation: “he is going” or “he went” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +8:17 dlo1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom αὐθαίρετος 1 Here, the phrase **of his own accord** indicates that no one forced or required Titus to act as he did. Rather, he chose to do so on his own. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. See you how translated the similar phrase in [8:3](../08/03.md). Alternate translation: “of his own free will” or “because he wanted to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +8:18 txld rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “Also,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:18 crw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεπέμψαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers sent another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in the previous verse for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending together” or “we sent together” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +8:18 rje2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:18 nd28 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Here, the phrase **in the gospel** describes generally in what area this **brother** is praised. Paul means that this **brother** acts to spread the gospel. This probably includes preaching the good news, but it probably also includes many other acts of service, like visiting believers and collecting money for other believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “for his service to the gospel” or “for spreading the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:19 j9rk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ μόνον & ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the phrase **not only this** refers to how this “brother” received praise from all the churches. Paul uses this phrase to introduce something he thinks is even more important about this “brother.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces something even more important. Alternate translation: “even more,” or “more importantly,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:19 c667 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ χειροτονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “also the churches chose him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +8:19 q5on rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit σὺν 1 Here, the phrase **along with** indicates what the person **was chosen** to help with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that he could help with” or “with the intent that he could assist in” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:19 pgtn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ 1 Here, the word **grace** refers to what it did in [8:6–7](../08/06.md): being able to contribute money to what Paul was collecting for believers in Jerusalem. If possible, translate it as you did in those verses. Alternate translation: “this gift” or “this gracious act of giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:19 mkwm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ χάριτι ταύτῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the gift” or “what people are graciously giving” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:19 k7dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we are administering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +8:19 iph0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τὴν τοῦ Κυρίου δόξαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to glorify the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:19 lvyu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit προθυμίαν ἡμῶν 1 Here Paul implies that they have **readiness** to help fellow believers, particularly the fellow believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our readiness to help others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:19 v22x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns προθυμίαν ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how ready we are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:20 tfv0 στελλόμενοι 1 Here, the word **avoiding** introduces Paul’s reason for including this fellow believer in the process of collecting and distributing money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase here that introduces a reason for doing something. Alternate translation: “we included him to avoid” or “our goal was to avoid” +8:20 o27q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τοῦτο, μή τις 1 Here Paul introduces what he and his fellow workers wish to avoid by using the word **this**, and then he states what it is that they do not want to happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that identifies what Paul wishes to avoid. Alternate translation: “how someone” or “any possibility that a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +8:20 a3ps rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ τῇ διακονουμένῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generosity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “concerning what people generously offered that is being administered” or “concerning the generous gift being administered” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:20 mbm3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ἁδρότητι ταύτῃ 1 Here, the word **generosity** refers to the large sum of money that Paul has collected and plans to give to the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this large sum of money” or “this generous sharing with the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:20 a7xv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τῇ διακονουμένῃ ὑφ’ ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that we are administering” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +8:21 n4x1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([8:20](../08/20.md)) about avoiding blame from others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:21 ey5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor καλὰ, οὐ μόνον ἐνώπιον Κυρίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐνώπιον ἀνθρώπων 1 Here Paul speaks as if **{what is} good** were in front of or **before** both **the Lord** and **men**. He means that he cares about both what **men** and **the Lord** think is **good**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “not only what is good in the Lord’s eyes, but also what is good in men’s eyes” or “not only what the Lord considers to be proper, but also what men consider to be proper” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:21 fitv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +8:22 mdcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new idea, which is that Paul is sending one more person with Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new idea, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +8:22 j5jt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture συνεπέμψαμεν 1 Here Paul refers to how he and his fellow workers sent yet another believer along with Titus. Use the same tense that you used in [8:17](../08/17.md) for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “we are sending” or “we have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +8:22 ax5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to refer to a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “another believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:22 d3yj rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, the word **them** refers to Titus and the previously mentioned brother. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make explicit to whom the pronoun refers. Alternate translation: “with these two men” or “with Titus and the other brother” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +8:22 qqcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃν ἐδοκιμάσαμεν 1 Here, the phrase **whom we proved** could indicate that Paul and his fellow workers have: (1) tested the **brother**, and he successfully passed the tests. Alternate translation: “whom we proved by testing” or “whom we tested and approved” (2) seen what the **brother** does, and they approve of him. Alternate translation: “whom we are sure about” or “of whom we approve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:22 bay7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολλοῖς, πολλάκις σπουδαῖον ὄντα 1 Here, the phrase **often being eager** identifies what this **brother** was **proved** to be. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “many ways to often be eager” or “in many ways that he was often eager” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:22 l5yd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πολὺ σπουδαιότερον 1 Here Paul implies that the **brother** is **even more eager** than he was when Paul and his fellow workers **proved** him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is even more eager than he was before” or “he is more eager than ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:22 cusu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because of how very confident he is in you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:22 iw9e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πεποιθήσει πολλῇ τῇ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul implies that the **brother** has **confidence** that the Corinthians will do what is right, particularly that they will give generously to help the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “because of his great confidence that you will give generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:23 dbgj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κοινωνὸς ἐμὸς καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς συνεργός 1 The terms **partner** and **fellow worker** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “he is my partner in working for you” or “he is my fellow worker for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +8:23 mmi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers” or “those believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:23 lat3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **our brothers** refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our two brothers” or “the brother we mentioned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:23 u8lx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **messengers** who were sent by **the churches**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “they are messengers sent by the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +8:23 sams rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δόξα Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **a glory of Christ** describes the **brothers**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this clearer. Alternate translation: “and they are a glory of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +8:23 re88 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession δόξα Χριστοῦ 1 Here Paul uses the possessive to describe **glory** that belongs to **Christ**. He could mean more specifically that: (1) the brothers give **glory** to **Christ**. Alternate translation: “and they glorify Christ” (2) what the brothers do shows the **glory** that **Christ** has. Alternate translation: “and they show how glorious Christ is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +8:23 a8v2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόξα Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **glory**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “glorifying Christ” or “who show that Christ is glorious” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +8:24 wpzy rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **Therefore** introduces an exhortation based on what Paul has said in the previous verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces this kind of exhortation. Alternate translation: “Because of that” or “Since that is who they are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +8:24 wk4y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τὴν & ἔνδειξιν τῆς ἀγάπης ὑμῶν, καὶ ἡμῶν καυχήσεως ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul wants the Corinthians to **prove** the **proof**. If this form is redundant in your language, you could express the idea without using the word **proof**. Alternate translation: “that your love is real and that our boasting about you is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +8:24 lr1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς πρόσωπον τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **proof** was directly in front of the **faces of the churches**. What he means is that the **proof** is something that the **churches** can see and know about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “in the sight of the churches” or “with the knowledge of the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +8:24 oc83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν & ἔνδειξιν τῆς ἀγάπης ὑμῶν, καὶ ἡμῶν καυχήσεως ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **proof** and **love**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that you do love others and that what we boasted about you is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 9 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n6. Giving for the gospel (8:1–9:15)\n * Paul appeals to the Corinthians to give generously (8:7–9:5)\n * Blessing and thanksgiving (9:6–15)\n\nSome translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse [9:9](../09/09.md), which is quoted from the Old Testament.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Plans for the collection\n\nIn [9:1–5](../09/01.md), Paul continues to speak about the collection for the Jerusalem believers, how the Corinthians should contribute to it, and why he is sending Titus and two other believers to the Corinthians. For more information, see the introduction to chapter 8.\n\n### God enables and blesses those who give\n\nIn [9:6–14](../09/06.md), Paul describes how God gives people enough money and possessions so that they can give to others, and he also describes how God blesses people who do this. Finally, he explains how giving and receiving gifts glorifies God. Your translation should not suggest that God makes people who give to others very rich. Instead of that, Paul is saying that God gives some people more than they need so that they can give what they have to fellow believers, which leads to thanksgiving and glory to God.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Farming metaphors\n\nIn [9:6](../09/06.md), [10](../09/10.md), Paul speaks of giving to fellow believers as if it were like farming. In [9:6](../09/06.md), Paul refers to how farmers who sow much seed will harvest more produce. This applies to believers giving to each other: those who give more will produce more blessings for others and glory to God. In [9:10](../09/10.md), Paul refers to how God is the one who provides the seeds and the produce for farmers. This again applies to believers giving to each other: God is the one who gives some believers more than they need so that they can share it with others, and God also makes those gifts bless others and glorify him. If possible, preserve these metaphors or express the ideas in simile form. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n +9:1 wc5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation concerning why Paul and his fellow workers boast about the Corinthians (see [8:24](../08/24.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +9:1 fxs3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 Here Paul is referring specifically to the **ministry** of collecting money and giving it to the **saints** in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what Paul is referring to more explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry that is to the saints in Jerusalem” or “the money that we are collecting for the Jerusalem saints” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:1 wcuz περισσόν μοί ἐστιν τὸ γράφειν ὑμῖν 1 Alternate translation: “it is really not necessary for me to write to you” +9:2 o55j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why it is “excessive” for Paul to write to the Corinthians about the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “It is excessive since” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +9:2 yt00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν προθυμίαν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how ready you are” or “that you are ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:2 e62g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν προθυμίαν ὑμῶν & παρεσκεύασται & ἠρέθισε τοὺς πλείονας 1 Paul never directly states what the Corinthians and the Macedonians are ready or about to do. He implies that it is to give to the collection for the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “your readiness to help fellow believers … has been ready to help … stirred up most of them to help” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:2 jqee rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations ὅτι Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται ἀπὸ πέρυσι, καὶ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘Achaia has been ready since last year,’ and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +9:2 rd2g rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀχαΐα 1 **Achaia** is the name of a Roman province in the southern part of modern-day Greece. The city of Corinth was in this province. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +9:2 i529 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy Ἀχαΐα παρεσκεύασται 1 Here, the word **Achaia** refers to the believers who live in this province. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to the people directly instead of just to the place. Alternate translation: “the Christians in Achaia have been ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +9:2 zdgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸ ὑμῶν ζῆλος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **zeal**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how zealous you are” or “how you have acted zealously has” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:2 ynu8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἠρέθισε τοὺς πλείονας 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **zeal** of the Corinthians could stir up or provoke the believers in Macedonia. He means that the Corinthians’ **zeal** encourages or motivates the Macedonians to act. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “challenged most of them” or “motivated most of them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +9:3 x7t9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a contrast with what Paul has said in [9:1–2](../09/01.md) about how eager the Corinthians are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces this kind of contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” or “Despite that,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +9:3 vdla rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἔπεμψα 1 Here Paul refers to how he sent the two believers and Titus when he sent this letter. Use the same tense that you used in [8:17](../08/17.md) for Titus’ travel. Alternate translation: “I am sending” or “I have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +9:3 r5pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἀδελφούς 1 Here, the word **brothers** refers to Titus and the two fellow believers who travel with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “these brothers” or “the three brothers I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:3 lcx8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφούς 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” or “the Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +9:3 k1er rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ μέρει τούτῳ 1 Here, the phrase **this matter** identifies the topic that Paul is speaking about: giving to the collection for the Jerusalem believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in this matter of giving to the Jerusalem believers” or “in this matter of contributing to the collection” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:3 d69o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρεσκευασμένοι ἦτε 1 Here Paul implies that he wants them to **be ready** to give to the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you might be ready to contribute” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:3 tdw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καθὼς ἔλεγον 1 Here, the phrase **I was saying** refers back to what Paul wrote in [9:2](../09/02.md) about how he tells the Macedonian believers that the Corinthians have been prepared to give since the previous year. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “as I was saying to the Macedonians” or “as I was saying that you were ready since last year” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:4 iwg7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast μή πως 1 Here, the word **Otherwise** introduces a possible situation in which the Corinthians would be **unprepared**, in contrast to what Paul said in the previous verse about them being ready. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrasting situation. Alternate translation: “However” or “But if that did not happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +9:4 dov9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical ἐὰν ἔλθωσιν σὺν ἐμοὶ Μακεδόνες, καὶ εὕρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἀπαρασκευάστους 1 Here Paul introduces something that could happen when Paul visits them. There are two things that Paul thinks are possibilities. First, **Macedonians** might travel with him. Second, the Corinthians might be **unprepared**. Paul wishes to say that if both these things were to happen, both he and the Corinthians would be **ashamed**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that might happen. Alternate translation: “suppose that Macedonians come with me and find you unprepared; in that case” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +9:4 j8ey rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπαρασκευάστους 1 Here Paul implies that they would be **unprepared** to give money to the collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate: “unprepared to contribute” or “unprepared to give generously” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:4 dy3x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this situation would shame us—not to mention you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +9:4 wyzr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom καταισχυνθῶμεν ἡμεῖς, ἵνα μὴ λέγωμεν ὑμεῖς, ἐν 1 Here, the phrase **not to mention you** indicates that Paul thinks that the Corinthians would obviously be **ashamed**, even more than Paul and his fellow workers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses that idea. Alternate translation: “we, and most surely you, would be ashamed by” or “we—to say nothing of you—would be ashamed by” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +9:4 vhme rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ 1 Here, the phrase **this situation** could refer to: (1) what would actually happen if the Corinthians were **unprepared**, in contrast to what Paul had told the Macedonians would happen. Alternate translation: “what would actually be true” or “what had happened” (2) how sure Paul had been that the Corinthians would be ready. Alternate translation: “how confident we were” or “this confidence” (3) the project that Paul was undertaking, which was the collection of money for the Jerusalem believers. Alternate translation: “our project” or “what we were planning to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:4 rz1f rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants τῇ ὑποστάσει ταύτῃ 1 Here most ancient manuscripts read **this situation**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts read “this situation of boasting.” Most likely, the phrase “of boasting” was added by accident because it appears in the similar phrase in [11:17](../11/17.md). So, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +9:5 v9y2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Here, the word **So** introduces an inference or conclusion from what Paul said in the previous verse (see [9:5](../09/05.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an inference or conclusion. Alternate translation: “Therefore,” or “So then,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +9:5 e5b2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Here, the word **brothers** refers to Titus and the two fellow believers who travel with him. See how you translated this word in [9:3](../09/03.md). Alternate translation: “these brothers” or “the three brothers I have mentioned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:5 cka7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” or “the Christians” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +9:5 q1up rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go προέλθωσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 In a context such as this, your language might say “come” instead of **go**. Alternate translation: “they should come to you beforehand” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +9:5 p927 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὴν προεπηγγελμένην εὐλογίαν ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “blessing that you promised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +9:5 wjw5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν προεπηγγελμένην εὐλογίαν ὑμῶν, ταύτην 1 Here Paul uses the word **blessing** to refer to the money that the Corinthians said that they would contribute to Paul’s collection. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this blessing of money that you promised” or “this promised gift of yours” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:5 zg4e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo οὕτως ὡς 1 Here Paul uses both the phrase **in this way** and the word **as** to introduce the two ways in which the Corinthians could give to the collection. Your language may only use one form to introduce this information. If so, you could use just one form here. Alternate translation: “as” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +9:5 nm2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ ὡς πλεονεξίαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “not as something that we forced you to give” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +9:6 lmv6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δέ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new section. In this section, Paul gives the Corinthians more reasons why they should give generously. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new section, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +9:6 gho8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο 1 Here, the word **this** refers to the words that Paul says in the rest of this verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could clarify that Paul is referring to what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “here is what I say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +9:6 mm9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει 1 Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians, by giving money to the collection, were sowing seeds and reaping the harvest from what those seeds produced. In the second clause, he uses the word **blessings** to show the Corinthians how to apply what he says about farmers to the collection. Just as farmers receive a harvest that fits with how they sowed, so people who give to help other believers will receive **blessings** that fit with what and how much they gave. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or clearly express how the metaphor relates to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “giving money to help other believers is like farming. The one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly, and the one sowing in blessings will also reap in blessings” or “the one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly, and the one sowing generously will also reap generously. Similarly, the one giving blessings to fellow believers will also receive blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +9:6 kqvb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ὁ σπείρων φειδομένως, φειδομένως καὶ θερίσει; καὶ ὁ σπείρων ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις, ἐπ’ εὐλογίαις καὶ θερίσει 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, not saying something additional. Alternate translation: “the one sowing sparingly will also reap sparingly; yes, the one sowing in blessings will also reap in blessings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +9:7 qrhq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations προῄρηται τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 Although the words **he** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “he or she has decided beforehand in his or her heart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +9:7 tzt4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 In Paul’s culture, the **heart** is the place where humans think and feel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by referring to the place where humans think and feel in your culture or by using plain language. Alternate translation: “in his mind” or “on his own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +9:7 whg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐκ λύπης ἢ ἐξ ἀνάγκης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sorrow** and **compulsion**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “not because you are sad or forced to do so” or “not because you grieve or are required to do so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:7 t26d rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **for** introduces a reason why the Corinthians should not give **from sorrow or from compulsion**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “because” or “since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +9:8 kuxl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶσαν χάριν 1 Here, the word **grace** refers primarily to good things that God has given to the Corinthians, including money and possessions. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to these things. Alternate translation: “every good thing” or “every blessing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:8 zxz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πᾶσαν χάριν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **gracious**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “everything he gives” or “all his gracious gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:8 cz9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν παντὶ πάντοτε πᾶσαν αὐτάρκειαν ἔχοντες 1 This phrase introduces a reason why the Corinthians can **abound in every good work**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this relationship clearer. Alternate translation: “since in everything, always, you have all sufficiency” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +9:8 u8w6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πᾶσαν αὐτάρκειαν ἔχοντες 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **sufficiency**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being completely sufficient” or “being fully self-sufficient” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:8 jb7i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν 1 Here, the phrase **every good work** generally describes any good deed. However, it may also more specifically refer to helping others by giving them what they need. Make sure you use a phrase that could indicate this specific meaning in your language. Alternate translation: “every good act of service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:9 fd6d rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations καθὼς γέγραπται 1 Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures, specifically from [Psalm 112:9](../psa/112/09.md), to support the claim he made in the previous verse. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “In fact, it is written in a psalm” or “You can read just that in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +9:9 mma1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Just as someone wrote” or “Just as you can read in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +9:9 xvql rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν & αὐτοῦ 1 The pronouns **he** and **his** could refer to: (1) a person who fears and obeys God. This is what the pronouns mean in [Psalm 112:9](../psa/112/09.md). Alternate translation: “The person who obeys God distributed alms, he gave … his” (2) God. Alternate translation: “God distributed alms, he gave … his” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +9:9 a91h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν & αὐτοῦ 1 Although the terms **he** and **his** are masculine, the author of the quotation is using them in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “Such a person distributed alms, he or she … his or her” or “These people distributed alms, they gave … their” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +9:9 ypxe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν τοῖς πένησιν 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could either connect the phrases in a way that shows that the second phrase is repeating the first one, or you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “He distributed alms, indeed, he gave to the poor” or “He distributed gifts to the poor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +9:9 o0ri rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture ἐσκόρπισεν, ἔδωκεν 1 Here the author of the quotation uses the past tense to describe actions that normally or habitually occur. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use whatever tense is natural in your language for recurring or habitual actions. Alternate translation: “He is distributing alms, he is giving” or “He has distributed alms, he has given” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +9:9 hvk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τοῖς πένησιν 1 The author of the quotation is using the adjective **poor** as a noun to mean **poor** people in general. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “to poor people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +9:9 h2bx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ δικαιοσύνη αὐτοῦ μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **righteousness** and **eternity**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “what he does righteously will last forever” or “he will always be righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:9 qcsn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 Here, the phrase **endures to eternity** could mean that: (1) the person always does what is righteous. Alternate translation: “will always be performed” or “will be acted out to eternity” (2) God will always remember and reward the righteous things that the person does. Alternate translation: “will always be remembered” or “will be remembered by God to eternity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:10 ejwt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “So,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +9:10 p3fl rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ & ἐπιχορηγῶν σπόρον τῷ σπείροντι, καὶ ἄρτον εἰς βρῶσιν 1 Here, the word **one** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “God, who supplies seed to the sower and bread for food,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +9:10 gbkz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns σπόρον & τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν 1 In this verse, the word **seed** is singular in form, but it refers to many seeds. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “much seed … much seed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +9:10 uts1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χορηγήσει καὶ πληθυνεῖ τὸν σπόρον ὑμῶν, καὶ αὐξήσει τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul applies what he said about actual **seed** and **bread** in the first half of the verse to what he is telling the Corinthians about giving to fellow believers. He means that God will give them the means to give (the **seed**) and will enable their gifts to really help others (increasing the **fruit**). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “will supply and multiply what you have like it was seed and will increase what your righteousness accomplishes like it was fruits” or “will supply and multiply your possessions and will increase what your righteousness accomplishes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +9:10 ci67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ γενήματα τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to connect **fruits** with **your righteousness**. He could be identifying **fruits** that: (1) come from **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the fruits that come from your righteousness” (2) are **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “the fruits, that is, your righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +9:10 yv67 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δικαιοσύνης ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “of the righteous things you do” or “of what you righteously do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:11 c2wo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πλουτιζόμενοι 1 Here, the phrase **being enriched** does indicate that the Corinthians have more than enough money and possessions. Paul’s point is that God gives them more than they need so that they can share it with others. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people having more than they need or being wealthy. Alternate translation: “being made wealthy” or “being given more than enough” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:11 iexj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πλουτιζόμενοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God enriching you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +9:11 fpko rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς πᾶσαν ἁπλότητα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **generosity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “to be very generous” or “to act generously in every way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:11 b3e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ἥτις 1 The pronoun **which** refers to **generosity**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer more directly to **generosity**. Alternate translation: “which generosity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +9:11 b5n3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατεργάζεται & εὐχαριστίαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **thanksgiving**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “causes thanks to be given to God” or “leads to people thanking God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:11 u57h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δι’ ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **through us** shows that Paul and his fellow workers are involved in how the **generosity** leads to **thanksgiving**. More specifically, they are the ones who collect and send the gifts to fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “through our work” or “by what we do with your gifts” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:12 vuc2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ διακονία τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **ministry** that is accomplished by performing **this service**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “accomplishing this service” or “the ministry of performing this service” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +9:12 l7kq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς λειτουργίας ταύτης 1 Here, the phrase **this service** refers specifically to collecting and sending money to help the believers in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “of this service of helping the Jerusalem believers” or “of this service of collecting money” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:12 esk7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ περισσεύουσα διὰ πολλῶν εὐχαριστιῶν τῷ Θεῷ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **thanksgivings**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “is also causing God to be thanked many times” or “is also leading to many people often thanking God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:13 plj4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive to indicate that participating in the **ministry** proves what Paul says in the rest of this verse, that is, that they have **obedience** and **generosity**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “of what this ministry proves” or “of what you prove by performing this ministry” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +9:13 k0kh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς δοκιμῆς τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **proof** and **ministry**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “of what ministering in this way proves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:13 svot rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δοξάζοντες 1 Here the people who **are glorifying God** could be: (1) the believers in Jerusalem, who receive the money. Alternate translation: “the believers in Jerusalem are glorifying” (2) the Corinthians, who give the money. Alternate translation: “you are glorifying” (3) anyone who hears about the Corinthians giving money to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “people are glorifying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +9:13 ze14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to connect **obedience** to **your confession**. He could be describing: (1) **obedience** to the content of the **confession**. Alternate translation: “of your obedience to your confession” or “you obey your confession” (2) **obedience** that goes along with the **confession**. Alternate translation: “obedience that goes with your confession” (3) **obedience** which consists in proclaiming the **confession**. Alternate translation: “of your obedience in speaking your confession” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +9:13 sdnc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑποταγῇ τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **obedience** and **confession**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “you obey what you confess” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:13 ajtu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς ὁμολογίας ὑμῶν εἰς τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **to the gospel of Christ** could go with: (1) **obedience**. In this case, they are obedient **to the gospel of Christ**. Alternate translation: “of your confession, that is, obedience to the gospel of Christ” (2) **confession**. In this case, they confess **to the gospel of Christ**. Alternate translation: “of your confession concerning the gospel of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:13 otyw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that is about **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “to the gospel that concerns Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +9:13 z8k5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **fellowship** that is characterized by **generosity**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an adjective such as “generous.” Alternate translation: “the generous fellowship” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +9:13 ll01 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἁπλότητι τῆς κοινωνίας εἰς αὐτοὺς καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **generosity** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “how unselfishly you give to them and to everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:13 gyy3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάντας 1 Here, the word **everyone** refers primarily to believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “every believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:14 qea1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ αὐτῶν δεήσει ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, ἐπιποθούντων ὑμᾶς 1 Here, the phrase **in their prayer on your behalf** could go with: (1) **longing**. In this case, the word **longing** describes another thing that the Jerusalem believers do, besides “glorifying God” (see [9:13](../09/13.md)). Alternate translation: “and they are longing for you in their prayer on your behalf,” (2) the phrase “because of” in the previous verse (see [9:13](../09/13.md)). In this case, **their prayer on your behalf** is another reason why God receives glory. Alternate translation: “and because of their prayer on your behalf, in which they long for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +9:14 lwgq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπιποθούντων 1 Here, the word **longing** could introduce: (1) the way in which they pray. Alternate translation: “in which they long” (2) why they pray. Alternate translation: “since they long” (3) something they do along with praying. Alternate translation: “and they long” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +9:14 alzd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ὑπερβάλλουσαν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe a **grace** that is connected to **God**. He could mean that the **grace**: (1) is something that **God** gave to them to do. Alternate translation: “how God has given you the ability to perform surpassing grace” (2) is how God has acted towards them. Alternate translation: “how God has been surpassingly gracious to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +9:14 vytr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ὑπερβάλλουσαν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **grace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how very kind God has been to you” or “what God has graciously enabled you to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +9:15 sxtg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations χάρις τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, **Thanks {be} to God** is an exclamatory phrase that communicates Paul’s thankfulness. Use an exclamation form that is natural in your language for communicating thanks. See how you translated the similar phrase in [8:16](../08/16.md). Alternate translation: “we give thanks to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +9:15 es8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo ἐπὶ τῇ ἀνεκδιηγήτῳ αὐτοῦ δωρεᾷ 1 Here Paul does not clarify exactly what this **gift** is. He could mean the way in which the Corinthians give, which leads to a close connection between believers and glory to God. He could mean Jesus himself, whom God gave. In this case, use a general expression for a gift, since Paul does not clarify exactly what **gift** he means. Alternate translation: “for what he has given us, which is indescribable” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +10:intro abcd 0 # 2 Corinthians 10 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * The true standard for boasting (10:1–18)\n\nSome translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words in [10:17](../10/17.md), which are from [Jeremiah 9:24](../jer/09/24.md).\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s opponents\n\nIn this and the following chapters, Paul defends himself and his authority against people who said that they were better than Paul and that the Corinthians should listen to them instead of to Paul. These people either lived in or were visiting Corinth. Paul does not state who these people are or refer to them directly. However, he does refer indirectly to what people are saying about him. Consider whether your readers would notice and understand Paul’s indirect references to his opponents. If not, you may need to make some of his references more explicit. See the notes for specific issues and translation options.\n\n### Accusations against Paul\n\nIn [10:1](../10/01.md), [10](../10/10.md), Paul states that some people think that he is meek and gentle in person but bold and forceful when he is away from them. In [10:7](../10/07.md), Paul hints that his opponents might say that they are “of Christ” but that Paul and his fellow workers are not. It is very likely that Paul knew more things that people said about him, but he does not state anything more directly. Make sure that your translation shows that Paul knew that people were saying at least these two things about him.\n\n### Boasting\n\nIn [10:8](../10/08.md), [13](../10/13.md), [15–17](../10/15.md), Paul speaks about boasting. In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul explains what counts as good boasting, and he explains that he boasts in a good way. He also implies that his opponents boast in a bad way. You should use a word or phrase that refers to saying that someone or something is great, and make sure that this word or phrase could refer to something good or to something bad. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### Measuring, measures, and limits\n\nIn [10:12–16](../10/12.md), Paul speaks about “measures” and “limits.” He is referring to standards with which people compare themselves and rules according to which people act. He argues that he and his fellow workers have compared themselves to a standard that God has provided and work according to rules that God gave. He suggests that his opponents compare themselves to standards they have invented and do not follow the rules that God has given. Further, Paul argues that the rules God gave to him and those with him require them to be the ones who teach the Corinthians. Consider what words and phrases would express these ideas clearly in your language.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Ironic speech\n\nIn [10:1](../10/01.md), Paul describes himself as “meek” when he is with the Corinthians but “bold” when he is away from them. He is speaking ironically, that is, describing himself as his opponents do when he does not really believe it. This is clear from [10:10](../10/10.md), where Paul states that this opinion comes from others, not from himself. Further, it is possible that what Paul says in [10:10](../10/10.md) is also ironic speech: “we do not dare to classify or compare ourselves with some of the ones commending themselves.” It is likely, however, that Paul actually means this and is not speaking from another person’s perspective. Consider a natural way to express the ironic speech in [10:1](../10/01.md) so that your readers know that Paul is speaking from the perspective of his opponents.\n\n### War metaphor\n\nIn verses [10:3–6](../10/03.md), Paul speaks of preaching the gospel and opposing God’s enemies as if he and his fellow workers were fighting a war. While he and those with him do not try to kill their enemies, he does mean that they fight and struggle very hard. If possible, preserve this metaphor or express the idea in simile form. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Exclusive “we”\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul uses the words “we,” “us,” and “our” to refer to himself and those who work with him. He does not include the Corinthians. You should assume that Paul only means himself and his fellow workers unless a note specifies otherwise. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### The word for “limit” and “area”\n\nThe word translated “limit” in [10:13](../10/13.md), [15](../10/15.md) and “area” in [10:16](../10/16.md) most generally refers to a straight stick that could be used for measuring things. In these verses, it could refer primarily to the standard by which things are measured or to the things that are measured. If the word refers to the standard by which things are measured, it refers primarily to what God has called Paul and his fellow workers to do. The UST generally follows this interpretation. If the word refers to the things that are measured, it refers primarily to the people or areas in which God has called Paul and his fellow workers to preach the gospel. The ULT generally follows this interpretation. Before you translate these verses, you should read [10:13–16](../10/13.md) and consider which interpretation best fits with what Paul is arguing. +10:1 yc1g rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases αὐτὸς δὲ ἐγὼ, Παῦλος 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a new topic, which Paul introduces with several strong words. This new topic concerns Paul himself and his ministry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces a new topic and focuses on Paul himself. Alternate translation: “As for me, Paul, I” or “Concerning me, Paul, I” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:1 rf4f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ὃς κατὰ πρόσωπον μὲν ταπεινὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, ἀπὼν δὲ θαρρῶ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul describes himself with words that the Corinthians or his enemies use. He does not mean that he thinks these words are actually true about himself, but he repeats them to respond to what others are saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that these are words that other people have said about Paul. Alternate translation: “who appears to be meek when face to face among you, but being absent, appears to be bold toward you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +10:1 w8g1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ πρόσωπον 1 Here, the phrase **face to face** refers to being with someone physically or in person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “when physically present” or “when bodily” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +10:1 aqbi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας 1 The terms **meekness** and **gentleness** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the gentleness” or “the humility” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +10:1 gq7j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **meekness** and **gentleness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “by how meek and gentle Christ was” or “by how meekly and gently Christ acted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:1 jz4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διὰ τῆς πραΰτητος καὶ ἐπιεικείας τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to identify the **meekness** and **gentleness** that characterized **Christ**. He could mean that: (1) he is appealing to them with the same **meekness** and **gentleness** that Christ showed. Alternate translation: “in the meek and gentle manner that Christ had” (2) he wants them to consider the **meekness** and **gentleness** that Christ had when they listen to his appeal. Alternate translation: “asking that you think about the meekness and gentleness that Christ had” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +10:2 s6iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Yes,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:2 f8dy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo μὴ & θαρρῆσαι τῇ πεποιθήσει ᾗ 1 Here Paul includes both the action of being **bold** and the **confidence** with which he performs the action. He includes both of these elements because it makes the statement stronger. If your readers would find the repetition confusing, or if the repetition does not make the statement stronger, you could use just one of the terms and make the statement strong in another way. Alternate translation: “I will not need to be very bold, which is how” or “I will not need to have the great confidence with which” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +10:2 k6mn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ πεποιθήσει ᾗ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confidence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and confident in the way that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:2 e6lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τολμῆσαι 1 Here Paul implies that he will be **courageous** as he argues against or defends himself against the people who are saying bad things about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “to be courageous when I argue” or “to courageously defend myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:2 ik1p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τινας τοὺς λογιζομένους 1 Here Paul refers to people who are often called “the opponents.” It is not clear whether these people are some of the Corinthians or whether they have visited the Corinthians. What is clear is that they are saying bad things about Paul and claiming to have greater authority and a better gospel. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “our opponents who regard” or “any people who regard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:2 i6hh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντας 1 Paul uses the term **walking** to speak of behavior in life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “acting” or “living our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:2 t6lv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking and acting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +10:3 i2p5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:2](../10/02.md)) about how some people think that he and his fellow workers walk according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed, though” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:3 cvd6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor περιπατοῦντες 1 You should translate **walking** as you did in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “acting” or “living our lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:3 zbet rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν σαρκὶ 1 Here, the phrase **in the flesh** indicates that Paul and his fellow workers are humans like everyone else. He is contrasting his humanity with how he wages war, which is not the way in which most humans wage war. If possible, express this idea so that it is clearly connected to how you translate **according to the flesh**. Alternate translation: “in human lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:3 k7h8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor οὐ & στρατευόμεθα 1 Here and in [10:4–6](../10/04.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were waging a **war**. He means that they proclaim the good news and defend it and other believers against people and powers that try to corrupt the good news and hurt believers. Paul does not mean that they are actually killing people or fighting with physical weapons. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “we are like people who wage war, but not” or “we do not fight” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:3 gpd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 You should translate this phrase as you did in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +10:4 ge87 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:3](../10/03.md)) about waging war not according to the flesh. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:4 uf5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν οὐ σαρκικὰ, ἀλλὰ δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες 1 Here, just as in [10:3](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in **warfare**. In this verse, he specifically speaks about their **weapons** and about their enemies’ **strongholds**. He defines the **strongholds** as **strategies** or arguments against him and the gospel. Paul means by this that God empowers him and his fellow workers to prove that these arguments are false. Paul does not mean that they are physically fighting against people or destroying physical strongholds. Preserve the metaphor if it is clear in your language or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “what we use to defend ourselves are like weapons of warfare that are not fleshly but are powerful to God for overcoming strategies and arguments, which are like strongholds” or “we do not fight with fleshly weapons but with arguments that are powerful to God for the defeating of powerful enemies and strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:4 d1gj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ & ὅπλα τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **weapons** that are used to fight in **warfare**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “our weapons for fighting” or “the weapons with which we wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +10:4 ohuj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς στρατείας ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **warfare**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “with which we fight” or “we use to wage war” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +10:4 rk8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σαρκικὰ 1 Here, **fleshly** represents what is natural and human as opposed to what is spiritual and godly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “not according to natural human wisdom” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +10:4 cluj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit δυνατὰ τῷ Θεῷ 1 Here, the phrase **powerful to God** indicates that the weapons are **powerful** because God makes them powerful. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “are made powerful by God” or “have God’s power” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:4 ztdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet πρὸς καθαίρεσιν ὀχυρωμάτων, λογισμοὺς καθαιροῦντες, 1 The phrases **the tearing down of strongholds** and **tearing down strategies** mean similar things. Paul is using the two phrases together for emphasis, with the the second phrase defining the first phrase. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “for the tearing down of powerful strategies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +10:5 xuz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor καὶ πᾶν ὕψωμα ἐπαιρόμενον κατὰ τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ αἰχμαλωτίζοντες πᾶν νόημα εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, just as in [10:3–4](../10/03.md), Paul speaks as if he and his fellow workers were involved in a war. In this verse, he speaks about **every high thing**, which are fortifications or walls. He means that he and his fellow workers defeat or discredit anything that claims to be as great or important as **the knowledge of God**. Paul also speaks about taking thoughts **captive**. Just as the victor in a war takes the conquered people **captive**, so Paul and his fellow workers wish to take peoples’ thoughts **captive** so that these people are obedient to Christ. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “and anything that is like a high fortress that raises itself against the knowledge of God, and we control every thought like we we were taking it captive into the obedience of Christ” or “and anything that proudly claims to be more important than the knowledge of God, and we take control of every thought into the obedience of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:5 b74d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **knowledge** that is about **God**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “the knowledge about God” or “the knowledge that concerns God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +10:5 vm1a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς γνώσεως τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “knowing God” or “what we know about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:5 j6ra rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πᾶν νόημα 1 Here, the phrase **every thought** could refer to: (1) the thoughts had by people who oppose the gospel. Alternate translation: “every thought of people who oppose the gospel” (2) the thoughts had by believers. Alternate translation: “every thought of believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:5 z7ji rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **obedience** that is directed to **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a more natural form. Alternate translation: “obedience to Christ” or “obedience directed to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +10:5 r2yz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὴν ὑπακοὴν τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **obedience**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that Christ is obeyed” or “so that people are obedient to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:6 g9z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor καὶ ἐν ἑτοίμῳ ἔχοντες, ἐκδικῆσαι πᾶσαν παρακοήν, ὅταν πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here Paul finishes speaking as if he and his fellow workers were involved in a war. Here he says that they are **in readiness**, like soldiers ready to attack. When they attack, they will **avenge every act of disobedience**. What he means is that, once people are captive to the “obedience of Christ,” he and his fellow workers will punish them if they go back to being disobedient. If possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. Alternate translation: “and being like soldiers who are ready to avenge every act of disobedience, when your obedience would be complete” or “and being prepared to punish everyone who disobeys, when your obedience would be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +10:6 j0bh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἑτοίμῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **readiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “prepared” or “ready” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:6 m4ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πᾶσαν παρακοήν, ὅταν πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **disobedience** and **obedience**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “every disobedient act, when you have completed being obedient” or “all the ways that people disobey, when you have completed obeying” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:6 bgwq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here, the word **obedience** could refer to being obedient: (1) to Christ. This option is supported by the phrase “the obedience of Christ” in [10:5](../10/05.md). Alternate translation: “your obedience to Christ” (2) to Paul. Alternate translation: “your obedience to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:6 ipsn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πληρωθῇ ὑμῶν ἡ ὑπακοή 1 Here Paul is referring to how he wants the Corinthians to commit to obeying. When they always work towards **obedience**, then he and his fellow workers will **avenge every act of disobedience**. He does not mean that the Corinthians need to be perfectly obedient or **complete** specific acts of obedience. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “you fully work to obey” or “you completely strive for obedience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:7 y2yb τὰ κατὰ πρόσωπον βλέπετε 1 This sentence could be: (1) a command to look at what is obvious. Alternate translation: “You should look at the things according to appearance” (2) a rebuke concerning how they only look at how things appear. Alternate translation: “You are looking at the things according to appearance” +10:7 gsvr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πρόσωπον 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **appearance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as they appear” or “according to how they appear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:7 iuqd rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἴ τις πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ Χριστοῦ εἶναι, τοῦτο λογιζέσθω 1 Here Paul uses the conditional form to indicate what person he is addressing with his command to **consider this again**. If your language does not use this form to introduce a specific person or group of people, you could use a different form. Alternate translation: “Let anyone who is convinced in himself that he is of Christ consider this” or “A person may be convinced in himself that he is of Christ. Let that person consider this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +10:7 zfp2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is confident in himself that” or “knows for sure that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +10:7 s1g7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations τις πέποιθεν ἑαυτῷ Χριστοῦ εἶναι, τοῦτο λογιζέσθω πάλιν ἐφ’ ἑαυτοῦ, ὅτι καθὼς αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ 1 Although the terms **himself**, **he**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using the words in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “some people are convinced in themselves that they are of Christ, let them consider this again concerning themselves: that just as they are of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +10:7 cms9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession Χριστοῦ εἶναι & αὐτὸς Χριστοῦ, οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Here Paul could be using the possessive form to refer to how people: (1) represent **Christ** in a special way. Alternate translation: “he serves Christ in a special way … he serves Christ in a special way, so also do we” (2) belong to **Christ** as believers. Alternate translation: “he is a Christian … he is a Christian, so also are we” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +10:7 z1t5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p λογιζέσθω 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “he should consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) +10:7 iyxt rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο & πάλιν 1 Here, the word **this** refers ahead to the clauses **just as he {is} of Christ, so also {are} we**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “again what follows” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +10:7 f3i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οὕτως καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “so also are we of Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +10:8 mezz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of Paul’s claim that he and his fellow workers are of Christ (see [10:7](../10/07.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” or “I say that because,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:8 y3ny rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐάν τε 1 Here Paul could be using **even if** to introduce: (1) something that he thinks really is true. In other words, Paul really is going to **boast** in a way that he thinks is excessive. Alternate translation: “even when” (2) something that he thinks might be true. In other words, he thinks that the Corinthians might consider his boasting to be excessive. Alternate translation: “even supposing that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +10:8 qm9q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσότερόν τι 1 Here, the phrase **somewhat excessively** could mean that Paul is boasting: (1) more than some people would consider proper. Alternate translation: “somewhat more than what is proper” (2) a great deal. Alternate translation: “very much” (3) more than he already has. Alternate translation: “somewhat more than I have already” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:8 pm42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐξουσίας ἡμῶν, ἧς ἔδωκεν ὁ Κύριος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how we have been authorized by the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:8 d4zu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν ὑμῶν 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the Corinthian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more natural metaphor for this or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help you become more faithful to Christ and not to make you want to forsake him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:8 urjy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐκ αἰσχυνθήσομαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will not let people shame me” or “I will not feel shame” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +10:9 x96q rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα 1 Here, the phrase **so that** could introduce: (1) a general inference or result based on what Paul has already said. Alternate translation: “and so” (2) the purpose for which the Lord gave authority to Paul (see [10:8](../10/08.md)). Alternate translation: “and he gave me authority so that” (3) the purpose for what Paul says in [10:11](../10/11.md). If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to end the previous verse with a period. Alternate translation: “Let people consider what I am about to say so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +10:9 nw6e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τῶν ἐπιστολῶν 1 Here Paul refers in general to **letters** he sends to the Corinthians. He is probably including both 1 Corinthians and the other “severe” letter he has already mentioned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to Paul’s letters to the Corinthians in general. Alternate translation: “through any letters I write” or “through the letters I have sent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:10 c7h1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation or reason why the Corinthians might think that Paul is trying to terrify them with his letters (see [10:9](../10/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation or reason. Alternate translation: “I mention that since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:10 x6dq rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations φησίν 1 Here Paul is quoting what he knows a person or some people in Corinth are saying about him. He does not identify who this person or these people are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to what some people are saying. Alternate translation: “it is said” or “people say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +10:10 qrag rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations αἱ ἐπιστολαὶ μέν, φησίν, βαρεῖαι καὶ ἰσχυραί, ἡ δὲ παρουσία τοῦ σώματος ἀσθενὴς, καὶ ὁ λόγος ἐξουθενημένος. 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “someone says that my letters are indeed weighty and forceful, but my bodily presence is weak and my speech is despised.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +10:10 es1v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor βαρεῖαι 1 Here, Paul is speaking of **letters** as if they were objects that were **weighty**. He could mean that people think the **letters** are: (1) severe or burdensome. Alternate translation: “are burdensome” or “are oppressive” (2) important or impressive. Alternate translation: “are impressive” or “are significant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:10 b8bv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet βαρεῖαι καὶ ἰσχυραί 1 The terms **weighty** and **forceful** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “are very powerful” or “are very forceful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +10:10 d9i8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ & παρουσία τοῦ σώματος 1 Here, the phrase **bodily presence** refers to how a person looks and acts when they are around other people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this more explicit. Alternate translation: “his conduct in person” or “his physical bearing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:10 mboc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξουθενημένος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is contemptible” or “is something that people despise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +10:11 qf3o rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p λογιζέσθω ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Such a person should consider” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])\n +10:11 m6m6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ τοιοῦτος 1 Here, the phrase **such {a person}** refers to whoever says that Paul’s letters are powerful but his personal presence is weak (see [10:10](../10/10.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that clearly refers back to this person from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “that person” or “anyone who says those things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +10:11 xvjm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο & ὅτι 1 Here, the word **this** refers to what Paul introduces with the word **that**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different form that introduces what the person should **consider**. Alternate translation: “that” or “the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +10:11 kb55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ λόγῳ 1 Here, the word **word** represents what someone says in words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in our words” or “in our communication” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +10:11 hu56 τοιοῦτοι 1 Here Paul could be comparing what he and his fellow workers are like **in our word** with what they: (1) are like **in our deed**. In this case, Paul is simply comparing **word** and **deed**. Alternate translation: “such is what we are” (2) will be like in **deed** when they visit the Corinthians. In this case, Paul is speaking about what they will do in the future. Alternate translation: “such we will be” +10:11 g58z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ ἔργῳ 1 Here, the word **deed** refers to what Paul and his fellow workers do and will do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in what we do” or “in how we will act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:12 r9cb rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verses ([10:10–11](../10/10.md)) in response to what some people say about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “In fact,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:12 k94z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἐνκρῖναι ἢ συνκρῖναι 1 The terms **classify** and **compare** mean similar things. The word **classify** refers to considering something to be part of a group, and the word **compare** refers to evaluating something to see if it is similar to something else. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to compare” or “to include” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +10:12 i85y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could connect the phrases with a word other than **and** in order to show that the second phrase is repeating the first one, or you could combine the two phrases. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by themselves, indeed, comparing themselves with themselves” or “measuring and comparing themselves by themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +10:12 q7i9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες καὶ συνκρίνοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἑαυτοῖς 1 Here, the word **themselves** could indicate that each person: (1) measures and compares himself by himself or herself by herself. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by their own standard, and comparing themselves with their own standard” (2) measures and compares himself or herself by others in a specific group. Alternate translation: “measuring themselves by each other, and comparing themselves with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:12 n8sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, ἑαυτοὺς μετροῦντες 1 Here Paul speaks as if people were objects that someone would “measure.” He is speaking about how people compare or contrast themselves with people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “evaluating themselves by themselves” or “assessing themselves by themselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:12 zwl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ συνιᾶσιν 1 Here Paul does not state what it is that these people **do not understand**. What he means is that these people are not acting in wise ways. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that expresses the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “are not wise” or “do not act with understanding” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:13 x79x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 1 Here, the phrase **to the immeasurable things** could refer to: (1) how Paul and his fellow workers are not boasting beyond what God has “measured” to them. Alternate translation: “about what is not measured to us” (2) how Paul and those with him do not boast without any real standard. Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:13 a4ud rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ μέτρον τοῦ κανόνος 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **measure** that could: (1) measure things according to a **limit** or standard. Alternate translation: “the measure based on the standard” (2) define a specific **limit** or area. Alternate translation: “the measure that identifies the area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +10:13 y6ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὗ ἐμέρισεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς μέτρου 1 Here, the word **measure** could: (1) restate what it is that **God has assigned to us**. Alternate translation: “that God has assigned to us, which is a measure” (2) how God has **assigned** the **measure of the limit**. Alternate translation: “that God has assigned to us as a measure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +10:13 fx2b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μέτρου, ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **measure** could reach out and touch a person. He means that the **measure** includes the Corinthians in what it measures. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “a measure that included even you” or “a measure that measured even as far as you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +10:13 u84l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐφικέσθαι ἄχρι καὶ ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **that reached even as far as you** indicates that the **measure** includes the Corinthians as something that Paul and his fellow workers can boast about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “that reached even as far as you as something we can boast about” or “that extends what we can boast about to include you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:14 ay6h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 Here, the word **For** introduces Paul’s proof that the “limit” he mentioned in the previous verse does reach as far as the Corinthians (see [10:13](../10/13.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces proof for a previous statement. Alternate translation: “You can tell that is true because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +10:14 ctjf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & ὑπερεκτείνομεν ἑαυτούς 2 Here Paul is indicating that he and his fellow workers have not gone beyond the “limit” that he refers to in [10:13](../10/13.md). Express the idea so that the link to the previous verse is clear. Alternate translation: “we are not going beyond our limit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:14 lefl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς μὴ ἐφικνούμενοι εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul refers to what would need to be true if he and his fellow workers were actually **overextending** themselves. That would be true only if they did not **reach** or visit the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “which would only be true if we had not come to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:14 lpiu rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 2 Here, the word **for** introduces further evidence or proof for Paul’s claim that he and his fellow workers were not **overextending** themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces evidence or proof. Alternate translation: “since in reality” or “because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:14 wyzv ἐφθάσαμεν 1 Here, the phrase **we came** could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers had already visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “we went” (2) Paul and his fellow workers visited the Corinthians before Paul’s opponents visited the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “before anyone else did, we came” +10:15 hu9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς τὰ ἄμετρα 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:13](../10/13.md). Alternate translation: “in unmeasured ways” or “without any standards” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:15 l0bp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐλπίδα δὲ ἔχοντες, αὐξανομένης τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **hope** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “but hoping, as you increasingly believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])\n +10:15 ax6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μεγαλυνθῆναι 1 Here Paul does not state directly what is **enlarged**. He could mean that: (1) their ministry or work might **be enlarged**. Alternate translation: “that our ministry might be enlarged” (2) they might **be enlarged** or praised by the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “that we might be enlarged” or “that we might be praised” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:15 ff38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μεγαλυνθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “that God will enlarge our ministry” or “that God will enlarge us” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +10:15 djvz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατὰ τὸν κανόνα ἡμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **according to our limit** could refer to: (1) a **limit** or standard according to which Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges what he wants them to do. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called us to do” or “in what God wants us to do” (2) the area or places in which Paul and his fellow workers serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which they serve. Alternate translation: “according to where we serve” or “in the places in which we serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:15 gqiz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς περισσείαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **abundance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “abundantly” or “in abundant ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +10:16 nx8k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ὑπερέκεινα ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **the {places} beyond you** refers to the areas and people who lived to the west of Corinth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that identifies these areas and people more explicitly. Alternate translation: “the places west of you” or “the places I would go if I traveled through your town” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:16 xi00 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι & τὰ ἕτοιμα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things someone has accomplished in his or her area” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +10:16 raq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἀλλοτρίῳ κανόνι 1 Here, just as with the word “limit” in [10:15](../10/15.md), the word **area** could refer to: (1) a measure or standard according to which people serve God. In this case, the **accomplished** things are done according to a measure or standard that fits with someone else besides Paul and his fellow workers. Alternate translation: “according to what God has called other people to do” or “in what God wants others to do” (2) the area or places in which people serve God. In this case, God increases or enlarges the areas in which someone else besides Paul and his fellow workers serve. Alternate translation: “according to where other people serve” or “in the places in which other people serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +10:17 t3bz rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations δὲ 1 Here Paul quotes from the Old Testament Scriptures, specifically from [Jeremiah 9:24](../jer/09/24.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could format these words in a different way and include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “But as Jeremiah wrote in the Scriptures,” or “But as you can read in the Scriptures,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +10:17 q8cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p ὁ & καυχώμενος & καυχάσθω 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you could state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one boasting must boast” or “any person who boasts needs to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]]) +10:18 wfl6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([10:17](../10/17.md)) about how people should boast. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “As you can see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +10:18 btv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος, ἀλλὰ ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “that one whom the Lord commends is approved, not the one commending himself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +10:18 h81t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος 1 Although the term **himself** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “that one commending himself or herself” or “those commending themselves are not approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +10:18 n5v6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ & ὁ ἑαυτὸν συνιστάνων, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν δόκιμος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “the Lord does not approve that one commending himself” or “that one commending himself does not receive approval” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +10:18 sy2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ὃν ὁ Κύριος συνίστησιν 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the one whom the Lord commends is approved” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +11:intro abce 0 # 2 Corinthians 11 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * Paul defends his speech and conduct (11:1–15)\n * Paul boasts about his suffering (11:16–33)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Fools and foolishness\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul refers to being “foolish” or a “fool.” These words refer to a person who makes bad decisions and who cares about things that are not really valuable. It does not primarily refer to someone who does not know very much. Paul argues that the false teachers are “fools,” which means that they make bad decisions and care about things that are not important. He also describes how he is responding to the false teachers as “foolish.” He means that he speaks in ways that he considers to be “foolish,” but he speaks in these ways because he thinks the Corinthians will understand him if he speaks in these “foolish” ways. Consider how you might express the idea of “foolishness” in your language. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]])\n\n### False teachers\n\nThroughout this chapter, Paul is defending himself against false teachers who were claiming to be better than him and to preach a better gospel than his gospel. Paul never refers to these false teachers by name, but he does call them “false apostles” and “deceitful” (see [11:13](../11/13.md)). He also responds to some of their claims about themselves in [11:22–23](../11/22.md). Paul responds to the false teachers in two primary ways. First, he argues that the things that they boast about and claim for themselves are not important or valuable. Second, he argues that even in these things that are not important, he is better than they are. Make sure that your translation clearly indicates that Paul is responding the false teachers in these ways.\n\n### Financial support for teachers\n\nIn this chapter, Paul describes how he did not ask for or receive money and support from the Corinthians. In Paul’s culture, it was common for traveling teachers to ask for and receive money from the people they were teaching. Paul implies that his opponents, the false teachers, did ask for and receive money. He also implies that the Corinthians thought that the message of the false teachers was more valuable than Paul’s message because they charged money for their teaching. Paul argues in response that he cares more for the Corinthians than the false teachers do. In fact, he states that he can boast more than the false teachers because he did not receive money. Make sure that your translation expresses and implies these ideas.\n\n### Boasting\n\nJust as in the previous chapter, in this chapter Paul refers multiple times to “boasting.” In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul boasts because his opponents, the false teachers, boast. He does not think that this boasting is necessary or good, but he does it to respond to his opponents. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapter. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Marriage metaphor\n\nIn [11:2](../11/02.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were a young woman and as if he were the young woman’s father. He intends to marry his daughter to Christ, and he wants to keep his daughter pure and perfect until then. He means that he has helped unite the Corinthians to Christ, and he wants to make sure they stay completely faithful to Christ until Christ comes back. If possible, preserve the marriage metaphor or express it as a simile. See the notes on [11:2](../11/02.md) for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n### Irony\n\nMultiple times in this chapter, Paul uses irony. In other words, he speaks words that he does not agree with in order to make a point. He does this in [11:5](../11/05.md), where he refers to “super-apostles”; in [11:8](../11/08.md), where he says that he “robbed other churches”; in [11:19](../11/19.md), where he says that the Corinthians gladly bear with the foolish, being wise; and in [11:21](../11/21.md), where he says that he speaks according to dishonor that he and his fellow workers have been weak. In each of these verses, he does not actually agree with these words. Rather, he speaks from the perspective of the Corinthians or his opponents. He does this to show that these perspectives are wrong. See the notes on each of these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [11:7](../11/07.md), [11](../11/11.md), [22–23](../11/22.md), [29](../11/29.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions or you could express them as statements or exclamations. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### The long list in [11:23–28](../11/23.md)\n\nIn [11:23–28](../11/23.md), Paul gives a long list of hardships and difficulties he has experienced while he preached the good news. The ULT and UST illustrate different ways to break this list up into pieces. Consider how you might naturally express a long list in your language. +11:1 r4q6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foolishness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as I act a little foolishly” or “as I now say what is foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:1 b4dm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μικρόν τι ἀφροσύνης 1 Here, the **foolishness** that Paul refers to is how he is about to boast about his qualifications as an apostle. Paul considers this to be **foolishness**, but he will boast anyways to help the Corinthians realize that he and the gospel that he preaches come from God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make what **foolishness** refers to more explicit. Alternate translation: “as I am about to be a little bit foolish” or “in a little bit of foolishness that I am about to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:1 sou7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλὰ καὶ ἀνέχεσθέ μου 1 Here, this clause could be: (1) a statement of what the Corinthians are already doing, either as they listen to this letter or in the past when Paul visited them. Alternate translation: “but in fact you are already bearing with me” (2) a command to act in this way. Alternate translation: “and in fact you need to bear with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:2 yozf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul will be a little foolish. Alternate translation: “I will be a little bit foolish since” (2) the reason why the Corinthians should bear with Paul. Alternate translation: “I want you to bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +11:2 ubnb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Θεοῦ ζήλῳ 1 Here, the phrase **godly jealousy** could refer to **jealousy**: (1) that is the same **jealousy** that God has. Alternate translation: “with the jealousy that God has” (2) that is from God. Alternate translation: “with jealousy from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:2 m6vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns Θεοῦ ζήλῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **jealousy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a godly way” or “as God is jealous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:2 ee9i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡρμοσάμην γὰρ ὑμᾶς ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ, παρθένον ἁγνὴν παραστῆσαι τῷ Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul speaks as if he is the father of the Corinthians, who together are his daughter. Paul has promised to give his daughter (the Corinthians) as a wife to a man, who is **Christ**. Until that marriage happens, Paul the father must make sure that his daughter (the Corinthians) remains a **pure virgin**. If these customs are somewhat similar to what happens in your culture, you could preserve the metaphor or express the idea with a simile. If these customs are not similar to what happens in your culture, you could explain the ideas more clearly or express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “for I am like your father who has betrothed you to one husband, to present you as a pure virgin to be married to Christ” or “I helped you believe in the Messiah, and I will work hard to help you remain faithful to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:3 ddrl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὡς ὁ ὄφις ἐξηπάτησεν Εὕαν ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 Here Paul refers to a story in [Genesis 3:1–7](../gen/03/01.md). In this story, a **serpent**, whom Paul would have identified as Satan, deceives **Eve**, the first woman, into eating a fruit that God told her not to eat. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit or include a footnote that explains the story. Alternate translation: “as the serpent, Satan, by his craftiness deceived the first woman, Eve, into disobeying God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:3 l2hr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **craftiness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in a crafty way” or “by acting craftily” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:3 m5zn rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φθαρῇ τὰ νοήματα ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people might corrupt your minds” or “some person might corrupt your minds” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:3 ufsj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος 1 The terms **sincerity** and **purity** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “full sincerity” or “complete purity” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +11:3 sgml rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς ἁπλότητος καὶ τῆς ἁγνότητος τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **sincerity** and **purity**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “from how sincere and pure you are to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:3 gl9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῆς εἰς τὸν Χριστόν 1 Here, the phrase **{that are} to Christ** indicates that the **sincerity** and **purity** are directed towards **Christ**. In other words, the Corinthians think with **sincerity** and **purity** in their devotion or loyalty **to Christ**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “that you have for Christ” or “in your faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])\n +11:4 wq57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce a reason why: (1) Paul is afraid that someone will corrupt the Corinthians (see [11:3](../11/03.md)). Alternate translation: “I am afraid of that because” (2) the Corinthians should “bear with” Paul (see [11:1](../11/01.md)), which is that they “bear with” these false teachers. Alternate translation: “You should bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +11:4 era4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ μὲν & ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Here Paul is speaking as if **one coming** to the Corinthians and proclaiming **another Jesus** were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it had already or will actually happen. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you could express the idea by using a word such as “when.” Alternate translation: “when indeed one coming” or “indeed whenever someone comes and” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +11:4 zj79 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 Here Paul could be referring to: (1) any person or group of people. Alternate translation: “anyone coming” or “any person coming” (2) a specific person whom Paul knows about. Alternate translation: “a person coming” or “that person coming” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:4 l7m8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πνεῦμα ἕτερον 1 Here, the phrase **a different spirit** could refer to: (1) an evil **spirit** in contrast to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “a spirit different than the Holy Spirit” (2) an attitude in contrast to the attitude that Paul and his fellow workers offered to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “a different mindset” or “a different attitude” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:4 fs5z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καλῶς ἀνέχεσθε 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:1](../11/01.md). Here Paul means that the Corinthians listen patiently even when false teachers are telling them lies. He does not approve of this behavior, but he uses this clause to link what he is saying here with what he said in [11:1](../11/01.md). Alternate translation: “you willingly put up with it” or “you listen attentively to it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:5 l3on rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a reason why what Paul told them about Jesus, the Spirit, and the gospel (see [11:4](../11/04.md)) takes priority over what anyone else tells them. Alternate translation: “So, what I taught you has priority, since” (2) a reason why they should “bear with” Paul (see [11:1](../11/01.md)). Alternate translation: “Further, I want you to bear with me because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +11:5 ptd7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑστερηκέναι τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων 1 Here Paul speaks as if he is not below or **short of** the **“super-apostles”**. He means that he does not have less power and authority than they do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “to be less than the ‘super-apostles’” or “to have less authority than the ‘super-apostles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:5 eet1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων 1 Here Paul refers to his opponents, the false teachers, with the words that they themselves or their followers used to describe them: **“super-apostles”**. He does not actually believe that these people are better **apostles** or greater than anyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Paul is speaking from someone else’s perspective to make a point. Alternate translation: “of the so-called ‘super-apostles’” or “of those who consider themselves super-apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +11:6 v1o7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **But** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +11:6 qdx9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & καὶ ἰδιώτης 1 Here Paul could be using the phrase **even if I am untrained** to: (1) acknowledge that he is **untrained** in speaking well. Alternate translation: “even though I am untrained” (2) acknowledge that some people think that he is **untrained** in speaking well, even though he does not agree with this. Alternate translation: “even were I untrained” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +11:6 jsrq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ λόγῳ 1 Here Paul is referring to the practice of speaking in public in order to persuade many people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in public speaking” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:6 f8d1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ γνώσει 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **knowledge**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “in knowing the gospel” or “in understanding the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:6 berv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῇ γνώσει 1 Here, the word **knowledge** refers to what a person knows about Jesus and the good news about him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in knowledge about Jesus” or “in knowledge about the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:6 n7xy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν παντὶ & ἐν πᾶσιν 1 Here the phrases **in everything** and **in all things** could indicate that Paul and his coworkers make things **clear**: (1) in every way possible and in everything they say and do. Alternate translation: “in every way … in all we do” (2) in every way possible and among all people. Alternate translation: “in every way … among all people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:6 bb1i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit φανερώσαντες 1 Here Paul implies that what he makes **clear** is that he has **knowledge**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having made the fact that I have knowledge clear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:7 nrmw rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἢ 1 The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul said in the previous verse, where he stated that he has “knowledge” (see [11:6](../11/06.md)). With **Or**, then, Paul introduces a question that raises another possible objection to his authority as an apostle: he did not charge them money for teaching them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express **Or** with a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “But” or “However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +11:7 un9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε, ὅτι δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν? 1 Paul is using the question form to show the Corinthians that he did not **commit a sin**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “But I certainly did not commit a sin, humbling myself so that you yourselves might be exalted, because I preached the gospel of God to you without payment!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +11:7 azyr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν 1 Here Paul refers to how he worked to make money for himself. In his culture, this was **humbling**, since good speakers and teachers would not need to do extra work, because they would make enough money from the people they taught. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “humbling myself by supporting myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:7 yrqv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “I might exalt you yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:7 jhve rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed might be exalted” or “it was you who might be exalted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +11:7 ax51 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **gospel** that could: (1) come from **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel that came from God” (2) come from and be about **God**. Alternate translation: “the gospel from and about God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +11:8 k6ds rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα 1 Here Paul refers to receiving money from **other churches** to support himself as he served the Corinthians as if it were robbery. He means that he received money from these churches and did not give them anything in return, which some people would consider robbery. He uses this strong language to indicate how much he and the **other churches** sacrificed to help the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly indicates that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective and overstating what he means. Alternate translation: “It was as if I robbed other churches” or “Some might say that I robbed other churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +11:8 jqsv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit λαβὼν ὀψώνιον πρὸς τὴν ὑμῶν διακονίαν 1 Here Paul implies that the **other churches** paid him a **wage**, but so that he could serve the Corinthians, not them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having accepted a wage from them but used it for the ministry to you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:9 br6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑστερηθεὶς 1 Here Paul implies that he **lacked** or did not have enough of what he needed to live, including things like food and clothes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “having lacked what is necessary for life” or “having lacked basic necessities” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:9 qj8e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ κατενάρκησα 1 Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy **burden** that he would have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I did not trouble” or “I did not ask for money and so harass” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:9 a23k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul may not only be referring to men. It is possible that he is referring only to men, but he may also include women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “the siblings” or “the brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +11:9 kp9s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:9 fc6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω 1 Here, just as at the beginning of the verse, the **burden** refers to asking for money. Express the idea as you did at the beginning of the verse. Alternate translation: “I did not and will continue not to trouble you” or “I did not and will continue not to ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:9 sqcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω 1 Here Paul is indicating that he was not a **burden** to them when he visited them in the past, and he promises that he will never be a **burden** to them in the future. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “I have kept and will always keep” or “in the past I kept and in the future will keep” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:10 fohm rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ, ὅτι 1 The phrase **The truth of Christ is in me** is an oath formula that Paul uses to show that what he is about to say is true. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “As the truth of Christ is in me,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformula]]) +11:10 si2r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 Here Paul could be using the possessive form to indicate that: (1) he is truthful like **Christ** was truthful. Alternate translation: “I am truthful, like Christ was” (2) he has received **truth** from **Christ**. Alternate translation: “The truth from Christ is in me” (3) he speaks what is true about **Christ**. Alternate translation: “The truth about Christ is in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +11:10 mth0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἔστιν ἀλήθεια Χριστοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “I am as truthful as the Messiah is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:10 t4tt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡ καύχησις αὕτη 1 Here Paul refers to how he boasts about not accepting money from the Corinthians when he told them about the good news. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “this boasting about how I have not burdened you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:10 n60n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ 1 Here Paul speaks as if his **boasting** were a door that **will not be shut to** him. He means that no one will be able to keep him from boasting or prove that what he says is not true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of mine will not be stifled” or “will not be proved wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:10 nae3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ καύχησις αὕτη οὐ φραγήσεται εἰς ἐμὲ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “no one can shut this boasting to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:10 ua2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τοῖς κλίμασι τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 Here Paul refers to the **regions** that together make up the province of **Achaia**. He refers to the **regions** to indicate that there is no place in the entire province in which someone can keep him from boasting or prove what he says wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in all of Achaia” or “in the entire province of Achaia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:11 avdr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ τί 1 Here Paul asks for the reason why he does not “burden” the Corinthians (see [11:9](../11/09.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Why do I not burden you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:11 zqu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διὰ τί? ὅτι οὐκ ἀγαπῶ ὑμᾶς? 1 Paul is using the question form to show the Corinthians that his reason for not burdening them was not that he did not love them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these two questions as statements or as exclamations, or you could combine them into one statement. Alternate translation: “I have a reason for this. However, it is not that I do not love you!” or “My reason is not that I do not love you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +11:11 rj6f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν 1 Here Paul states that **God knows** something. He implies that **God knows** that Paul does in fact love the Corinthians. The phrase **God knows** makes the claim stronger, since **God** is the one who can prove that the claim is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “God himself knows that I love you” or “You can know for sure that I love you, since God knows it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:12 qjqa rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Here, the word **But** introduces the real reason why Paul does not burden the Corinthians, in contrast to the false reason he denied in the previous verse (see [11:11](../11/11.md)). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In contrast,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +11:12 jecy rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃ & ποιῶ, καὶ ποιήσω 1 Here, the phrase **what I do** refers to how Paul does not ask for money from the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the referent for this phrase explicit. Alternate translation: “I will also continue not accepting money from you” or “I will also continue not burdening you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +11:12 d9sl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκόψω 1 Here Paul speaks of removing an **opportunity** as it were cutting off or destroying something. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I may defeat” or “I may remove” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:12 b9rx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται, εὑρεθῶσιν καθὼς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 Here, the word **opportunity** refers to a chance or ability to do something. Paul explains what the **opportunity** relates to by using the clause **that in what they are boasting about they may be found just as we also {are}**. Use a form that clearly introduces what an **opportunity** relates to. Alternate translation: “any opportunity of the ones desiring an opportunity to be found just as we also are in what they are boasting about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:12 x0md rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀφορμὴν τῶν θελόντων ἀφορμήν, ἵνα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **opportunity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what some people want to happen, which is that” or “what is desired by the ones who desire that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:12 rcfo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ᾧ καυχῶνται 1 Here Paul is referring generally to anything a person might boast about. He is not identifying a specific thing that people boast about. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in anything they boast about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:12 t4js rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εὑρεθῶσιν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others might find them” or “people might consider them to be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:13 p77j rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([9:15](../09/15.md)) about people who desire to be equal in boasting with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +11:13 ml66 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns οἱ & τοιοῦτοι 1 The pronoun **ones** refers to the people Paul mentioned in the previous verse who desire to be equal in boasting to Paul. If this is not clear for your readers, you could refer to these people more explicitly. Alternate translation: “people of that kind” or “the ones who desire that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +11:13 y896 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετασχηματιζόμενοι εἰς ἀποστόλους 1 Here Paul means that these **false apostles** intentionally look and act like true apostles, even though they are not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “posing as true apostles” or “acting as if they were apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:14 v9z4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐ θαῦμα 1 Here, the phrase **no wonder** indicates that what Paul just said about people pretending to be apostles should not be surprising. Use a form that expresses this idea clearly. Alternate translation: “that is no surprise” or “we should not be astonished” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +11:14 ss7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς & ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 Here, the word translated **himself** emphasizes **Satan**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **Satan** in your language. Alternate translation: “Satan indeed” or “Satan too” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +11:14 g4ch rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετασχηματίζεται εἰς ἄγγελον φωτός 1 See how you translated the similar phrase at the end of [11:13](../11/13.md). Alternate translation: “poses as an angel of light” or “acts as if he were an angel of light” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:14 zeec rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἄγγελον φωτός 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe an **angel** that is characterized by **light**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a shining angel” or “a bright angel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +11:14 mld4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄγγελον φωτός 1 Here, Paul speaks of the glory and power of an **angel** as if it were **light**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “angel of glory” or “angel of splendor” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:15 lq6b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom οὐ μέγα & εἰ 1 Here, the clause **{it is} no great thing** indicates that what follows is not surprising or shocking but should be expected. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different clause that expresses this idea. Alternate translation: “it should be no shock if” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +11:15 fvx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ μέγα 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **no**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **great thing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +11:15 w2sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it must be true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when” or “that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +11:15 sb58 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μετασχηματίζονται ὡς διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης 1 See how you translated the similar phrase at the end of [11:13](../11/13.md). Alternate translation: “pose as servants of righteousness” or “act as if they were servants of righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:15 unyq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to connect **servants** with **righteousness**. He could be describing **servants**: (1) whose goal is **righteousness**, that is, to make people righteous. Alternate translation: “servants who make people righteous” (2) who serve for the sake of **righteousness**. Alternate translation: “servants for what is right” (3) who are righteous. Alternate translation: “righteous servants” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +11:15 tpjp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns διάκονοι δικαιοσύνης 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **righteousness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Make sure that your translation fits with the interpretation you chose in the previous note. Alternate translation: “servants who make others righteous” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:15 kour rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὧν τὸ τέλος ἔσται κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν 1 Here Paul refers to how these **servants** will in the **end** be judged and punished for their **works**. He does not make it clear whether he is referring to the **end** of their lives or to the **end** of this time, when Jesus comes back. It is recommended that you use a form that refers in general to how people are punished or suffer for the bad things that they do. Alternate translation: “who will in the end get what they deserve” or “who will eventually be punished for what they did” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +11:16 ejcl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλιν 1 Here Paul could be using the word **again** to refer to: (1) what he said in [11:1](../11/01.md) about how he wanted the Corinthians to bear with his foolishness. Alternate translation: “what I have already said” (2) what he said in [11:13–15](../11/13.md) about how he is different from his foolish opponents. Alternate translation: “again what I just said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:16 rlov rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical εἰ & μή 1 Here Paul uses the conditional form to introduce something that he thinks may or may not happen. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces something that could happen. Alternate translation: “even if not” or “were that not to happen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) +11:16 ba48 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis εἰ & μή 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “if you do think me to be foolish” or “if you do not listen to that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +11:16 s962 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γε κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέξασθέ με, ἵνα κἀγὼ μικρόν τι καυχήσωμαι 1 Here Paul wants the Corinthians to let him do what fools do if they think that he is a fool. He implies that people let fools **boast** and say crazy things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “allow me to act like a fool among you so that I too may boast a little bit like fools do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:17 bz16 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ λαλῶ 1 Here Paul refers to what he is about to say in the rest of this chapter and in the following chapter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to what a person is about to say. Alternate translation: “What I am going to say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:17 ejid κατὰ Κύριον 1 Here, the phrase **according to the Lord** could refer to: (1) how someone represents **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “as I speak for the Lord” (2) how **the Lord** spoke. Alternate translation: “in the ways in which the Lord spoke” +11:17 ftvl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foolishness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “a foolish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:17 x6hw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταύτῃ τῇ ὑποστάσει 1 Here, the word **situation** could refer to: (1) what Paul has done that gives him a reason to boast. Alternate translation: “this basis” (2) how Paul is currently in the process of boasting. Alternate translation: “this matter” or “this act” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:17 mfmw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ ὑποστάσει τῆς καυχήσεως 1 Here Paul could be using the possessive to describe: (1) the **situation** that is the basis of or proof for the **boasting**. Alternate translation: “in this situation about which I boast” (2) the **situation** in which he is **boasting**. Alternate translation: “in this situation in which I boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +11:17 jq1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ ὑποστάσει τῆς καυχήσεως 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **situation** and **boasting**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Make sure that your translation fits with the interpretation you chose in the previous notes. Alternate translation: “in what happened that allows me to boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:18 lmaw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj πολλοὶ 1 Paul is using the adjective **many** as a noun in order to refer **many** people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this one with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +11:18 t4ic rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ σάρκα 1 Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking and acting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to what humans value” or “according to a human perspective” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +11:19 asjr rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verses ([11:16–18](../11/16.md)) about how he wants the Corinthians to listen to him even if they think he is foolish. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” or “You can listen to me since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +11:19 si6l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἡδέως & ἀνέχεσθε τῶν ἀφρόνων, φρόνιμοι ὄντες 1 Here Paul speaks from the perspective of some of the Corinthians, who think that they are **wise** and that he is **foolish**. He speaks in this way to show them that how they are thinking is silly and wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that more clearly shows that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “in your view you gladly bear with the foolish, since you think you are wise” or “according to some people, you are wise, so you gladly bear with the foolish” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +11:19 s2at rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀφρόνων 1 Paul is using the adjective **foolish** as a noun to refer to people who are **foolish**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “any foolish person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +11:19 u3m9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result ὄντες 1 Here, the word **being** introduces the basis or reason why the Corinthians can **bear with the foolish**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis. Alternate translation: “since you are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +11:20 c97v rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces examples of what Paul said in the previous verse ([11:19](../11/19.md)) about how the Corinthians “bear with the foolish.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces examples. Alternate translation: “For example,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +11:20 zmfo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἴ τις ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ, εἴ τις κατεσθίει, εἴ τις λαμβάνει, εἴ τις ἐπαίρεται, εἴ τις εἰς πρόσωπον ὑμᾶς δέρει 1 Paul speaks as if these were hypothetical situations, but he means that they have indeed happened. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as simple statements. Alternate translation: “when anyone enslaves you, when anyone devours {you}, when anyone takes advantage {of you}, when anyone exalts {himself}, when anyone hits you in the face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +11:20 lu7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς καταδουλοῖ 1 Here Paul speaks as if some people make the Corinthians into slaves. He means that these people treated them like slaves and made them obey every one of their wishes and commands. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a simile or plain language to express the idea. Alternate translation: “makes you like their slaves” or “causes you to serve them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:20 sr4n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατεσθίει 1 Here Paul speaks as if some people were eating the Corinthians. He means that these people were using up the money and goods the Corinthians had. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language to express the idea. Alternate translation: “consumes you” or “spends everything you have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:20 t27r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐπαίρεται 1 Here Paul implies that these people are exalting themselves over the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “exalts himself over you” or “claims he is greater than you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:20 kn2d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἐπαίρεται 1 Although the term **himself** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Most likely the person who **exalts** would be a man, but Paul is not making this claim. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “exalts himself or herself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +11:20 yn5t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς πρόσωπον ὑμᾶς δέρει 1 Here, the phrase **hits you in the face** could refer to: (1) a direct insult, which is like slapping someone **in the face**. Alternate translation: “acts like they are hitting you in the face” or “strongly insults you” (2) an actual slap on someone’s face. Alternate translation: “slaps you across the face” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:21 n8s9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω ὡς ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν! 1 Here Paul speaks from the perspective of someone who thinks that what Paul spoke about in the previous verse is the right way to show honor and power. What he means is that if his opponents are correct, the way he treated the Corinthians should lead to **dishonor** and show that he is **weak**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking from someone else’s point of view. Alternate translation: “According to those people, I would have to speak according to dishonor, namely that we ourselves have been weak” or “They might say that according to dishonor we ourselves have been weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +11:21 xt0t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω 1 Here, the clause **According to dishonor I speak** means that what Paul is about to say causes **dishonor**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What I speak dishonors me” or “It is dishonorable that I speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +11:21 ei5j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ ἀτιμίαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **dishonor**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “In a way that dishonors me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:21 zjjy λέγω ὡς ὅτι 1 Here, the words translated **namely, that** could: (1) introduce what it is that Paul speaks. Alternate translation: “I speak that” (2) introduce what Paul speaks as something that he does not fully agree with. Alternate translation: “I say that it is possible that” +11:21 rtcf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς ἠσθενήκαμεν 1 Here, the word translated **ourselves** emphasizes **we**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **we** in your language. Alternate translation: “it is we who have been weak” or “we indeed have been weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +11:21 rwgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν ᾧ & ἄν τις τολμᾷ (ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ λέγω), τολμῶ κἀγώ 1 Here, the phrase **I am speaking in foolishness** describes what Paul says in this verse. You can move this clause to wherever is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and I am speaking in foolishness, in whatever {way} anyone might be bold, I too am bold” or “in whatever {way} anyone might be bold, I too am bold, although I am speaking in foolishness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +11:21 v8a3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ᾧ & ἄν τις τολμᾷ & τολμῶ κἀγώ 1 Here Paul speaks about being **bold** while doing anything, but he particularly focuses on being **bold** in boasting. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “in whatever boast anyone might be bold to make … I too am bold to make a boast” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:21 vqbu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀφροσύνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **foolishness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “foolishly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:22 jdq8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion Ἑβραῖοί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. Ἰσραηλεῖταί εἰσιν? κἀγώ. σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ εἰσιν? κἀγώ. 1 Paul is using the question form to compare himself to what his opponents claim to be. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as comparisons or statements. Alternate translation: “If they are Hebrews, I am also. If they are Israelites, I am also. If they are offspring of Abraham, I am also.” or “When they claim to be Hebrews, so do I. When they claim to be Israelites, so do I. When they claim to be offspring of Abraham, so do I.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +11:22 c4zi rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns σπέρμα Ἀβραάμ 1 In this verse, the word **offspring** is singular in form, but it refers to many **offspring** as a group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “members of the offspring of Abraham” or “descended from Abraham” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +11:23 a4tz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ 1 Just as in [11:22](../11/22.md), Paul is using the question form to compare himself to what his opponents claim to be. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these questions as comparisons or statements. Alternate translation: “If they are servants of Christ, (I speak as being insane) I am also.” or “When they claim to be servants of Christ, (I speak as being insane) so do I.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +11:23 pgv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure διάκονοι Χριστοῦ εἰσιν? (παραφρονῶν λαλῶ), ὑπὲρ ἐγώ 1 Here, the clause **I speak {as} being insane** is a parenthetical comment on Paul’s question and answer. You could put the clause wherever it would most naturally appear in your language. Alternate translation: “(I speak {as} being insane.) Are they servants of Christ? I {am} more so” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +11:23 bq23 παραφρονῶν λαλῶ 1 Alternate translation: “I speak like someone who is insane” +11:23 dr6x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν φυλακαῖς περισσοτέρως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **inprisonments**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “more abundantly being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:23 qdcm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πληγαῖς ὑπερβαλλόντως 1 Paul could be describing **beatings** that are **beyond measure** because: (1) Paul was struck or hit many times. Alternate translation: “in beatings with many lashes” or “in frequent beatings” (2) the **beatings** were very severe. Alternate translation: “in very severe beatings” or “in extremely painful beatings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:23 r6jv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν θανάτοις πολλάκις 1 Here, to be in **{danger of} deaths** indicates that Paul was in situations in which he could have died. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea more explicitly. Alternate translation: “often almost dying” or “frequently being near to death” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:23 pf0p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν θανάτοις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **deaths**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about to die” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:24 ttz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν 1 This phrase refers to how in Jewish law a person could be whipped at most 40 times (see [Deuteronomy 25:3](../deu/25/03.md)). Often people would whip a person only 39 times to be sure that they did not go over 40. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this information more explicit or use a footnote to explain the phrase. Alternate translation: “39 lashes, the most they allow” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:25 bwzy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐραβδίσθην 1 Here Paul refers to how the Roman authorities would sometimes punish people. They would have someone hit the person they wished to punish with a wooden stick multiple times. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to that kind of punishment. Alternate translation: “people struck me with wooden sticks” or “Roman leaders punished me by having people hit me with canes” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +11:25 u9xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐραβδίσθην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone beat me with rods” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])\n\n +11:25 xk9w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐλιθάσθην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, you could use an indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “crowds of people stoned me” or “others stoned me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:25 o0zy rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ἐναυάγησα 1 Here Paul refers to how ships that sailed on the ocean could break apart or sink. When this happened, people had to try to survive in the water or swim to shore. Often, many people would die by drowning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this kind of event. Alternate translation: “a ship I was on sank” or “a ship on which I was sailing broke apart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +11:25 q6tl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐναυάγησα 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a ship on which I was sailing wrecked” or “a ship I was on sank” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:25 b4kz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νυχθήμερον 1 Here the phrase **a night and a day** refers to a full period of 24 hours. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this time period. Alternate translation: “a full day” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:25 df3a rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν τῷ βυθῷ 1 Here, the phrase **the deep** refers to the ocean, specifically to the parts of the ocean that are far away from land. Paul means that he was stranded in the ocean water. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to this area of the ocean. Alternate translation: “by myself in the middle of the sea” or “floating on the open sea” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:26 v8gw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὁδοιπορίαις πολλάκις, κινδύνοις 1 Here, the phrase **often in journeys** could: (1) give the situation in which all the other **dangers** occur. Alternate translation: “during my frequent journeys I have been in dangers” (2) be one of the dangerous things Paul is talking about. Alternate translation: “in frequent journeys” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:26 wddz κινδύνοις ποταμῶν, κινδύνοις λῃστῶν, κινδύνοις ἐκ γένους, κινδύνοις ἐξ ἐθνῶν, κινδύνοις ἐν πόλει, κινδύνοις ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, κινδύνοις ἐν θαλάσσῃ, κινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις 1 Here Paul repeats the word **dangers** to emphasize how much danger he was in all the time. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul repeats himself, and if it would not emphasize danger in your language, you could refer to **dangers** once and emphasize the danger in another way. Alternate translation: “in frequent dangers from rivers, from robbers, from my own countrymen, from Gentiles, in the city, in the wilderness, at sea, and from false brothers” +11:26 lp2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κινδύνοις ποταμῶν, κινδύνοις λῃστῶν, κινδύνοις ἐκ γένους, κινδύνοις ἐξ ἐθνῶν, κινδύνοις ἐν πόλει, κινδύνοις ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, κινδύνοις ἐν θαλάσσῃ, κινδύνοις ἐν ψευδαδέλφοις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **dangers**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “being endangered by rivers, being endangered by robbers, being endangered by my own countrymen, being endangered by Gentiles, being endangered in the city, being endangered in the wilderness, being endangered on the sea, being endangered by false brothers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:26 myhk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γένους 1 Here Paul refers to other people from his country and nation. These people would be Jewish people. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “people from my own nation” or “Jews” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:26 b3j9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ψευδαδέλφοις 1 Paul is using the term **false brothers** to mean people who pretend to share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false believers” or “people who falsely claim to be believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:26 m8y5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ψευδαδέλφοις 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “false brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +11:27 fd61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ, ἐν ἀγρυπνίαις πολλάκις, ἐν λιμῷ καὶ δίψει, ἐν νηστείαις πολλάκις, ἐν ψύχει καὶ γυμνότητι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas in this verse, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I labor and toil, often sleep little, am hungry and thirsty, often fast, and am often cold and naked” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:27 lx1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet κόπῳ καὶ μόχθῳ 1 Here, the words translated **hard work** and **hardship** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “difficult labor” or “tiring toil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +11:27 ptq7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γυμνότητι 1 Here, the word **nakedness** refers generally to having too little clothing. It does not necessarily mean that Paul had no clothes at all, although that could have been true sometimes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “without proper clothing” or “being ill-clothed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:28 tq1l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit χωρὶς τῶν παρεκτὸς 1 Here, the phrase **apart from the other things** could be referring to: (1) many other hardships that Paul does not mention. This would mean that he is now going to mention one last hardship. Alternate translation: “besides everything else I suffer” or “beyond any other hardships” (2) the hardships he has already mentioned, which are external. This would mean that he is now going to mention internal hardships. Alternate translation: “apart from those external things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:28 n1q5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **care** and **concern**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “I care every day as I am concerned for all the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:28 zf14 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἡ ἐπίστασίς μοι ἡ καθ’ ἡμέραν, ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 The terms **care** and **concern** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “there is my concern for all the churches every day” or “there is my concerned care every day for all the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +11:28 fhdd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ μέριμνα πασῶν τῶν ἐκκλησιῶν 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **concern** that is directed toward **all the churches**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in a different way. Alternate translation: “the concern for all the churches” or “the concern I have for all the churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +11:29 fvz6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ? 1 Paul is using the question form to show that he is **weak** when other believers are **weak**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “If anyone is weak, I too am weak!” or “I am weak when others are weak!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +11:29 vxw0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τίς ἀσθενεῖ, καὶ οὐκ ἀσθενῶ 1 Here Paul could be indicating that: (1) he sympathizes with people who are **weak** by becoming **weak** himself. Alternate translation: “Who is weak, and I do not sympathize by also being weak” (2) when others are **weak**, it makes Paul **weak** too. Alternate translation: “Who is weak, and I do not become weak as a result” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:29 bdd4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι? 1 Paul is using the question form to show that he is **inflamed** when other believers are **caused to stumble**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “If anyone is caused to stumble, I am inflamed!” or “I am inflamed when others are caused to stumble!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +11:29 ob3m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τίς σκανδαλίζεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whom do others cause to stumble, and I do not become inflamed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:29 xu57 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκανδαλίζεται 1 Here Paul speaks of helping or causing another person to sin as if it were making that person **stumble**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “is caused to sin” or “is led into sin” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:29 g5am rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐγὼ πυροῦμαι? 1 Here Paul speaks as if he were like a fire that could become **inflamed**. He could mean that: (1) he becomes angry in response to people being **caused to stumble**. Alternate translation: “I do not get angry” or “I do not feel fury” (2) he feels sympathy or shares in the stumbling. Alternate translation: “I do not feel sympathy” or “I am not distressed in response” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +11:30 nxh8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “When” or “Because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +11:30 gxe6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **things** about him that are characterized by **weakness**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “weak things about me” or “the weaknesses I have” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +11:30 z8z0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὰ τῆς ἀσθενείας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “things about me that are weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:31 nuc7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Both **God** and **Father** refer to God. This phrase could mean that: (1) God is both **God** and **Father** to our Lord Jesus. Alternate translation: “The God of the Lord Jesus, who is the Father” (2) **God** is **Father** to our Lord Jesus. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +11:31 m5vo rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὁ ὢν 1 Here, the phrase **the one** refers to **The God and Father**. Alternate translation: “the God who is” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +11:31 zpkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὢν εὐλογητὸς 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, Paul implies that everything God created does it.. Alternate translation: “whom all things bless” or “whom all creation blesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:31 mpwu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **eternity**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “at all times” or “eternally” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +11:31 gb7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἶδεν 1 Here Paul states that God **knows** that Paul is **not lying**. The statement that God **knows** makes the claim stronger, since God is the one who can prove that the claim is true. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “he himself knows” or “guarantees” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:31 no05 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 Here Paul could be referring to: (1) what he has already said and what he is about to say. Alternate translation: “I am not lying in what I am saying” (2) what Paul is about to say in the following verses. Alternate translation: “I am not lying in what I will say” (3) what Paul has already said. Alternate translation: “I am not lying in what I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:31 yx8z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 Paul is using a figure of speech here that expresses a strongly positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with an expression that is the opposite of the intended meaning, **lying**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the positive meaning. Alternate translation: “I am definitely speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +11:32 n383 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἁρέτα 1 Here, the word **Aretas** is the name of a man who was a king. He obeyed what the Roman leaders required, and they let him be king over an area that included the city of **Damascus**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +11:32 kwku rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἁρέτα τοῦ βασιλέως 1 Here the phrase **under Aretas the king** indicates that **the ethnarch** was appointed by **Aretas** and did what he said. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “who obeyed Aretas the king” or “who ruled under Aretas the king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:32 j7de rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δαμασκηνῶν 1 Here, the word **Damascenes** refers generally to people who live in the city of **Damascus**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +11:32 cpg2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν πόλιν Δαμασκηνῶν 1 Here, the phrase **the city of Damascenes** is another way to refer to the city **Damascus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could refer to that city in whatever way is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his city” or “the city” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:33 i8xa rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ θυρίδος ἐν σαργάνῃ, ἐχαλάσθην διὰ τοῦ τείχους 1 Here Paul describes how he **escaped** from the city of Damascus (see [Acts 9:23–25](../act/09/23.md)). His friends put him in a **basket**, a large bowl most likely made out of woven rope or plant stems. They attached a rope to the **basket** and **lowered** Paul out a **window** or opening that was in the **wall**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could more explicitly explain how this action was done. Alternate translation: “I was put in a basket and lowered by rope through a window that was in the wall” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +11:33 uk9m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐχαλάσθην 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul implies that friends, who were probably fellow believers, did it. Alternate translation: “friends lowered me” or “other Christians lowered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +11:33 uitt rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 Here, the word **and** introduces what happened as a result of him being **lowered in a basket**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a result. Alternate translation: “so” or “so that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +11:33 aw7d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **his hands** represents the power or servants of the “ethnarch,” that is, the local ruler of the city. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his power” or “the people he sent to seize me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +12:intro abcf 0 # 2 Corinthians 12 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * Paul’s ascent to heaven and the thorn in the flesh (12:1–10)\n * Paul concludes his boasting (12:11–13)\n * Paul defends his financial conduct (12:14–18)\n * Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:19–13:10)\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Paul’s trip to heaven\n\nIn [12:1–6](../12/01.md), Paul speaks about how he temporarily ascended to heaven 14 years before he wrote this letter. He speaks about this experience in the third person to avoid directly boasting about himself. Also, he gives very few details about his experience. He describes how he went to the third heaven and paradise, that he heard words he cannot tell to others, and that he is not sure whether he ascended in his body or without his body (which would be either spiritually or in a dream). Paul gives enough details to show that he really did ascend to heaven, but he does not want to tell the Corinthians about what he learned and saw there. In other words, he only “boasts” about this experience to show the Corinthians that he is truly an apostle even according to their standards. However, he thinks it is better to boast about how Christ works through him when he is weak, which is Christ’s standard for being an apostle.\n\n### The third heaven and Paradise\n\nIn Paul’s culture, many people believed that there were different levels or layers in heaven, but they disagreed on how many levels or layers there were. Some people thought that there was only one layer, while others thought that there were three, five, seven, or ten layers. Because of the various options, we cannot be sure whether the “third heaven” is the highest heaven or whether it is the third out of more layers of heaven. When Paul uses the word “Paradise,” he is most likely referring to the place where believers go after they die and before they resurrect. The way he refers to Paradise could imply either that it is the third heaven or that it is part of the third heaven. However, we cannot be sure about this either. Since we do not know Paul’s view about the layers of heaven or about the location of Paradise, it is best not to include any implied information on these issues in your translation.\n\n### The thorn in the flesh\n\nIn [12:7–8](../12/07.md), Paul refers to a “thorn in the flesh” that was given to him. He further names this “thorn” as a “messenger of Satan.” There are three primary possibilities for what the thorn could be. First, it could be some kind of sickness, disease, or ailment. Second, it could be opposition from other people who wish to stop Paul from preaching the gospel. Third, it could a demon who tries to keep Paul from serving Christ. However, since we do not know anything else about this “thorn,” it is impossible to identify exactly what Paul is writing about. What is clear is that the “thorn” makes Paul’s life difficult and painful. Your translation should be general enough to allow for all of these interpretations since Paul’s language is also this general.\n\n### Financial support for teachers\n\nIn this chapter, Paul continues to state that he did not and will not ask for or receive money and support from the Corinthians. In Paul’s culture, it was common for traveling teachers to ask for and receive money from the people they were teaching, and Paul’s opponents apparently did so. Paul, however, does not do so, and he explains further in this chapter why he acts in that way. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapter.\n\n### Boasting\n\nJust as in the previous two chapters, in this chapter Paul refers multiple times to boasting. In Paul’s culture, not all boasting was considered bad. Instead, there were good and bad kinds of boasting. In these verses, Paul boasts because his opponents, the false teachers, boast. He does not think that this boasting is necessary or good, but he does it to respond to his opponents. Continue to express the idea as you did in the previous chapters. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/boast]])\n\n### Paul’s third visit\n\nIn [12:14](../12/14.md) and in [12:20–21](../12/20.md), Paul refers to visiting the Corinthians for a third time. He had only visited them twice by the time he wrote this letter, but he plans to visit them again. This visit would happen sometime after the Corinthians received this letter. We do know that Paul visited the Corinthians again because he wrote a later letter, Romans, from the city of Corinth.\n\n## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter\n\n### Rhetorical questions\n\nIn [12:13](../12/13.md), [15](../12/15.md), [17–19](../12/17.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. Paul asks these questions to include the Corinthians in what he is arguing, not because he is looking for information. If your language does not use questions in this way, you could include answers to the questions, or you could express them as statements or exclamations. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])\n\n### Irony\n\nMultiple times in this chapter, Paul uses irony. In other words, he speaks words that he does not agree with in order to make a point. In [12:11](../12/11.md), he uses irony when he refers to the false teachers as “super-apostles.” He uses irony again in [12:13](../12/13.md), where he exclaims, “Forgive me this injustice!” He uses irony again in [12:16](../12/16.md), where he says, “I myself did not burden you, but, being crafty, I caught you by deceit.” In each of these verses, he does not actually agree with these words. Rather, he speaks from the perspective of the Corinthians or his opponents. He does this to show that these perspectives are wrong. See the notes on each of these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Paul uses the third person to speak about himself\n\nIn [12:2–5](../12/02.md), Paul speaks about a person whom he knows. This person ascended into heaven and heard amazing things. However, in [12:6–7](../12/06.md), Paul speaks as if these “revelations” were things he himself had experienced. Paul must have been speaking about himself when he referred to a person he knows. Most likely, he does this to avoid directly boasting about himself (see [12:5–6](../12/05.md)). He would rather boast about how Christ gives him power when he is weak. If possible, preserve how Paul speaks about himself in the third person. See the notes on these verses for translation options. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +12:1 e7q7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καυχᾶσθαι & οὐ συμφέρον μέν & δὲ 1 Here, the phrase **not profitable** could go with: (1) **I will go on to visions and revelations of the Lord**. Alternate translation: “to boast: even though it is not profitable,” (2) **It is necessary to boast**. Alternate translation: “to boast, though it is not profitable. But” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +12:1 iur3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐλεύσομαι & εἰς 1 Here Paul speaks of moving on to a new topic as if he were physically moving to a new location. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will now speak about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:1 iwn3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις 1 The terms **visions** and **revelations** mean similar things. It is possible that **visions** refers to experiences in which someone sees amazing things, while **revelations** refers to experiences in which someone learns amazing things in general. Paul uses both words to refer in general to all these kinds of experiences. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express Paul’s general focus with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “revelations” or “various visions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +12:1 rb42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὀπτασίας καὶ ἀποκαλύψεις Κυρίου 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **visions and revelations** that could: (1) come from **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “visions and revelations from the Lord” (2) be about **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “visions and revelations about the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +12:2 n5hz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ πρὸ ἐτῶν δεκατεσσάρων (εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα, ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν), ἁρπαγέντα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἕως τρίτου οὐρανοῦ 1 Here, the clauses **whether in the body, I do not know, or out of the body, I do not know, God knows** interrupt the sentence to indicate that Paul does not know exactly what form the ascent into heaven took. If it would be helpful in your language, you could move these clauses to wherever they would naturally appear in your language. Alternate translation: “Whether this happened in the body, I do not know, or out of the body, I do not know, God knows. However it happened, I know about a man in Christ who was caught up to the third heaven 14 years ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +12:2 cz7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person οἶδα ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ πρὸ ἐτῶν δεκατεσσάρων & ἁρπαγέντα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἕως τρίτου οὐρανοῦ 1 In [12:2–5](../12/02.md), Paul uses the third person to speak about a person who traveled to the **third heaven**. It is clear from [12:6–7](../12/06.md) that he is actually speaking about himself. So, Paul uses the third person to avoid boasting directly about himself. If possible, use the third person in [12:2–5](../12/02.md) and reveal later that Paul himself is this **man**. If necessary, you could reveal in this verse that Paul is speaking about himself. Make sure your translation here fits with how you translate [12:3–5](../12/03.md). Alternate translation: “I know a man in Christ … such a man having been caught up to the third heaven 14 years ago. That man is me.” or “I know a man in Christ, that is, me … I was caught up to the third heaven 14 years ago” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +12:2 fawy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἄνθρωπον ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, indicates that the **man** believes in Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that refers to a believer or Christian. Alternate translation: “man united to Christ” or “a believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:2 fth2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα 1 Here Paul refers to a common question related to stories about people traveling to heaven: in what way does the person ascend into heaven? There were three primary ways a person could ascend: they could go into heaven physically in their body, they could go into heaven in a dream, or they could go into heaven with only their non-physical part, that is, their spirit. Here Paul indicates that he does not know in what way the **man in Christ** ascended into heaven. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “whether in bodily form, I do not know, or not in bodily form, I do not know” or “whether physically, I do not know, or spiritually, I do not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:2 da25 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet εἴτε ἐν σώματι οὐκ οἶδα, εἴτε ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα 1 Here Paul repeats **I do not know** in order to emphasize his lack of knowledge. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “whether in the body or out of the body, I certainly do not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +12:2 dg7e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἁρπαγέντα τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul implies that it was God. Alternate translation: “God having caught up such a man” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:2 k4aw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἕως τρίτου οὐρανοῦ 1 Many people in Paul’s culture believed that the space that they called “heaven” contained multiple layers or spheres of individual heavens. Here, Paul refers to the **third heaven**. Since he does not specify how many heavens he thinks there are, it is best not to clarify whether this is the highest heaven or not. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers more clearly to the **third** out of multiple heavens. Alternate translation: “up to the third out of multiple heavens” or “into the third sphere of heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:3 notz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 Here, the word **And** introduces a restatement of the previous verse with some new information. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a restatement. Alternate translation: “I repeat,” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:3 idrl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ οἶδα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἄνθρωπον (εἴτε ἐν σώματι εἴτε χωρὶς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα, ὁ Θεὸς οἶδεν), 1 Just as in the previous verse, the clauses **whether in body, or out of the body, I do not know, God knows** interrupt the main sentence, which continues into the next verse. Use the same form you used in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Whether this happened in the body or out of the body, I do not know, God knows. However it happened, I know about such a man,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +12:3 pkl5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person οἶδα τὸν τοιοῦτον ἄνθρωπον 1 Here Paul continues to speak about himself in the third person. Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to translate [12:2](../12/02.md). Alternate translation: “I know that such a man, that is, me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +12:3 ow23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἴτε ἐν σώματι εἴτε χωρὶς τοῦ σώματος οὐκ οἶδα 1 Here Paul again addresses the question about whether the **man** went into heaven in bodily form or not. He uses almost the same words he used in [12:2](../12/02.md), although he does not repeat **I do not know** here. Translate these words as you did in [12:2](../12/02.md). Alternate translation: “whether in bodily form or not in bodily form, I do not know” or “whether physically or spiritually, I do not know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:4 wm7y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον, καὶ ἤκουσεν ἄρρητα ῥήματα, ἃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι 1 Here Paul continues to speak about himself in the third person. Make sure that your translation fits with how you chose to translate [12:2–3](../12/02.md). Alternate translation: “he, by which I mean I, was caught up into Paradise and heard inexpressible words which are not permitted for a man to speak” or “he was caught up into Paradise and heard inexpressible words which are not permitted for a man to speak. Again, that man is me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +12:4 qv5h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡρπάγη εἰς τὸν Παράδεισον, καὶ ἤκουσεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul implies that it was God. Alternate translation: “God caught him up into Paradise and he heard” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:4 ic45 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὸν Παράδεισον 1 Here, the word **Paradise** refers to a place in heaven where those who have trusted in God live after they die and before Jesus comes back. Paul does not explicitly state whether **Paradise** is the “third heaven” or, more likely, within the “third heaven.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the place where believing people go immediately after they die. Alternate translation: “the place of the believing dead” or “the abode of the dead in heaven” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +12:4 rdqr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet ἄρρητα ῥήματα, ἃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι 1 The terms **inexpressible** and **which are not permitted for a man to speak** mean similar things. It is possible that **inexpressible** indicates that people are unable to speak these amazing **words**, and **which are not permitted** indicates that God does not allow people to speak these **words**. If you do not have clear ways to express these two ideas and if it would be helpful in your language, you could express the general idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “words which a man cannot speak” or “amazing and unrepeatable words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +12:4 jwof rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἃ οὐκ ἐξὸν ἀνθρώπῳ λαλῆσαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is God. Alternate translation: “which a man cannot speak” or “which God does not permit a man to speak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:4 dlb1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώπῳ 1 Although the term **man** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “for a human” or “for a person” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +12:5 hpq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person ὑπὲρ τοῦ τοιούτου, καυχήσομαι, ὑπὲρ δὲ ἐμαυτοῦ, οὐ καυχήσομαι 1 Here Paul finishes talking about himself in the third person. It is clear here that he does so in order to avoid boasting about himself. Make sure that your translation fits with how you translated [12:2–4](../12/02.md). If you have not yet revealed that Paul is speaking about himself, this verse may be a good time to do so. Alternate translation: “On behalf of such a man, who is really myself, I will boast. But on behalf of myself I will not directly boast” or “Since I am that man, I could boast about myself. However, I will not boast about myself” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +12:5 i12f rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions οὐ καυχήσομαι, εἰ μὴ ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I will only boast in my weaknesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +12:5 y3cw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weaknesses**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “about how weak I am” or “about the many ways in which I am weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:6 a61a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a further explanation of what Paul said in the previous verse ([12:5](../12/05.md)). He wishes to say that he could properly boast about the man who ascended to heaven, since that man is himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces further explanation. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:6 pkx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary ἐὰν & θελήσω καυχήσασθαι, οὐκ ἔσομαι ἄφρων, ἀλήθειαν γὰρ ἐρῶ 1 Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he already knows that the condition is not true. He has decided that he will not **boast**. However, he wants to speak about what would be true if he did actually **boast**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker knows is not true. Alternate translation: “were I actually to desire to boast, I would not be a fool, for I would be speaking the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +12:6 adg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀλήθειαν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:6 pc8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis φείδομαι 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I refrain from boasting” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +12:6 krnt rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εἰς ἐμὲ λογίσηται ὑπὲρ 1 Here, the phrase **think more of me** refers to how people can think a person is greater or more powerful than they actually are. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that makes this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “would consider me to be greater than” or “would think more highly of me than” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:6 p8fm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὃ βλέπει με, ἢ ἀκούει ἐξ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Paul refers to what people can observe him doing and saying. He wants people to think about him only based on what they see him doing and hear him saying. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “what he sees me do or hears me say” or “what he knows about my deeds and words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:6 m57l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations βλέπει 1 Although the term **he** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “he or she” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +12:7 v5s7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure καὶ τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων, διὸ ἵνα μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι 1 Here, the phrase **because of the surpassing {nature} of the revelations** could go with: (1) this verse. In this case, the word **therefore** is in an unusual position in the middle of the sentence, and you may need to move it to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore, because of the surpassing nature of revelations, so that I would not become super arrogant” (2) the end of the previous verse. If you follow this interpretation, you will need to end the previous verse with no punctuation. Alternate translation: “and also because of the surpassing nature of the revelations. Therefore, so that I would not become super arrogant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +12:7 xxi2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ἀποκαλύψεων 1 Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe the **revelations** as **surpassing**. He could mean that the **revelations**: (1) were very great. Alternate translation: “because of how amazing the revelations were” (2) were very many. Alternate translation: “because of how many revelations I received” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +12:7 hu8g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐδόθη μοι σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God gave me a thorn in the flesh” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:7 q5e7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί 1 Here Paul speaks as if a **thorn** was stabbing him in the **flesh**. He could mean that: (1) he had a sickness or ailment that affected his **flesh**, that is, his body. Alternate translation: “a thorn in the flesh, that is, sickness,” (2) people opposed him and his ministry. Alternate translation: “a thorn in the flesh, that is, people opposing me,” (3) a demon attacked him. Alternate translation: “a thorn in the flesh, that is, a demon,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:7 q7lz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἄγγελος Σατανᾶ 1 Here Paul refers to a **messenger** or angel that came from or was sent by **Satan**, the devil. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Satan’s angel” or “someone sent by Satan” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:7 c09d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κολαφίζῃ 1 Here Paul speaks as if the **messenger of Satan** were physically buffeting or hitting him. He means that the **messenger** caused him to suffer in some physical way. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea in plain language. Alternate translation: “he might hurt” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:7 ehp9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἵνα μὴ ὑπεραίρωμαι 2 Here most ancient manuscripts include the clause **so that I would not become super arrogant**. The ULT follows that reading. Some ancient manuscripts do not have this clause. Most likely, this clause was accidentally omitted because Paul had already said it once. So, it is recommended that you use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +12:8 jbne rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τούτου 1 Here, the word **this** could refer: (1) generally to what Paul described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this situation” (2) to the “messenger of Satan.” Alternate translation: “this messenger of Satan” (3) to the “thorn in the flesh.” Alternate translation: “this thorn” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +12:8 n76p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo ὑπὲρ τούτου & ἵνα ἀποστῇ ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here Paul refers both to what he **begged the Lord** about (**this**) and what he wanted the Lord to do (**that he would remove {it} from me**). If referring to both of these things would be redundant in your language, and if it would be helpful, you could combine **about this** with **that he would remove {it} from me**. Alternate translation: “that he would remove this from me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]]) +12:8 wc7r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀποστῇ 1 Here, the subject of **remove** could be: (1) the **Lord**, who can **remove** the thorn and the suffering it causes. Alternate translation: “he would take it away” (2) the thorn, or messenger of Satan, which can **remove** itself from Paul. Alternate translation: “it would depart” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:9 di10 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations εἴρηκέν μοι 1 Here Paul repeats what the Lord said in response to his prayer that the thorn and its suffering be taken away. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that introduces the answer to a question or prayer. Alternate translation: “he has answered me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +12:9 km91 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations μοι, ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου, ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται 1 It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. If you use the following alternate translation, you will need to remove the quotation marks. Alternate translation: “to me that his grace is enough for me, for his power is being made perfect in weakness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +12:9 nr2j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου, ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace**, **power**, and **weakness**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “How I act graciously is enough for you, for when people are weak, I perfect how powerfully I work through them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:9 axcg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σοι 1 Because God is speaking to one person, Paul, the pronoun **you** in the quotation is singular. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) +12:9 cs63 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the Lord. Alternate translation: “for I make my power perfect in weakness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:9 t5um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μᾶλλον & ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις μου 1 Here, the phrase **even more** could indicate that Paul will: (1) boast more in his **weaknesses** than he has already. Alternate translation: “more than I already have in my weaknesses” (2) boast in his **weaknesses** rather than praying for the removal of the thorn. Alternate translation: “in my weaknesses rather than asking God to remove them” (3) boast in his **weaknesses** rather than in his strengths. Alternate translation: “in my weaknesses rather than in my strengths” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:9 usod rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ταῖς ἀσθενείαις μου, ἵνα ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **weaknesses** and **power**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “about how weak I am so that Christ will reside upon me to empower me” or “in how weak I am so that Christ will give his power to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:9 adcs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “power from Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +12:9 g8mi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ 1 Here Paul speaks as if **the power of Christ** were a person who could **reside** in or **upon** Paul, who is pictured like a tent or house. He means that **the power of Christ** consistently becomes part of his life and is something that he can always have. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a similar figure of speech or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “might live in me” or “might always be with me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:10 pxf1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit εὐδοκῶ 1 Here Paul means that he is content with these bad experiences and is even happy that he experiences them, because Christ works through him when these bad things happen. He does not mean that he enjoys the bad experiences themselves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I rejoice when I live” or “I am content to suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:10 s5sx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas in this clause, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “in being weak, in being insulted, in being coerced, in being persecuted and distressed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:10 xl8q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ 1 Here, the phrase **for the sake of Christ** could go with: (1) the entire list of bad experiences. Alternate translation: “in weaknesses, in insults, in hardships, in persecutions and distresses whenever I experience them for the sake of Christ” (2) the verb **take delight**. Alternate translation: “for the sake of Christ in weaknesses, in insults, in hardships, in persecutions and distresses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +12:10 t7qg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul takes **delight** in these bad experiences. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces a reason or basis for a claim. Alternate translation: “that is because” or “I do that since” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +12:11 a1ym rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit γέγονα ἄφρων 1 Here Paul means that he has spoken in **foolish** ways in the previous several chapters. He does not mean that he is always a **foolish** person. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “I have been talking in foolish ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:11 pzw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε 1 Here Paul means is that reason why he had to speak in **foolish** ways is that the Corinthians were behaving wrongly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “the way you are acting has compelled me to do so” or “how you are behaving has made me act this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:11 bkxl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς με ἠναγκάσατε 1 Here, the word translated **yourselves** emphasizes **you**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **you** in your language. Alternate translation: “you indeed compelled me” or “it is you who compelled me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +12:11 c25h rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces an explanation of how the Corinthians **compelled** Paul to be foolish. He goes on to explain that they should have been commending him, but they have not done so. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “That is because” or “You compelled me because, although it has not happened,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:11 v2lr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ὤφειλον ὑφ’ ὑμῶν συνίστασθαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you ought to commend me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:11 rada rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑστέρησα 1 Here Paul could be using the past tense because: (1) he is referring to the time when he was with the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “when I visited you, I lacked” (2) he is speaking of what is generally true. Alternate translation: “I lack” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:11 h4d5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐδὲν & ὑστέρησα τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative verb **lacked** and the negative word **nothing**. Alternate translation: “I have everything that the ‘super-apostles’ have” or “I am just as good as the ‘super-apostles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +12:11 s82x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τῶν ὑπέρλίαν ἀποστόλων 1 Here Paul refers to his opponents, the false teachers, with the words that they themselves or their followers used to describe them: **“super-apostles”**. He does not actually believe that these people are better apostles or greater than anyone else. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Paul is speaking from someone else’s perspective to make a point. See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:5](../11/05.md). Alternate translation: “of the so-called ‘super-apostles’” or “of those who consider themselves ‘super-apostles’” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +12:11 v4xc rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ καὶ 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could use a word or phrase that introduces something that is contrasting but true. Alternate translation: “although” or “despite the fact that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +12:11 ulah rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole οὐδέν εἰμι 1 Here Paul speaks as if he were actually **nothing**. What he means is that he himself is not great or powerful at all without Christ working through him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea plainly. Alternate translation: “I am worthless on my own” or “I myself have no power or authority” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +12:12 i6sk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases μὲν 1 Here, the word translated **Indeed** could: (1) connect this sentence to the previous claim that Paul is equal to the “super-apostles.” You could use a word or phrase that links two statements, or you could leave **Indeed** untranslated. Alternate translation: “In fact” (2) introduce the first part of a contrast. In this case, Paul does not directly state the second half of the contrast. He would be implying that they did not pay attention to these **signs**. Alternate translation: “Although you did not pay attention to them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:12 fgc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὰ & σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **signs** that prove that someone is **an apostle**. If this is not clear in your language, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the signs that show that someone is an apostle” or “signs that go along with true apostles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +12:12 kp5l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τὰ & σημεῖα τοῦ ἀποστόλου κατειργάσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) he performed the **signs**. Alternate translation: “I performed the signs of an apostle” (2) God performed the **signs** through him. Alternate translation: “God performed the signs of an apostle through me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:12 t05n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ὑπομονῇ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **endurance**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “without ceasing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:12 dnle rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὑπομονῇ— σημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν 1 Here, the list, **both signs and wonders and miracles**, could be: (1) examples of what the **signs of an apostle** were. Alternate translation: “endurance, which included both signs and wonders and miracles” (2) the ways in which Paul demonstrated the **signs of an apostle**. Alternate translation: “endurance, shown through signs and wonders and miracles” or “endurance with both signs and wonders and miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:12 d4um rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet σημείοις τε, καὶ τέρασιν, καὶ δυνάμεσιν 1 Here Paul uses three similar words to describe supernatural acts that God empowered Paul to do. The word **signs** emphasizes that these acts reveal something; the word **wonders** emphasizes that these acts are amazing or unusual; the word **miracles** emphasizes that these acts are powerful. Paul uses these three words to show that he performed various acts that showed that he was an apostle. If your language does not have different words that emphasize these three aspects of the supernatural acts, you could combine two or all three of these words into one word or phrase and emphasize the variety in another way. Alternate translation: “many and various miracles” or “both many signs and various miracles” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +12:13 aclx rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γάρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces another reason why the Corinthians should consider Paul to be trustworthy. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces another reason, or you could leave **For** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Even more,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:13 sy7v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony τί & ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν? χαρίσασθέ μοι τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην! 1 Here Paul speaks from the perspective of his opponents, who tell the Corinthians that Paul has committed an **injustice** in treating them **worse** than the other churches by not asking them for money. He speaks from their perspective to show the Corinthians that this perspective is foolish and wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “people say that you were treated worse than the remaining churches because I myself did not burden you. If that is true, you need to forgive me for this injustice.” or “what is the way that you were treated worse than the remaining churches? The only way I treated you differently was by not burdening you. If people call that an injustice, please forgive me for it!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +12:13 z35e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion τί & ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν? 1 Paul is using the question form to show the Corinthians that he treated them like all the other churches except for not asking for money. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or a negation. Alternate translation: “I did not treat you worse than the remaining churches except that I myself did not burden you.” or “Besides not burdening you, I treated you just as well as the remaining churches.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +12:13 tctz rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions τί & ἐστιν ὃ ἡσσώθητε ὑπὲρ τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας, εἰ μὴ ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν 1 If, in your language, it would appear that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “beyond the fact that I myself did not burden you, what is the way that you were treated worse than the remaining churches” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]]) +12:13 pr0h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡσσώθητε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “I treated you worse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])\n\n +12:13 skav rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰς λοιπὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Here Paul refers to the other **churches** that he works with. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to other churches that Paul knows and helps. Alternate translation: “the other churches that I serve” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:13 d426 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αὐτὸς ἐγὼ οὐ κατενάρκησα ὑμῶν 1 Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy **burden** that he would have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. See how you translated the similar phrase in [11:9](../11/09.md). Alternate translation: “I myself did not trouble you” or “I myself did not ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:13 k7a2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐγὼ 1 Here, the word translated **myself** emphasizes **I**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **I** in your language. Alternate translation: “I, for one,” or “I indeed” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +12:13 u1w9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἀδικίαν ταύτην 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **injustice**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for acting unjustly” or “for doing what is unjust” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:14 g8mz rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations ἰδοὺ 1 Here, the word **Behold** draws the attention of the audience and asks them to listen carefully. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that asks the audience to listen, or you could use another form that draws the audience’s attention to the statement that follows. Alternate translation: “Listen to this” or “Hear this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) +12:14 ngzf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ καταναρκήσω 1 Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy **burden** that he could have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. See how you translated the similar phrase in [12:13](../12/13.md). Alternate translation: “I will not trouble you” or “I will not ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:14 vqbg rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** introduces a reason why Paul **will not burden** the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a reason for a previous claim. Alternate translation: “I will not burden you, because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +12:14 qchp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ ὑμῶν, ἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul contrasts **the things** that the Corinthians have, or their possessions, with the Corinthians themselves. What he means is that he does not want the money and possessions that the Corinthians have. Instead, he wants the Corinthians themselves; that is, he wants them to trust him and Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make the ideas more explicit. Alternate translation: “the things you own, but your loyalty” or “your possessions, but your trust in the Messiah and in me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:14 ugk1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ ὑμᾶς 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You could supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “but I seek you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +12:14 pzkf rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 2 Here, the word **For** introduces an example that illustrates why Paul acts as he does. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an example. Alternate translation: “As an illustration of this,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:14 zsq6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure οὐ γὰρ ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν, ἀλλὰ οἱ γονεῖς τοῖς τέκνοις 1 If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse the two clauses here. Alternate translation: “For the parents should store up for the children, not the children for the parents” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +12:14 ne5v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ γὰρ ὀφείλει τὰ τέκνα τοῖς γονεῦσιν θησαυρίζειν, ἀλλὰ οἱ γονεῖς τοῖς τέκνοις 1 Here Paul speaks of himself as a parent and the Corinthians as his **children**. In Paul’s culture, **parents** generally saved money for their **children** to use. Paul uses this custom to illustrate how he, as a parent, should be giving to the Corinthians instead of the Corinthians, as children, giving to him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that indicates that Paul is speaking of himself as a parent and the Corinthians as children. Alternate translation: “For children, like you, should not store up for your parents, like me. Rather, the parents, like me, should store up for the children, like you.” or “For I am like your parent, and you are like my children. Children should not store up for the parent, but the parent for the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:14 wd97 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis οἱ γονεῖς τοῖς τέκνοις 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “the parents should store up for the children” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +12:15 s237 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 Here, the word **Now** introduces a development of the ideas from the previous verse. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a development, or you could leave **Now** untranslated. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:15 vj2m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἥδιστα δαπανήσω καὶ ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι 1 Here Paul speaks as if his energy, time, and even he himself were money that he or someone else could **spend**. He means that he is willing to use all his energy and time and even to experience hardships and difficulties to help the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will most gladly exhaust everything I have and be completely exhausted” or “I will most gladly use all my resources and be completely worn out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:15 kqgk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐκδαπανηθήσομαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, Paul could be implying that: (1) experiences and other people do it to him. Alternate translation: “allow other people to completely spend me” or “let external things completely spend me” (2) he does it to himself. Alternate translation: “completely wear myself out” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:15 nk8v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 Here, the phrase **your souls** represents the Corinthians. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “for your sake” or “for the sake of your lives” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +12:15 t3na rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion εἰ περισσοτέρως ὑμᾶς ἀγαπῶν, ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι? 1 Paul is using the question form to rebuke the Corinthians for loving him **less** when he loves them **more abundantly**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a rebuke or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Since I love you more abundantly, I should not be loved less.” or “Given that I love you more abundantly, I should not be loved less!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +12:15 e16a rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ & ἀγαπῶν 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “Since I love” or “Given that I love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +12:15 gjbk rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants ἀγαπῶν 1 Many ancient manuscripts read **loving**. The ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “I love.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of the ULT. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])\n +12:15 j887 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit περισσοτέρως & ἧσσον 1 Here Paul uses two comparison words without indicating exactly what he is comparing. He could mean that: (1) his love is increasing in comparison to the Corinthians’ love, which is decreasing. Alternate translation: “more than ever … less than ever” (2) he has much love, while the Corinthians have little love. Alternate translation: “greatly … only a little” (3) his love for them is greater than his love for other churches, while the Corinthians love him less than other churches do. Alternate translation: “more abundantly than I love other churches … less than they love me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:15 u9y0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἧσσον ἀγαπῶμαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it is the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “am I to receive less love” or “are you going to love me less” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:16 gvv4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔστω δέ, ἐγὼ οὐ κατεβάρησα ὑμᾶς; ἀλλὰ 1 Here, the phrase **But let it be {so}** indicates that something is agreed upon or certainly true. Paul could be referring to: (1) what he is about to say about not being a **burden** to the Corinthians. He means that he and the Corinthians can agree about that. Alternate translation: “But here is what we can agree on: I myself did not burden you. However” (2) what he said in the previous verse about loving the Corinthians, although he may be loved less. He means that even if that is true, he will still not **burden** the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “Besides all that, I myself did not burden you. However,” or “Even if that has happened, I myself did not burden you. However,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:16 binl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἐγὼ οὐ κατεβάρησα 1 Here, the word translated **myself** emphasizes **I**. Consider using a natural way to emphasize **I** in your language. Alternate translation: “I indeed did not burden” or “as for me, I did not burden” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +12:16 mnvm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ οὐ κατεβάρησα ὑμᾶς 1 Here Paul speaks of asking for money as if it were a heavy **burden** that he would have asked the Corinthians to carry for him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a comparable figure of speech or plain language. See how you translated the similar phrase in [12:14](../12/14.md). Alternate translation: “I myself did not trouble you” or “I myself did not ask for money and so harass you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:16 jl3g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony ἀλλὰ ὑπάρχων πανοῦργος δόλῳ, ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον 1 Here Paul speaks from the perspective of either the Corinthians of the opponents. They may think or say that Paul was **crafty** and **caught** them **by deceit**. He speaks from their perspective so that he can respond to this claim in the following verses. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that clearly expresses that Paul is speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “but someone may say that I, being crafty, caught you by deceit” or “but you may think that I caught you by deceit, being crafty” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) +12:16 ur5x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς ἔλαβον 1 Here Paul speaks of deceiving or tricking the Corinthians as if he were physically grabbing them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. See the similar phrase “takes advantage” in [11:20](../11/20.md). Alternate translation: “I took advantage of you” or “I cheated you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:16 so24 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δόλῳ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **deceit**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “by being deceitful” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:17 vb7q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μή τινα ὧν ἀπέσταλκα πρὸς ὑμᾶς, δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐπλεονέκτησα ὑμᾶς? 1 Paul is using the question form to deny that any person he has sent to the Corinthians has cheated them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a negation or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “I have not taken advantage of you through anyone whom I have sent to you!” or “There is no one whom I have sent to you through whom I took advantage of you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +12:17 nex4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations αὐτοῦ 1 Although the term **him** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Most likely any person whom Paul **sent** would be a man, but Paul is not making this claim. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “him or her” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +12:18 psbo rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit παρεκάλεσα Τίτον καὶ συναπέστειλα τὸν ἀδελφόν 1 Here Paul refers to a trip Titus took previously to visit the Corinthians. He is probably referring to the visit he mentions in [8:6](../08/06.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a form that refers to a trip that has already been completed. Alternate translation: “I urged Titus to go to you previously, and I sent the other brother with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:18 urtj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo τὸν ἀδελφόν 1 Here Paul assumes that the Corinthians know who this **brother** is, so he does not name him. Since we do not know who this person was, you should not make the idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “a brother” or “the brother you know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +12:18 kmt8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφόν 1 Paul is using the term **brother** to mean a person who shares the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the other believer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:18 pjl2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion μήτι ἐπλεονέκτησεν ὑμᾶς Τίτος? 1 Paul is using the question form to remind the Corinthians that **Titus** did not take advantage of them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You remember that Titus did not take advantage of you.” or “Titus did not take advantage of you!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +12:18 rjiy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν? 1 Paul is using the question form to remind the Corinthians that Titus behaved in the same ways that Paul did. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate these as statements or exclamations. Alternate translation: “You remember that we walked in the same spirit, and we walked in the same footsteps.” or “We walked in the same spirit! We walked in the same footsteps!” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +12:18 k6b3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ & περιεπατήσαμεν οὐ 1 Here, the word **we** refers to Titus and Paul only. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “Did Titus and I not walk … Did Titus and I not walk” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:18 acg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι περιεπατήσαμεν 1 Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were walking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Did we not behave according to the same spirit” or “Did we not live in the same spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:18 f4e0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τῷ αὐτῷ πνεύματι 1 Here, the word **spirit** could refer to: (1) the **spirit** of a person, which refers to the inner life of a person, that is, how that person thinks, feels, and makes decisions. Alternate translation: “in the same mind” or “in the same heart” (2) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the same Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:18 oket rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἴχνεσιν? 1 Here Paul speaks as if he and Titus walked on the same path so closely together that the person walking behind stepped in the **footsteps** of the person in front. He means that they did and said very similar things. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Did we not act in the same ways” or “Did we not behave in very similar ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:19 g1iw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion πάλαι δοκεῖτε ὅτι ὑμῖν ἀπολογούμεθα? 1 Paul is using the question form to deny that what he has said is primarily for the purpose of **defending ourselves**. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Do not think that all of this time we have been defending ourselves to you!” or “I want you to realize that all of this time we have not been defending ourselves to you.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +12:19 m3vx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πάλαι 1 Here, the phrase **all of this time** refers to everything that Paul has written so far in this letter. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “throughout this letter” or “while you listened to what we have said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:19 ih3e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 Here, just as with the phrase “in the presence of God” in [2:17](../02/17.md), the phrase **Before God** could indicate that: (1) Paul and his fellow workers speak as they do because they know that God sees or knows what they do. So, they speak in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “As God desires” or “With God watching” (2) Paul and his fellow workers speak with God as a witness guaranteeing what they say. Alternate translation: “With God as witness” or “With God guaranteeing it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:19 hcor rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with **Christ**. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains that Paul and his fellow workers speak from their perspective as those united to Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a phrase that indicates this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and in union with Christ” or “and because of being united to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:19 y0fs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὰ & πάντα 1 Here, the phrase **all these things** refers primarily to what Paul has written in this letter so far. However, it also includes everything that Paul and his fellow workers say and do. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “all the things we say and do, including in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:19 oqmw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγαπητοί 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself loves them. Alternate translation: “people whom I love” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +12:19 vg3u rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὑπὲρ τῆς ὑμῶν οἰκοδομῆς 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the Corinthian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more natural metaphor for this or you could state the meaning plainly. See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “are to help you become more faithful to Christ” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +12:20 fqdk rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 Here, the word **For** could introduce: (1) a reason why Paul has written what he has in this letter. Alternate translation: “I have written these things because” (2) a reason why Paul wants to build them up. Alternate translation: “I want to build you up because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +12:20 cu6s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐχ οἵους θέλω & οἷον οὐ θέλετε 1 Here Paul refers to how both he and the Corinthians have ideas about how they think the other person should be behaving. He fears that these ideas will not be accurate. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this idea more explicit. Alternate translation: “not such as I expect … not such as you expect” or “not what I want you to be like … not what you want me to be like” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:20 zy6g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis θέλετε; μή πως 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you wish; I fear that somehow there may be” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +12:20 aw5n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μή πως ἔρις 1 Here Paul implies that they are doing all these wrong things within their own group. He does not mean that they are doing these things to people outside their group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could make this more explicit. Alternate translation: “that, within your group, somehow there may be quarreling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:20 rh1h rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μή πως ἔρις, ζῆλος, θυμοί, ἐριθεῖαι, καταλαλιαί, ψιθυρισμοί, φυσιώσεις, ἀκαταστασίαι 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for any of the ideas in this list, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “that somehow you may be quarrelsome, jealous, angry, competitive, slanderous, gossiping, proud, and disruptive” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +12:21 ddw3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis μὴ 1 Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if it would be clearer in your language (see [12:20](../12/20.md)). Alternate translation: “and I fear that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +12:21 blba rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure πάλιν ἐλθόντος μου, ταπεινώσῃ με ὁ Θεός μου 1 Here the word **again** could go with: (1) **I come**. In this case, Paul is speaking about how he plans to visit the Corinthians a third time. Alternate translation: “when I come yet again, my God might humble me” (2) **God might humble me**. In this case, Paul means that God may **humble** him again, just as he did when Paul visited the Corinthians previously (see [2:1](../02/01.md)). Alternate translation: “when I come, my God might humble me again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +12:21 ozce rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ταπεινώσῃ με ὁ Θεός μου πρὸς ὑμᾶς, καὶ 1 Here Paul could be implying that God will **humble** him: (1) because he would feel ashamed about how the Corinthians were acting. Alternate translation: “my God might humble me by making me feel shame about you, and” (2) because he would have to use his authority for tearing down instead of building up. Alternate translation: “my God might humble me before you by making me punish you, and” (3) because he would **mourn** publicly. Alternate translation: “my God might humble me before you because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +12:21 knmg rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish ὁ Θεός μου 1 When Paul speaks of **my God**, he does not mean that this is a different **God** than the one the Corinthians believe in. Rather, he simply wishes to state that this **God** is his God. If the phrase **my God** sounds like it makes a distinction between Paul’s God and the Corinthians’ God, you could express the idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the God I serve” or “our God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +12:21 hq1e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ 1 The terms **impurity**, **sexual immorality**, and **debauchery** mean similar things. Paul is using the three terms together to include all types of sexual sin. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with two words or a single phrase. Alternate translation: “the debauchery and sexual immorality” or “the many kinds of sexual immorality” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +12:21 rh22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, καὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ ἀσελγείᾳ, ᾗ ἔπραξαν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **impurity**, **immorality**, and **debauchery**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “from acting in impure ways and doing sexually immoral things and enjoying indecent actions” or “from acting in impure and sexually immoral and indecent ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +13:intro abcg 0 # 2 Corinthians 13 General Notes\n\n## Structure and Formatting\n\n7. Paul defends his apostolic authority (10:1–13:10)\n * Paul warns the Corinthians about his third visit (12:19–13:10)\n8. Closing (13:11–13)\n\nIn this chapter, Paul finishes defending his authority. He then concludes the letter with a final greeting and blessing.\n\n## Special Concepts in this Chapter\n\n### Preparation\n\nPaul instructs the Corinthians as he prepares to visit them. He is hoping to avoid needing to discipline anyone in the church, so he can visit them joyfully. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])\n\n## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter\n\n### Power and weakness\n\nPaul repeatedly uses the contrasting concepts “power” and “weakness” in this chapter. The translator should use words that are understood to be opposites of each other. It seems that people had been criticizing Paul for speaking powerfully in his letters, but being weak when in person (see 10:1). Paul explains that although he is weak, Christ works powerfully through him (13:3-4). God gave Paul power and authority to discipline believers who are living sinfully, but Paul prefers to use this power to encourage the believers to trust in God rather than to discipline them for not living in the right way (13:10). This is why he did not visit them again. It was so that he could persuade them in a letter rather than discipline them harshly in person (1:23;10:2;13:2,10).\n\n### Examine yourselves\n\nScholars are divided about the examination that Paul has in mind in verse 5. Some scholars say that believers are to test themselves to see whether their actions align with their Christian faith. The context favors this understanding. Others say that this test is to determine if the person actually belongs to God or not. Paul may have both ideas in mind. If a person examines his actions, finds them to be sinful but refuses to change them, then he has rejected God.\n\n### Approved and unapproved\n\nIn 13:5-7, Paul uses the concepts “approved” and “unapproved.” The words he uses for these are forms of the word translated “examine” in 13:5. The idea then, is that someone who is "approved" has been examined and has passed the examination. Paul begins in verse 5 by asking the Corinthian believers to examine themselves, to see if they are living as God wants them to live. Then in verse 6 he challenges them to evaluate Paul and his companions in that same way, because they are living in the right way. Finally, in verse 7 he says that he does not care about this kind of approval from them or from any humans, but he only wants the Corinthian believers to pass this test to show that God approves of them. +13:1 slj1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Only if two or three people have said the same thing about another person should God’s people believe that it is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +13:1 xfhc ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων καὶ τριῶν σταθήσεται πᾶν ῥῆμα 1 Paul is quoting here from Deuteronomy 19:15. He has been accusing the Corinthian believers of doing wrong, and so he compares the number of his visits, during which he has observed and will observe this wrong behavior, with the number of witnesses that the Old Testament required for convicting someone of doing wrong. You may want to include some of this information in a footnote. +13:1 gs3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ στόματος 1 Paul is using the term **mouth** to mean the words that people say by using their mouths. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural expression from your language or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by the word” or “on the testimony” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +13:2 fxl6 τοῖς λοιποῖς πᾶσιν 1 Alternate translation: “to all of you other believers” +13:2 ijip rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν ἔλθω 1 Paul speaks as if this were a hypothetical situation, but he means that he does intend to come again to Corinth. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is uncertain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +13:2 kfzf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ φείσομαι 1 The implication is that, when Paul comes, he will punish any believer there who is continuing to live sinfully. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I will not withhold punishment from anyone who is sinning” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +13:2 da34 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ φείσομαι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **spare**. Alternate translation: “I will certainly punish everyone” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +13:3 svtr rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δοκιμὴν ζητεῖτε τοῦ ἐν ἐμοὶ λαλοῦντος Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **proof**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “you want me to prove that Christ speaks through me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +13:3 kiw2 ἐν ἐμοὶ λαλοῦντος 1 Alternate translation: “speaking through me” +13:3 ffwe rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὃς 1 The pronoun **who** refers to **Christ**. If this is not clear for your readers, you could include “Christ” here. Alternate translation: “Christ, who” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +13:3 vd3j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλὰ δυνατεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 The implication is that Christ will be powerful among the Corinthian believers when Paul comes and disciplines them using Christ’s power. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “but will punish you powerfully when I come” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +13:4 a1bf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ & ἐσταυρώθη 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they crucified him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +13:4 rha6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐξ ἀσθενείας -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **weakness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “when he was weak” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +13:4 kh0y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐκ δυνάμεως Θεοῦ -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **power**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because God works powerfully … because God works powerfully” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +13:4 ezsm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀσθενοῦμεν ἐν αὐτῷ -1 Here, Paul is speaking of his relationship to Christ as if he were inside of Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “are weak as we imitate him” or “are weak, just as he was” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +13:5 ybkc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism ἑαυτοὺς πειράζετε & ἑαυτοὺς δοκιμάζετε 1 These two phrases mean the same thing. The second emphasizes the meaning of the first by repeating the same idea with different words. If your language does not have two ways to say this, you could repeat the same phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Test yourselves … Indeed, you must test yourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +13:5 z2oq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἑαυτοὺς -1 The word translated **yourselves** is plural, referring to all of the Corinthian believers. However, the meaning is that each believer is to examine himself, not that they should examine each other. If it would be helpful in your language, you could translate this as singular, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +13:5 q28n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐστὲ ἐν τῇ πίστει 1 Here, Paul is speaking of **faith** as if it were something which the Corinthians could be inside. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you truly believe in the Messiah” or “you are being faithful to the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +13:5 qvxm rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion ἢ οὐκ ἐπιγινώσκετε ἑαυτοὺς, ὅτι Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μήτι ἀδόκιμοί ἐστε 1 Paul is using the question form here to emphasize to the Corinthian believers something that is true: that Jesus Christ does live in them. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know that it is Jesus Christ himself who lives within you—unless you are not in the faith.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +13:5 sbx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Here, **in you** could mean: (1) Jesus is intimately connected to each believing individual, as if Jesus were living inside each person. Alternate translation: “part of who you are” (2) Jesus is living among them, part of and the most important member of the group. Alternate translation: “among you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +13:6 xk7u rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐλπίζω 1 Paul speaks as if he were uncertain about whether or not the Corinthian believers would understand that he is a true follower or apostle of Christ. He does this in order to convey modesty, but he is actually sure that they know that he is a true follower of Christ. If your language does not state something as uncertain if it is certain or true, and if your readers might think that what Paul is saying here is uncertain, then you could translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “I am sure” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +13:6 f8o8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς & ἐσμὲν 1 Here the word **ourselves** emphasizes that Paul is talking about his apostolic team, who introduced the Corinthian believers to Jesus Christ. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. Alternate translation: “we, yes, we, are” or “we, who serve Jesus, are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +13:6 fqbe rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἡμεῖς & ἐσμὲν 1 Paul is referring here to himself and his apostolic team, who introduced the Corinthian believers to Jesus Christ. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we, the very ones who brought you to Christ, are” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +13:6 zhkw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἐσμὲν ἀδόκιμοι 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **unapproved**. Alternate translation: “we ourselves are approved” or “we ourselves live as one with the Messiah” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +13:6 i34s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἐσμὲν ἀδόκιμοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the testing or approving, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “we ourselves have passed this test” or “God has accepted us ourselves as his own” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +13:7 pu5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent δὲ 1 Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a slightly new topic. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this, or it may be more natural to leave it out. Alternate translation: “Also,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +13:7 u75e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives μὴ ποιῆσαι ὑμᾶς κακὸν μηδέν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative word **wrong**. Alternate translation: “you may do everything right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +13:7 kmld rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς δόκιμοι φανῶμεν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in these ways, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the actions, it is people in general who do the seeing and either God or people who do the approving. Alternate translation: “people see that, for our part, God approves of us” or “people see our work with you and approve of us, the workers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +13:7 gt2e δόκιμοι 1 Alternate translation: “having gained God’s approval” +13:7 wcrp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς & ὑμεῖς & ἡμεῖς 1 Paul uses the words **ourselves** and **yourselves** to emphasize the difference between his thinking and the thinking of the Corinthian believers. He wants only good for them, while they suspect that he wants only good for himself. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. If you use the following suggestion, it will need a comma before each phrase. Alternate translation: “on our part, … on your part, … on our part,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +13:7 yiww rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡμεῖς δὲ ὡς ἀδόκιμοι ὦμεν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the approving, it is either God or people in general. Alternate translation: “even if it seems that God has not approved of us ourselves” or “even if people think that we ourselves have had no part in your success” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +13:8 bqd3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 The word translated as **For** indicates that what follows is a reason for what came before. Use a connector in your language that makes it clear that what follows is a reason for what came before. Alternate translation: “This is because” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +13:8 jvke rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀληθείας -1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **truth**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “God’s true message … God’s true message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 13:9 vt7b τὴν ὑμῶν κατάρτισιν 1 Alternate translation: “that you may become spiritually mature” -13:10 rlm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν. 1 Paul speaks of helping the Corinthians to know Christ better as if he were constructing a building. See how you translated a similar phrase in [2 Corinthians 10:8](../10/08.md). Alternate translation: “to help you become better followers of Christ and not to discourage you so you stop following him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -13:11 uk1p Connecting Statement: 0 # Connecting Statement:\n\nPaul closes his letter to the Corinthian believers. -13:11 fm8m καταρτίζεσθε 1 Alternate translation: “Work toward maturity” -13:11 diw1 τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖτε 1 Alternate translation: “live in harmony with one another” -13:12 p1nh ἐν ἁγίῳ φιλήματι 1 Alternate translation: “with Christian love” -13:12 x2qd οἱ ἅγιοι 1 Alternate translation: “those whom God has set apart for himself” +13:9 kr1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 The word translated as **For** here indicates that what follows continues to give another reason, along with verse 8, for the statement of verse 7. Use a connector that indicates that this is another reason, if that would be natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You see,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +13:9 h8h6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς & ὑμεῖς 1 Here, as in verse 7, the words **ourselves** and **yourselves** emphasize the difference between Paul and the Corinthian believers. He wants them to be strong in the Lord, and it doesn’t matter if people think that he is weak. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this significance. If you use the following suggestion, it will need a comma before each phrase. Alternate translation: “on our part, … on your part,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +13:9 ep5s rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns τοῦτο καὶ εὐχόμεθα 1 The pronoun **this** here refers to what Paul desires for the Corinthian believers, which he states in two ways. First, that they be **powerful** in serving God, and then for their **restoration** to a right relationship with God. Those are both the same thing. If this is not clear for your readers, you could use a clearer expression. Alternate translation: “In fact, we pray for this” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +13:10 kbpp rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns διὰ τοῦτο 1 The pronoun **this** refers to what Paul has just written in verse 9, that he wants the Corinthian believers to be restored to a right relationship with God. If this is not clear for your readers, you could repeat that information here. Alternate translation: “Because I want you to be restored to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +13:10 dqu4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ταῦτα 1 The words **these things** refer to what Paul has written in the entire letter, but especially to the warnings and exhortations in chapters 10-13. If this is not clear for your readers, you could include that information here. Alternate translation: “the things in this letter” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +13:10 kzue rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns κατὰ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἣν ὁ Κύριος ἔδωκέν μοι 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **authority**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as the person that the Lord has authorized” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +13:10 rlm8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰς οἰκοδομὴν καὶ οὐκ εἰς καθαίρεσιν. 1 Here, Paul is speaking of the Corinthian believers as if they were a building. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a more natural metaphor for this or you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help you become more faithful to Christ and not to make you want to forsake him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +13:11 bdql rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you retain the metaphor in your translation, and if it would be helpful in your language, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate this. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +13:11 fm8m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καταρτίζεσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated a form of this word at the end of verse 9. Alternate translation: “Work toward maturity” or “Decide to trust and obey God completely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +13:11 nfyp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive παρακαλεῖσθε 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. The person doing the encouraging could be: (1) Paul. Alternate translation: “allow me to encourage you” (2) God. Alternate translation: “receive encouragement from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +13:11 diw1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ αὐτὸ φρονεῖτε 1 Here, **think the same** means to agree on the most important things and to not argue about the lesser things. Alternate translation: “make sure that you all agree on what is important” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +13:11 axul rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰρηνεύετε 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “be peaceful with each other” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +13:11 vrfk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης 1 Here, Paul is using the possessive form to describe **God** as being characterized by **love and peace**. This probably means both that God is the source of love and peace and also that he enables his people to have love and peace. Try to include both meanings, if possible. Alternate translation: “God, who gives love and peace,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +13:11 t9io rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὁ Θεὸς τῆς ἀγάπης καὶ εἰρήνης 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **love and peace**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “God, who empowers you to love and to be peaceful,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +13:12 p1nh rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction ἐν ἁγίῳ φιλήματι 1 A **holy kiss** was a symbolic action to show familial love between believers. In some cultures, a kiss as a greeting is appropriate, but in other cultures it is not appropriate. The idea of a **holy kiss** is that it be a greeting that is appropriate in the culture, whether it be a kiss, a hug, a handshake, or something else, and also that it be **holy**, that is, appropriate between God’s people. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action in the text or in a footnote. Alternate translation: “warmly, as fellow believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +13:12 x2qd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οἱ ἅγιοι 1 These **saints** are the fellow believers who are there with Paul. You could include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “your fellow believers here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +13:13 qodb rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends his letter with this blessing. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray for all of you that the Lord Jesus Christ will give you his grace, that God will give you his love, and that the Holy Spirit will give you his fellowship.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +13:13 st07 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ ἡ κοινωνία τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος, μετὰ πάντων ὑμῶν 1 If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **grace**, **love**, and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas in another way. Alternate translation: “May the Lord Jesus Christ continue to be gracious to you, may God continue to love you, and may the Holy Spirit unite you all closely together as believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])